Перевод: со всех языков на английский

с английского на все языки

which of them was the greatest

  • 1 ἄν

    1
    I. ἄν (after relatives ἐάν [q.v.] is oft. used for ἄν, but the mss. vary greatly, s. B-D-F §107; 377; Mlt. 42ff, 165ff; Mayser 152f; Crönert 130f; Thackeray 67; Dssm., NB 30ff [BS 202ff]). A particle peculiar to Gk. (Hom.+) denoting aspect of contingency, incapable of translation by a single English word; it denotes that the action of the verb is dependent on some circumstance or condition; the effect of ἄν upon the meaning of its clause depends on the mood and tense/aspect of the verb w. which it is used. The NT use of ἄν corresponds in the main to older Gk., although the rich variety of its employment is limited, as is generally the case in later Greek. In certain constructions (s. aβ) an aspect of certainty is indicated, suggesting the gloss would. In most other instances aspects of varying possibility or conditionality find expression in ways that can be rendered ever, but with other glosses required when ἄν is used in conjunction with other particles.
    ⓐ ἄν w. aor. or impf. indic.
    α. denoting repeated action in past time, but only under certain given conditions, esp. after relatives (B-D-F §367; Rob. index): aor. (Gen 30:42; Num 9:17; 1 Km 14:47; Ezk 10:11) ὅσοι ἂν ἥψαντο αὐτοῦ, ἐσῴζοντο whoever touched him was cured Mk 6:56. Impf. (Ezk 1:20; 1 Macc 13:20; Tob 7:11) ὅπου ἂν εἰσεπορεύετο εἰς κώμας wherever he went (as he was accustomed to do—ADebrunner, D. hellenist. Nebensatziterativpräteritum mit ἄν: Glotta 11, 1920, 1–28) into villages Mk 6:56. καθότι ἄν τις χρείαν εἶχεν as anyone was in need Ac 2:45; 4:35. Similarly ὡς ἂν ἤγεσθε (v.l. ἀνήγεσθε) 1 Cor 12:2. Cp. also ὅταν 1bγ and δ.
    β. in the apodosis of a contrary to fact (unreal) condition w. εἰ (B-D-F §360; but ἄν is not always used [s. the vv.ll. J 18:36]: §360, 1; Mlt. 199ff; PMelcher, De sermone Epicteteo 1905, 75); it is found
    א. w. impf. (4 Macc 17:7; Bar 3:13; ParJer 5:20; GrBar 6:6; ApcMos 39) οὗτος εἰ ἦν προφήτης, ἐγίνωσκεν ἄν if he were a prophet, he would (now) know (but he does not) Lk 7:39. εἰ ἔχετε πίστιν …, ἐλέγετε ἄν if you had faith …, you would say 17:6. εἰ ἐπιστεύετε Μωϋσεῖ, ἐπιστεύετε ἂν ἐμοί J 5:46. εἰ ἐμὲ ᾔδειτε, καὶ τὸν πατέρα μου ἄν ᾔδειτε 8:19; cp. vs. 42; 9:41; 15:19. εἰ ἔτι ἀνθρώποις ἤρεσκον, Χριστοῦ δοῦλος οὐκ ἂν ἤμην Gal 1:10; cp. 3:21. εἰ ἑαυτοὺς διεκρίνομεν, οὐκ ἂν ἐκρινόμεθα 1 Cor 11:31. εἰ ἦν ἐπὶ γῆς, οὐδʼ ἂν ἦν ἱερεύς if he were on earth, he would not even be a priest Hb 8:4; cp. 4:8; 8:7; 11:15.
    ב. w. aor., placing the assumption in the past (Gen 30:27; Wsd 11:25; Jdth 11:2; 4 Macc 2:20; TestJob 7:9 al.; ParJer 5:5; GrBar 8:7; PGiss 47, 17) εἰ ἐγένοντο αἱ δυνάμεις, πάλαι ἂν … μετενόησαν if the miracles had been performed, they would long ago have repented Mt 11:21. εἰ ἔγνωσαν, οὐκ ἂν ἐσταύρωσαν 1 Cor 2:8; cp. Ro 9:29 (Is 1:9). εἰ ἐγνώκειτε, οὐκ ἂν κατεδικάσατε if you had recognized, you would not have condemned Mt 12:7. εἰ ἠγαπᾶτέ με, ἐχάρητε ἄν if you loved me, you would have rejoiced J 14:28; cp. 11:21. The plpf. for aor. indic. (PGiss 79 II, 6 εἰ δυνατόν μοι ἦν, οὐκ ἂν ὠκνήκειν; BGU 1141, 27f) εἰ ἦσαν, μεμενήκεισαν ἄν 1J 2:19; cp. J 11:21 v.l.—In κἀγὼ ἐλθὼν σὺν τόκῳ ἂν αὐτὸ ἔπραξα Lk 19:23, ἐλθών functions as an unreal-temporal protasis (B-D-F §360, 2); cp. καὶ ἐλθὼν ἐγὼ ἐκομισάμην ἂν τὸ ἐμόν Mt 25:27. Sim. ἐπεὶ οὐκ ἂν ἐπαύσαντο προσφερόμεναι; where ἐπεί functions as protasis, otherwise (i.e. if the sacrifices had really brought about a lasting atonement) would they not have ceased to offer sacrifices? Hb 10:2.
    ⓑ ἄν w. subjunc. after relatives, the rel. clause forming virtually the protasis of a conditional sentence (B-D-F §380, 1) of the future more vivid or present general type.
    α. w. fut. or impf. in apodosis, to show that the condition and its results are thought of as in the future, of single and repeated action (IG XIV, 865 [VI B.C.] ὸ̔ς δʼ ἄν με κλέψῃ, τυφλὸς ἔσται; TestAbr B 4 p. 109, 10 [Stone p. 66]). ὸ̔ς δʼ ἂν ποιήσῃ καὶ διδάξῃ, οὗτος μέγας κληθήσεται but whoever does and teaches=if a person does and teaches it Mt 5:19. ὸ̔ς ἂν ἐσθίῃ …, ἔνοχος ἔσται 1 Cor 11:27. οὓς ἐὰν (v.l. ἂν) δοκιμάσητε, τούτους πέμψω 16:3—Mt 10:11; 1 Cor 16:2.
    β. w. pres. in apodosis, to show that the condition and its results involve repeated action, regardless of the time element: ἃ ἂν ἐκεῖνος ποιῇ, ταῦτα καὶ ὁ υἱὸς ὁμοίως ποιεῖ whatever he does, the Son does likewise J 5:19. ὅπου ἐὰν (v.l. ἂν) αὐτὸν καταλάβῃ, ῥήσσει αὐτόν wherever it seizes him Mk 9:18. ὑμῖν ἐστὶν ἡ ἐπαγγελία …, ὅσους ἂν προσκαλέσηται κύριος Ac 2:39. ὸ̔ς ἐὰν (v.l. ἂν) βουληθῇ φίλος εἶναι τοῦ κόσμου, ἐχθρὸς τοῦ θεοῦ καθίσταται whoever wishes to be a friend of the world Js 4:4. Cp. ὅπου ἄν 3:4 v.l.—Where ὅς or ὅστις appears w. subj. without ἄν (but cp. IG XII/1, 671 ὸ̔ς ἀνασπαράξῃ τ. τάφον; CPR I, 24, 33; 25, 19; AcThom 93 [Aa II/2, 206], 19; Is 7:2; 31:4), the reading that gives the fut. ind. is prob. the right one: ὅστις τηρήσῃ (v.l.-σει) Js 2:10. ὅσοι (without ἄν PPetr I, 13, 3;5; CPR I, 237, 3; IPergamon 249, 26 ὅσοι … ἐγλίπωσι τὴν πόλιν; Vett. Val. 125, 16): ὅσοι μετανοήσωσιν καὶ καθαρίσωσιν Hs 8, 11, 3 (s. W. and Joly app. for the textual tradition). See Reinhold 108; B-D-F §380, 4.
    ⓒ In temporal clauses ἄν is found w. the subjunct. when an event is to be described which can and will occur, but whose occurrence cannot yet be assumed w. certainty. So
    α. ὅταν (=ὅτε ἄν; s. ὅταν) w. pres. subjunct. to indicate regularly recurring action (Wsd 12:18): ὅταν ἄρτον ἐσθίωσιν whenever they eat bread Mt 15:2. ὅταν λαλῇ τὸ ψεῦδος whenever he tells a lie J 8:44. ὅταν λέγῃ τις whenever anyone says 1 Cor 3:4.—W. aor. subjunct. to express action in the future which is thought of as already completed (Sir Prol. ln. 22; Tob 8:21) ὅταν ποιήσητε πάντα when you have done Lk 17:10. ὅταν ἔλθῃ ὁ κύριος when the owner has come Mt 21:40; ὅταν ἔλθῃ ἐν τῇ δόξῃ Mk 8:38; cp. J 4:25; 16:13; Ac 23:35. ὅταν πάλιν εἰσαγάγῃ τὸν πρωτότοκον Hb 1:6.
    β. ἡνίκα ἄν every time that (Ex 1:10; 33:22; 34:24 al.; POxy 104, 26 [96 A.D.]; PTebt 317, 18 [174/75] ἡνίκα ἐὰν εἰς τὸν νόμον παραγένηται). ἡνίκα ἂν (also ἐάν mss.) ἀναγινώσκηται Μωϋσῆς every time that Moses is read aloud 2 Cor 3:15; cp. vs. 16.
    γ. ὁσάκις ἐάν as often as: ὁσάκις ἐὰν (also ἄν mss.) πίνητε 1 Cor 11:25. ὁσάκις ἐὰν (also ἄν mss.) ἐσθίητε vs. 26.
    δ. ὡς ἄν as soon as (PHib 59, 2 [c. 245 B.C.] ὡς ἂν λάβῃς; 66, 4; PEleph 9, 3 [III B.C.]; PParis 46, 18 [143 B.C.]; BGU 1209, 13 [23 B.C.]; Josh 2:14; Jdth 11:15; 1 Macc 15:9): ὡς ἂν πορεύωμαι as soon as I travel Ro 15:24. ὡς ἂν ἔλθω as soon as I come 1 Cor 11:34. ὡς ἂν ἀφίδω τὰ περὶ ἐμέ as soon as I see how it will go with me Phil 2:23. ὡς ἐάν (PFay 111, 16 [95/96]) Hv 3, 8, 9; 3, 13, 2.—ἀφʼ οὗ ἄν after Lk 13:25.—In the case of temporal particles indicating a goal, viz. ἕως οὗ, ἄχρις (οὗ), μέχρις (οὗ), the mss. show considerable variation; the addition of ἄν is prob. correct only in rare cases (see B-D-F §383, 2). Only ἕως ἄν (PPetr II, 40a, 28 [III B.C.] ἕως ἂν ὑγιαίνοντας ὑμᾶς ἴδωμεν; Gen 24:14, 19; 49:10; Ex 23:30 al.) has certain attestation: μείνατε ἕως ἂν ἐξέλθητε stay until you go away Mt 10:11. ἕως ἂν ἴδωσιν τὴν βασιλείαν τοῦ θεοῦ Lk 9:27.—Mt 2:13; 5:26. ἕως ἂν λάβῃ Js 5:7 v.l.—ἄχρις οὗ (+ ἄν v.l.) ἔλθῃ 1 Cor 11:26. ἄχρις οὗ (+ ἄν v.l.) θῇ 15:25; ἄχρις οὗ ἂν ἥξω Rv 2:25 (v.l. ἄχρι). ἄχρις ἂν ἔλθῃ (cp. BGU 830, 13 [I A.D.] ἄχρις ἄν σοι ἔλθω) Gal 3:19 v.l.—πρὶν ἄν: πρὶν ἢ ἂν (vv.ll. πρὶν ἄν, πρὶν ἢ, only πρὶν or ἕως ἂν) ἴδῃ τὸν Χριστόν Lk 2:26 (B-D-F §383, 3).
    ⓓ In purpose clauses the Attic (EHermann, Griech. Forschungen I, 1912, 267f; JKnuenz, De enuntiatis Graec. finalibus 1913, 13ff; 26ff) ὅπως ἄν, esp. freq. in earlier ins (Meisterhans3-Schw. 254), has become quite rare (LXX still rather often: Gen 18:19; 50:20; Ex 33:13; Jer 7:23 al.) ὅπως ἂν ἀποκαλυφθῶσιν διαλογισμοί Lk 2:35. ὅπως ἂν ἔλθωσιν καιροί Ac 3:20.—15:17 (Am 9:12 v.l.); Ro 3:4 (Ps 50:6); Mt 6:5 v.l.
    ⓔ The opt. w. ἄν in a main clause (potential opt.) has almost wholly disappeared; a rare ex. is εὐξαίμην (v.l. εὐξάμην) ἄν Ac 26:29 in Paul’s speech before Agrippa (literary usage; s. B-D-F §385, 1; also Rob. 938; Themist. 6 p. 80 D.—On the rarity of the potential opt. in pap, LXX, Apost. Fathers see CHarsing, De Optat. in Chartis Aeg. Usu, diss. Bonn 1910, 28; Reinhold 111). Cp.—also in the literary lang. of Lk—direct rhetor. questions (Gen 23:15; Job 19:23; Sir 25:3; 4 Macc 7:22; 14:10 v.l.; TestJob 13:5 τίς ἄν δώῃ 35:5) πῶς γὰρ ἂν δυναίμην; Ac 8:31. τί ἂν θέλοι οὗτος λέγειν; 17:18. Dg has also preserved the opt. as a mark of elegant style (2:3, 10; 3:3f; 4:5; 7:2f; 8:3). MPol 2:2 has τίς οὐκ ἂν θαυμάσειεν;—More freq. in an indirect question, after an impf. or histor. pres. (B-D-F §386, 1; Rob. 938f) τὸ τί ἂν θέλοι καλεῖσθαι αὐτό what he wanted the child’s name to be Lk 1:62. τίς ἂν εἴη περὶ οὗ λέγει J 13:24. τὸ τίς ἂν εἴη μείζων αὐτῶν which of them was the greatest Lk 9:46; cp. 18:36 v.l. τί ἂν ποιήσαιεν τῷ Ἰησοῦ what they should do to Jesus 6:11. τί ἂν γένοιτο τοῦτο Ac 5:24. τί ἂν εἴη τὸ ὅραμα 10:17. (IMagnMai 215 [I A.D.] ἐπερωτᾷ … τί ἂν ποιήσας … ἀδεῶς διατελοίη; Esth 3:13c πυθομένου δέ μου … πῶς ἂν ἀχθείη τοῦτο.)
    ⓕ The use of ἄν w. inf. and ptc., freq. in earlier Gk., is not found in the NT at all (B-D-F §396); ἵνα μὴ δόξω ὡς ἂν (or ὡσὰν, q.v.) ἐκφοβεῖν ὑμᾶς 2 Cor 10:9 is surely to be expl. in such a way that ὡς ἂν=Lat. quasi: I would not want it to appear as if I were frightening you; s. B-D-F §453, 3; Mlt. 167.—On εἰ μήτι ἂν (sc. γένηται) ἐκ συμφώνου except perhaps by agreement 1 Cor 7:5 s. B-D-F §376; Mlt. 169.—M-M.
    2
    II. ἄν for ἐάν is rare in Hellen. Gk. (B-D-F §107; Mlt. 43 n. 2; cp. Hyperid. 4, 5; 5, 15; Teles p. 31, 6; Plut., Mor. 547a; Epict., index Schenkl; pap [Mayser 152]; ins, esp. of the Aegean Sea [Rdm.2 198, 3; s. also SIG index IV 204]; 1 Esdr 2:16; 4 Macc 16:11; Jos., Ant. 4, 70; 219; Test12Patr; Mel. Fgm. 8b 24), but appears J 13:20; 16:23; 20:23; as v.l. 5:19; 9:22; 12:32; 19:12; Ac 9:2; and IMg 10:1.—Mlt. 63, 1.—M-M.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ἄν

  • 2 difusión

    f.
    diffusion, pervasion, broadcasting, dissemination.
    * * *
    1 (de luz, calor) diffusion
    2 figurado (de noticia, enfermedad, etc) spreading
    3 RADIO broadcast, broadcasting
    \
    tener gran difusión to be widely known, be widespread
    * * *
    SF
    1) [de calor, luz] diffusion
    2) [de noticia, teoría] dissemination, spreading
    3) (Periodismo) [de programa] broadcasting; [de periódico] circulation, readership figures pl
    * * *
    femenino (de noticia, rumor) spreading; (de ideas, doctrina) spreading, diffusion (frml)
    * * *
    = dissemination, projection, spread, airing, propagation, diffusion, spreading.
    Ex. An indexing system is a set of prescribed procedures for organising the contents of records of knowledge or documents for the purposes of retrieval and dissemination.
    Ex. The current practice of promotion and projection of public library services tends to be amateurish, piecemeal, unsustained and difficult to evaluate.
    Ex. With the spread of video equipment, an increasing number of visual media with local history content have come into being.
    Ex. To achieve a full airing of concerns, librarians must work to overcome the unfavorable odds against the individual's access to unpopular or anti-establishment views.
    Ex. As part of an imported culture libraries may be associated with influences undermining traditional values and self-confidence and with the propagation of negative values such as consumerism.
    Ex. Mathematical models are presented that describe the diffusion of gaseous pollutants from the air in a storeroom into protective containers and the reaction with the documents lying in them.
    Ex. The greatest boost to the spreading of knowledge through vastly increased book production was the invention of woodblock printing which was well developed by the late 9th century.
    ----
    * difusión de información = information provision, provision of information, dissemination of information.
    * difusión de la información = information diffusion, information dissemination.
    * difusión de rumores = rumour mongering.
    * difusión electrónica de documentos (DED) = electronic document delivery (EDD).
    * difusión por radio y televisión = broadcast, broadcasting.
    * difusión selectiva de la información = SDI (selective dissemination of information).
    * servicio de difusión selectiva de la información = SDI service.
    * * *
    femenino (de noticia, rumor) spreading; (de ideas, doctrina) spreading, diffusion (frml)
    * * *
    = dissemination, projection, spread, airing, propagation, diffusion, spreading.

    Ex: An indexing system is a set of prescribed procedures for organising the contents of records of knowledge or documents for the purposes of retrieval and dissemination.

    Ex: The current practice of promotion and projection of public library services tends to be amateurish, piecemeal, unsustained and difficult to evaluate.
    Ex: With the spread of video equipment, an increasing number of visual media with local history content have come into being.
    Ex: To achieve a full airing of concerns, librarians must work to overcome the unfavorable odds against the individual's access to unpopular or anti-establishment views.
    Ex: As part of an imported culture libraries may be associated with influences undermining traditional values and self-confidence and with the propagation of negative values such as consumerism.
    Ex: Mathematical models are presented that describe the diffusion of gaseous pollutants from the air in a storeroom into protective containers and the reaction with the documents lying in them.
    Ex: The greatest boost to the spreading of knowledge through vastly increased book production was the invention of woodblock printing which was well developed by the late 9th century.
    * difusión de información = information provision, provision of information, dissemination of information.
    * difusión de la información = information diffusion, information dissemination.
    * difusión de rumores = rumour mongering.
    * difusión electrónica de documentos (DED) = electronic document delivery (EDD).
    * difusión por radio y televisión = broadcast, broadcasting.
    * difusión selectiva de la información = SDI (selective dissemination of information).
    * servicio de difusión selectiva de la información = SDI service.

    * * *
    (de una noticia, un rumor) spreading; (de ideas, una doctrina) spreading, diffusion ( frml)
    se ha dado amplia difusión al conflicto the conflict has been given widespread coverage
    un libro de mucha difusión entre los jóvenes a book which is widely read among the young
    * * *

     

    difusión sustantivo femenino (de noticia, rumor) spreading;
    (de ideas, doctrina, cultura) spreading, diffusion (frml);

    difusión sustantivo femenino
    1 (de noticias, rumores) spreading, circulation: la difusión de su teoría es nula, his theory is not widely known
    2 Rad TV broadcasting
    3 Fís Quím diffusion

    ' difusión' also found in these entries:
    Spanish:
    extensión
    - generalización
    - nacional
    English:
    democracy
    - spread
    * * *
    1. [de noticia, rumor] spreading;
    [de religión, ideología] spread, dissemination; [de cultura, costumbres] spreading, diffusion;
    el evento tuvo enorme difusión en la prensa escrita the event received extensive press coverage
    2. [por radio, televisión] broadcasting;
    3. [de epidemia, olor, calor] spread;
    [de sonido, ondas] diffusion, spread
    4. [de periódico, revista] circulation
    * * *
    f spread(ing)
    * * *
    difusión nf, pl - siones
    1) : spreading
    2) : diffusion (of heat, etc.)
    3) : broadcast, broadcasting
    los medios de difusión: the media

    Spanish-English dictionary > difusión

  • 3 Historical Portugal

       Before Romans described western Iberia or Hispania as "Lusitania," ancient Iberians inhabited the land. Phoenician and Greek trading settlements grew up in the Tagus estuary area and nearby coasts. Beginning around 202 BCE, Romans invaded what is today southern Portugal. With Rome's defeat of Carthage, Romans proceeded to conquer and rule the western region north of the Tagus, which they named Roman "Lusitania." In the fourth century CE, as Rome's rule weakened, the area experienced yet another invasion—Germanic tribes, principally the Suevi, who eventually were Christianized. During the sixth century CE, the Suevi kingdom was superseded by yet another Germanic tribe—the Christian Visigoths.
       A major turning point in Portugal's history came in 711, as Muslim armies from North Africa, consisting of both Arab and Berber elements, invaded the Iberian Peninsula from across the Straits of Gibraltar. They entered what is now Portugal in 714, and proceeded to conquer most of the country except for the far north. For the next half a millennium, Islam and Muslim presence in Portugal left a significant mark upon the politics, government, language, and culture of the country.
       Islam, Reconquest, and Portugal Created, 714-1140
       The long frontier struggle between Muslim invaders and Christian communities in the north of the Iberian peninsula was called the Reconquista (Reconquest). It was during this struggle that the first dynasty of Portuguese kings (Burgundian) emerged and the independent monarchy of Portugal was established. Christian forces moved south from what is now the extreme north of Portugal and gradually defeated Muslim forces, besieging and capturing towns under Muslim sway. In the ninth century, as Christian forces slowly made their way southward, Christian elements were dominant only in the area between Minho province and the Douro River; this region became known as "territorium Portu-calense."
       In the 11th century, the advance of the Reconquest quickened as local Christian armies were reinforced by crusading knights from what is now France and England. Christian forces took Montemor (1034), at the Mondego River; Lamego (1058); Viseu (1058); and Coimbra (1064). In 1095, the king of Castile and Léon granted the country of "Portu-cale," what became northern Portugal, to a Burgundian count who had emigrated from France. This was the foundation of Portugal. In 1139, a descendant of this count, Afonso Henriques, proclaimed himself "King of Portugal." He was Portugal's first monarch, the "Founder," and the first of the Burgundian dynasty, which ruled until 1385.
       The emergence of Portugal in the 12th century as a separate monarchy in Iberia occurred before the Christian Reconquest of the peninsula. In the 1140s, the pope in Rome recognized Afonso Henriques as king of Portugal. In 1147, after a long, bloody siege, Muslim-occupied Lisbon fell to Afonso Henriques's army. Lisbon was the greatest prize of the 500-year war. Assisting this effort were English crusaders on their way to the Holy Land; the first bishop of Lisbon was an Englishman. When the Portuguese captured Faro and Silves in the Algarve province in 1248-50, the Reconquest of the extreme western portion of the Iberian peninsula was complete—significantly, more than two centuries before the Spanish crown completed the Reconquest of the eastern portion by capturing Granada in 1492.
       Consolidation and Independence of Burgundian Portugal, 1140-1385
       Two main themes of Portugal's early existence as a monarchy are the consolidation of control over the realm and the defeat of a Castil-ian threat from the east to its independence. At the end of this period came the birth of a new royal dynasty (Aviz), which prepared to carry the Christian Reconquest beyond continental Portugal across the straits of Gibraltar to North Africa. There was a variety of motives behind these developments. Portugal's independent existence was imperiled by threats from neighboring Iberian kingdoms to the north and east. Politics were dominated not only by efforts against the Muslims in
       Portugal (until 1250) and in nearby southern Spain (until 1492), but also by internecine warfare among the kingdoms of Castile, Léon, Aragon, and Portugal. A final comeback of Muslim forces was defeated at the battle of Salado (1340) by allied Castilian and Portuguese forces. In the emerging Kingdom of Portugal, the monarch gradually gained power over and neutralized the nobility and the Church.
       The historic and commonplace Portuguese saying "From Spain, neither a good wind nor a good marriage" was literally played out in diplomacy and war in the late 14th-century struggles for mastery in the peninsula. Larger, more populous Castile was pitted against smaller Portugal. Castile's Juan I intended to force a union between Castile and Portugal during this era of confusion and conflict. In late 1383, Portugal's King Fernando, the last king of the Burgundian dynasty, suddenly died prematurely at age 38, and the Master of Aviz, Portugal's most powerful nobleman, took up the cause of independence and resistance against Castile's invasion. The Master of Aviz, who became King João I of Portugal, was able to obtain foreign assistance. With the aid of English archers, Joao's armies defeated the Castilians in the crucial battle of Aljubarrota, on 14 August 1385, a victory that assured the independence of the Portuguese monarchy from its Castilian nemesis for several centuries.
       Aviz Dynasty and Portugal's First Overseas Empire, 1385-1580
       The results of the victory at Aljubarrota, much celebrated in Portugal's art and monuments, and the rise of the Aviz dynasty also helped to establish a new merchant class in Lisbon and Oporto, Portugal's second city. This group supported King João I's program of carrying the Reconquest to North Africa, since it was interested in expanding Portugal's foreign commerce and tapping into Muslim trade routes and resources in Africa. With the Reconquest against the Muslims completed in Portugal and the threat from Castile thwarted for the moment, the Aviz dynasty launched an era of overseas conquest, exploration, and trade. These efforts dominated Portugal's 15th and 16th centuries.
       The overseas empire and age of Discoveries began with Portugal's bold conquest in 1415 of the Moroccan city of Ceuta. One royal member of the 1415 expedition was young, 21-year-old Prince Henry, later known in history as "Prince Henry the Navigator." His part in the capture of Ceuta won Henry his knighthood and began Portugal's "Marvelous Century," during which the small kingdom was counted as a European and world power of consequence. Henry was the son of King João I and his English queen, Philippa of Lancaster, but he did not inherit the throne. Instead, he spent most of his life and his fortune, and that of the wealthy military Order of Christ, on various imperial ventures and on voyages of exploration down the African coast and into the Atlantic. While mythology has surrounded Henry's controversial role in the Discoveries, and this role has been exaggerated, there is no doubt that he played a vital part in the initiation of Portugal's first overseas empire and in encouraging exploration. He was naturally curious, had a sense of mission for Portugal, and was a strong leader. He also had wealth to expend; at least a third of the African voyages of the time were under his sponsorship. If Prince Henry himself knew little science, significant scientific advances in navigation were made in his day.
       What were Portugal's motives for this new imperial effort? The well-worn historical cliche of "God, Glory, and Gold" can only partly explain the motivation of a small kingdom with few natural resources and barely 1 million people, which was greatly outnumbered by the other powers it confronted. Among Portuguese objectives were the desire to exploit known North African trade routes and resources (gold, wheat, leather, weaponry, and other goods that were scarce in Iberia); the need to outflank the Muslim world in the Mediterranean by sailing around Africa, attacking Muslims en route; and the wish to ally with Christian kingdoms beyond Africa. This enterprise also involved a strategy of breaking the Venetian spice monopoly by trading directly with the East by means of discovering and exploiting a sea route around Africa to Asia. Besides the commercial motives, Portugal nurtured a strong crusading sense of Christian mission, and various classes in the kingdom saw an opportunity for fame and gain.
       By the time of Prince Henry's death in 1460, Portugal had gained control of the Atlantic archipelagos of the Azores and Madeiras, begun to colonize the Cape Verde Islands, failed to conquer the Canary Islands from Castile, captured various cities on Morocco's coast, and explored as far as Senegal, West Africa, down the African coast. By 1488, Bar-tolomeu Dias had rounded the Cape of Good Hope in South Africa and thereby discovered the way to the Indian Ocean.
       Portugal's largely coastal African empire and later its fragile Asian empire brought unexpected wealth but were purchased at a high price. Costs included wars of conquest and defense against rival powers, manning the far-flung navel and trade fleets and scattered castle-fortresses, and staffing its small but fierce armies, all of which entailed a loss of skills and population to maintain a scattered empire. Always short of capital, the monarchy became indebted to bankers. There were many defeats beginning in the 16th century at the hands of the larger imperial European monarchies (Spain, France, England, and Holland) and many attacks on Portugal and its strung-out empire. Typically, there was also the conflict that arose when a tenuously held world empire that rarely if ever paid its way demanded finance and manpower Portugal itself lacked.
       The first 80 years of the glorious imperial era, the golden age of Portugal's imperial power and world influence, was an African phase. During 1415-88, Portuguese navigators and explorers in small ships, some of them caravelas (caravels), explored the treacherous, disease-ridden coasts of Africa from Morocco to South Africa beyond the Cape of Good Hope. By the 1470s, the Portuguese had reached the Gulf of Guinea and, in the early 1480s, what is now Angola. Bartolomeu Dias's extraordinary voyage of 1487-88 to South Africa's coast and the edge of the Indian Ocean convinced Portugal that the best route to Asia's spices and Christians lay south, around the tip of southern Africa. Between 1488 and 1495, there was a hiatus caused in part by domestic conflict in Portugal, discussion of resources available for further conquests beyond Africa in Asia, and serious questions as to Portugal's capacity to reach beyond Africa. In 1495, King Manuel and his council decided to strike for Asia, whatever the consequences. In 1497-99, Vasco da Gama, under royal orders, made the epic two-year voyage that discovered the sea route to western India (Asia), outflanked Islam and Venice, and began Portugal's Asian empire. Within 50 years, Portugal had discovered and begun the exploitation of its largest colony, Brazil, and set up forts and trading posts from the Middle East (Aden and Ormuz), India (Calicut, Goa, etc.), Malacca, and Indonesia to Macau in China.
       By the 1550s, parts of its largely coastal, maritime trading post empire from Morocco to the Moluccas were under siege from various hostile forces, including Muslims, Christians, and Hindi. Although Moroccan forces expelled the Portuguese from the major coastal cities by 1550, the rival European monarchies of Castile (Spain), England, France, and later Holland began to seize portions of her undermanned, outgunned maritime empire.
       In 1580, Phillip II of Spain, whose mother was a Portuguese princess and who had a strong claim to the Portuguese throne, invaded Portugal, claimed the throne, and assumed control over the realm and, by extension, its African, Asian, and American empires. Phillip II filled the power vacuum that appeared in Portugal following the loss of most of Portugal's army and its young, headstrong King Sebastião in a disastrous war in Morocco. Sebastiao's death in battle (1578) and the lack of a natural heir to succeed him, as well as the weak leadership of the cardinal who briefly assumed control in Lisbon, led to a crisis that Spain's strong monarch exploited. As a result, Portugal lost its independence to Spain for a period of 60 years.
       Portugal under Spanish Rule, 1580-1640
       Despite the disastrous nature of Portugal's experience under Spanish rule, "The Babylonian Captivity" gave birth to modern Portuguese nationalism, its second overseas empire, and its modern alliance system with England. Although Spain allowed Portugal's weakened empire some autonomy, Spanish rule in Portugal became increasingly burdensome and unacceptable. Spain's ambitious imperial efforts in Europe and overseas had an impact on the Portuguese as Spain made greater and greater demands on its smaller neighbor for manpower and money. Portugal's culture underwent a controversial Castilianization, while its empire became hostage to Spain's fortunes. New rival powers England, France, and Holland attacked and took parts of Spain's empire and at the same time attacked Portugal's empire, as well as the mother country.
       Portugal's empire bore the consequences of being attacked by Spain's bitter enemies in what was a form of world war. Portuguese losses were heavy. By 1640, Portugal had lost most of its Moroccan cities as well as Ceylon, the Moluccas, and sections of India. With this, Portugal's Asian empire was gravely weakened. Only Goa, Damão, Diu, Bombay, Timor, and Macau remained and, in Brazil, Dutch forces occupied the northeast.
       On 1 December 1640, long commemorated as a national holiday, Portuguese rebels led by the duke of Braganza overthrew Spanish domination and took advantage of Spanish weakness following a more serious rebellion in Catalonia. Portugal regained independence from Spain, but at a price: dependence on foreign assistance to maintain its independence in the form of the renewal of the alliance with England.
       Restoration and Second Empire, 1640-1822
       Foreign affairs and empire dominated the restoration era and aftermath, and Portugal again briefly enjoyed greater European power and prestige. The Anglo-Portuguese Alliance was renewed and strengthened in treaties of 1642, 1654, and 1661, and Portugal's independence from Spain was underwritten by English pledges and armed assistance. In a Luso-Spanish treaty of 1668, Spain recognized Portugal's independence. Portugal's alliance with England was a marriage of convenience and necessity between two monarchies with important religious, cultural, and social differences. In return for legal, diplomatic, and trade privileges, as well as the use during war and peace of Portugal's great Lisbon harbor and colonial ports for England's navy, England pledged to protect Portugal and its scattered empire from any attack. The previously cited 17th-century alliance treaties were renewed later in the Treaty of Windsor, signed in London in 1899. On at least 10 different occasions after 1640, and during the next two centuries, England was central in helping prevent or repel foreign invasions of its ally, Portugal.
       Portugal's second empire (1640-1822) was largely Brazil-oriented. Portuguese colonization, exploitation of wealth, and emigration focused on Portuguese America, and imperial revenues came chiefly from Brazil. Between 1670 and 1740, Portugal's royalty and nobility grew wealthier on funds derived from Brazilian gold, diamonds, sugar, tobacco, and other crops, an enterprise supported by the Atlantic slave trade and the supply of African slave labor from West Africa and Angola. Visitors today can see where much of that wealth was invested: Portugal's rich legacy of monumental architecture. Meanwhile, the African slave trade took a toll in Angola and West Africa.
       In continental Portugal, absolutist monarchy dominated politics and government, and there was a struggle for position and power between the monarchy and other institutions, such as the Church and nobility. King José I's chief minister, usually known in history as the marquis of Pombal (ruled 1750-77), sharply suppressed the nobility and the
       Church (including the Inquisition, now a weak institution) and expelled the Jesuits. Pombal also made an effort to reduce economic dependence on England, Portugal's oldest ally. But his successes did not last much beyond his disputed time in office.
       Beginning in the late 18th century, the European-wide impact of the French Revolution and the rise of Napoleon placed Portugal in a vulnerable position. With the monarchy ineffectively led by an insane queen (Maria I) and her indecisive regent son (João VI), Portugal again became the focus of foreign ambition and aggression. With England unable to provide decisive assistance in time, France—with Spain's consent—invaded Portugal in 1807. As Napoleon's army under General Junot entered Lisbon meeting no resistance, Portugal's royal family fled on a British fleet to Brazil, where it remained in exile until 1821. In the meantime, Portugal's overseas empire was again under threat. There was a power vacuum as the monarch was absent, foreign armies were present, and new political notions of liberalism and constitutional monarchy were exciting various groups of citizens.
       Again England came to the rescue, this time in the form of the armies of the duke of Wellington. Three successive French invasions of Portugal were defeated and expelled, and Wellington succeeded in carrying the war against Napoleon across the Portuguese frontier into Spain. The presence of the English army, the new French-born liberal ideas, and the political vacuum combined to create revolutionary conditions. The French invasions and the peninsular wars, where Portuguese armed forces played a key role, marked the beginning of a new era in politics.
       Liberalism and Constitutional Monarchy, 1822-1910
       During 1807-22, foreign invasions, war, and civil strife over conflicting political ideas gravely damaged Portugal's commerce, economy, and novice industry. The next terrible blow was the loss of Brazil in 1822, the jewel in the imperial crown. Portugal's very independence seemed to be at risk. In vain, Portugal sought to resist Brazilian independence by force, but in 1825 it formally acknowledged Brazilian independence by treaty.
       Portugal's slow recovery from the destructive French invasions and the "war of independence" was complicated by civil strife over the form of constitutional monarchy that best suited Portugal. After struggles over these issues between 1820 and 1834, Portugal settled somewhat uncertainly into a moderate constitutional monarchy whose constitution (Charter of 1826) lent it strong political powers to exert a moderating influence between the executive and legislative branches of the government. It also featured a new upper middle class based on land ownership and commerce; a Catholic Church that, although still important, lived with reduced privileges and property; a largely African (third) empire to which Lisbon and Oporto devoted increasing spiritual and material resources, starting with the liberal imperial plans of 1836 and 1851, and continuing with the work of institutions like the Lisbon Society of Geography (established 1875); and a mass of rural peasants whose bonds to the land weakened after 1850 and who began to immigrate in increasing numbers to Brazil and North America.
       Chronic military intervention in national politics began in 19th-century Portugal. Such intervention, usually commencing with coups or pronunciamentos (military revolts), was a shortcut to the spoils of political office and could reflect popular discontent as well as the power of personalities. An early example of this was the 1817 golpe (coup) attempt of General Gomes Freire against British military rule in Portugal before the return of King João VI from Brazil. Except for a more stable period from 1851 to 1880, military intervention in politics, or the threat thereof, became a feature of the constitutional monarchy's political life, and it continued into the First Republic and the subsequent Estado Novo.
       Beginning with the Regeneration period (1851-80), Portugal experienced greater political stability and economic progress. Military intervention in politics virtually ceased; industrialization and construction of railroads, roads, and bridges proceeded; two political parties (Regenerators and Historicals) worked out a system of rotation in power; and leading intellectuals sparked a cultural revival in several fields. In 19th-century literature, there was a new golden age led by such figures as Alexandre Herculano (historian), Eça de Queirós (novelist), Almeida Garrett (playwright and essayist), Antero de Quental (poet), and Joaquim Oliveira Martins (historian and social scientist). In its third overseas empire, Portugal attempted to replace the slave trade and slavery with legitimate economic activities; to reform the administration; and to expand Portuguese holdings beyond coastal footholds deep into the African hinterlands in West, West Central, and East Africa. After 1841, to some extent, and especially after 1870, colonial affairs, combined with intense nationalism, pressures for economic profit in Africa, sentiment for national revival, and the drift of European affairs would make or break Lisbon governments.
       Beginning with the political crisis that arose out of the "English Ultimatum" affair of January 1890, the monarchy became discredtted and identified with the poorly functioning government, political parties splintered, and republicanism found more supporters. Portugal participated in the "Scramble for Africa," expanding its African holdings, but failed to annex territory connecting Angola and Mozambique. A growing foreign debt and state bankruptcy as of the early 1890s damaged the constitutional monarchy's reputation, despite the efforts of King Carlos in diplomacy, the renewal of the alliance in the Windsor Treaty of 1899, and the successful if bloody colonial wars in the empire (1880-97). Republicanism proclaimed that Portugal's weak economy and poor society were due to two historic institutions: the monarchy and the Catholic Church. A republic, its stalwarts claimed, would bring greater individual liberty; efficient, if more decentralized government; and a stronger colonial program while stripping the Church of its role in both society and education.
       As the monarchy lost support and republicans became more aggressive, violence increased in politics. King Carlos I and his heir Luís were murdered in Lisbon by anarchist-republicans on 1 February 1908. Following a military and civil insurrection and fighting between monarchist and republican forces, on 5 October 1910, King Manuel II fled Portugal and a republic was proclaimed.
       First Parliamentary Republic, 1910-26
       Portugal's first attempt at republican government was the most unstable, turbulent parliamentary republic in the history of 20th-century Western Europe. During a little under 16 years of the republic, there were 45 governments, a number of legislatures that did not complete normal terms, military coups, and only one president who completed his four-year term in office. Portuguese society was poorly prepared for this political experiment. Among the deadly legacies of the monarchy were a huge public debt; a largely rural, apolitical, and illiterate peasant population; conflict over the causes of the country's misfortunes; and lack of experience with a pluralist, democratic system.
       The republic had some talented leadership but lacked popular, institutional, and economic support. The 1911 republican constitution established only a limited democracy, as only a small portion of the adult male citizenry was eligible to vote. In a country where the majority was Catholic, the republic passed harshly anticlerical laws, and its institutions and supporters persecuted both the Church and its adherents. During its brief disjointed life, the First Republic drafted important reform plans in economic, social, and educational affairs; actively promoted development in the empire; and pursued a liberal, generous foreign policy. Following British requests for Portugal's assistance in World War I, Portugal entered the war on the Allied side in March 1916 and sent armies to Flanders and Portuguese Africa. Portugal's intervention in that conflict, however, was too costly in many respects, and the ultimate failure of the republic in part may be ascribed to Portugal's World War I activities.
       Unfortunately for the republic, its time coincided with new threats to Portugal's African possessions: World War I, social and political demands from various classes that could not be reconciled, excessive military intervention in politics, and, in particular, the worst economic and financial crisis Portugal had experienced since the 16th and 17th centuries. After the original Portuguese Republican Party (PRP, also known as the "Democrats") splintered into three warring groups in 1912, no true multiparty system emerged. The Democrats, except for only one or two elections, held an iron monopoly of electoral power, and political corruption became a major issue. As extreme right-wing dictatorships elsewhere in Europe began to take power in Italy (1922), neighboring Spain (1923), and Greece (1925), what scant popular support remained for the republic collapsed. Backed by a right-wing coalition of landowners from Alentejo, clergy, Coimbra University faculty and students, Catholic organizations, and big business, career military officers led by General Gomes da Costa executed a coup on 28 May 1926, turned out the last republican government, and established a military government.
       The Estado Novo (New State), 1926-74
       During the military phase (1926-32) of the Estado Novo, professional military officers, largely from the army, governed and administered Portugal and held key cabinet posts, but soon discovered that the military possessed no magic formula that could readily solve the problems inherited from the First Republic. Especially during the years 1926-31, the military dictatorship, even with its political repression of republican activities and institutions (military censorship of the press, political police action, and closure of the republic's rowdy parliament), was characterized by similar weaknesses: personalism and factionalism; military coups and political instability, including civil strife and loss of life; state debt and bankruptcy; and a weak economy. "Barracks parliamentarism" was not an acceptable alternative even to the "Nightmare Republic."
       Led by General Óscar Carmona, who had replaced and sent into exile General Gomes da Costa, the military dictatorship turned to a civilian expert in finance and economics to break the budget impasse and bring coherence to the disorganized system. Appointed minister of finance on 27 April 1928, the Coimbra University Law School professor of economics Antônio de Oliveira Salazar (1889-1970) first reformed finance, helped balance the budget, and then turned to other concerns as he garnered extraordinary governing powers. In 1930, he was appointed interim head of another key ministry (Colonies) and within a few years had become, in effect, a civilian dictator who, with the military hierarchy's support, provided the government with coherence, a program, and a set of policies.
       For nearly 40 years after he was appointed the first civilian prime minister in 1932, Salazar's personality dominated the government. Unlike extreme right-wing dictators elsewhere in Europe, Salazar was directly appointed by the army but was never endorsed by a popular political party, street militia, or voter base. The scholarly, reclusive former Coimbra University professor built up what became known after 1932 as the Estado Novo ("New State"), which at the time of its overthrow by another military coup in 1974, was the longest surviving authoritarian regime in Western Europe. The system of Salazar and the largely academic and technocratic ruling group he gathered in his cabinets was based on the central bureaucracy of the state, which was supported by the president of the republic—always a senior career military officer, General Óscar Carmona (1928-51), General Craveiro Lopes (1951-58), and Admiral Américo Tómaz (1958-74)—and the complicity of various institutions. These included a rubber-stamp legislature called the National Assembly (1935-74) and a political police known under various names: PVDE (1932-45), PIDE (1945-69),
       and DGS (1969-74). Other defenders of the Estado Novo security were paramilitary organizations such as the National Republican Guard (GNR); the Portuguese Legion (PL); and the Portuguese Youth [Movement]. In addition to censorship of the media, theater, and books, there was political repression and a deliberate policy of depoliticization. All political parties except for the approved movement of regime loyalists, the União Nacional or (National Union), were banned.
       The most vigorous and more popular period of the New State was 1932-44, when the basic structures were established. Never monolithic or entirely the work of one person (Salazar), the New State was constructed with the assistance of several dozen top associates who were mainly academics from law schools, some technocrats with specialized skills, and a handful of trusted career military officers. The 1933 Constitution declared Portugal to be a "unitary, corporative Republic," and pressures to restore the monarchy were resisted. Although some of the regime's followers were fascists and pseudofascists, many more were conservative Catholics, integralists, nationalists, and monarchists of different varieties, and even some reactionary republicans. If the New State was authoritarian, it was not totalitarian and, unlike fascism in Benito Mussolini's Italy or Adolf Hitler's Germany, it usually employed the minimum of violence necessary to defeat what remained a largely fractious, incoherent opposition.
       With the tumultuous Second Republic and the subsequent civil war in nearby Spain, the regime felt threatened and reinforced its defenses. During what Salazar rightly perceived as a time of foreign policy crisis for Portugal (1936-45), he assumed control of the Ministry of Foreign Affairs. From there, he pursued four basic foreign policy objectives: supporting the Nationalist rebels of General Francisco Franco in the Spanish Civil War (1936-39) and concluding defense treaties with a triumphant Franco; ensuring that General Franco in an exhausted Spain did not enter World War II on the Axis side; maintaining Portuguese neutrality in World War II with a post-1942 tilt toward the Allies, including granting Britain and the United States use of bases in the Azores Islands; and preserving and protecting Portugal's Atlantic Islands and its extensive, if poor, overseas empire in Africa and Asia.
       During the middle years of the New State (1944-58), many key Salazar associates in government either died or resigned, and there was greater social unrest in the form of unprecedented strikes and clandestine Communist activities, intensified opposition, and new threatening international pressures on Portugal's overseas empire. During the earlier phase of the Cold War (1947-60), Portugal became a steadfast, if weak, member of the US-dominated North Atlantic Treaty Organization alliance and, in 1955, with American support, Portugal joined the United Nations (UN). Colonial affairs remained a central concern of the regime. As of 1939, Portugal was the third largest colonial power in the world and possessed territories in tropical Africa (Angola, Mozambique, Guinea-Bissau, and São Tomé and Príncipe Islands) and the remnants of its 16th-century empire in Asia (Goa, Damão, Diu, East Timor, and Macau). Beginning in the early 1950s, following the independence of India in 1947, Portugal resisted Indian pressures to decolonize Portuguese India and used police forces to discourage internal opposition in its Asian and African colonies.
       The later years of the New State (1958-68) witnessed the aging of the increasingly isolated but feared Salazar and new threats both at home and overseas. Although the regime easily overcame the brief oppositionist threat from rival presidential candidate General Humberto Delgado in the spring of 1958, new developments in the African and Asian empires imperiled the authoritarian system. In February 1961, oppositionists hijacked the Portuguese ocean liner Santa Maria and, in following weeks, African insurgents in northern Angola, although they failed to expel the Portuguese, gained worldwide media attention, discredited the New State, and began the 13-year colonial war. After thwarting a dissident military coup against his continued leadership, Salazar and his ruling group mobilized military repression in Angola and attempted to develop the African colonies at a faster pace in order to ensure Portuguese control. Meanwhile, the other European colonial powers (Britain, France, Belgium, and Spain) rapidly granted political independence to their African territories.
       At the time of Salazar's removal from power in September 1968, following a stroke, Portugal's efforts to maintain control over its colonies appeared to be successful. President Americo Tomás appointed Dr. Marcello Caetano as Salazar's successor as prime minister. While maintaining the New State's basic structures, and continuing the regime's essential colonial policy, Caetano attempted wider reforms in colonial administration and some devolution of power from Lisbon, as well as more freedom of expression in Lisbon. Still, a great deal of the budget was devoted to supporting the wars against the insurgencies in Africa. Meanwhile in Asia, Portuguese India had fallen when the Indian army invaded in December 1961. The loss of Goa was a psychological blow to the leadership of the New State, and of the Asian empire only East Timor and Macau remained.
       The Caetano years (1968-74) were but a hiatus between the waning Salazar era and a new regime. There was greater political freedom and rapid economic growth (5-6 percent annually to late 1973), but Caetano's government was unable to reform the old system thoroughly and refused to consider new methods either at home or in the empire. In the end, regime change came from junior officers of the professional military who organized the Armed Forces Movement (MFA) against the Caetano government. It was this group of several hundred officers, mainly in the army and navy, which engineered a largely bloodless coup in Lisbon on 25 April 1974. Their unexpected action brought down the 48-year-old New State and made possible the eventual establishment and consolidation of democratic governance in Portugal, as well as a reorientation of the country away from the Atlantic toward Europe.
       Revolution of Carnations, 1974-76
       Following successful military operations of the Armed Forces Movement against the Caetano government, Portugal experienced what became known as the "Revolution of Carnations." It so happened that during the rainy week of the military golpe, Lisbon flower shops were featuring carnations, and the revolutionaries and their supporters adopted the red carnation as the common symbol of the event, as well as of the new freedom from dictatorship. The MFA, whose leaders at first were mostly little-known majors and captains, proclaimed a three-fold program of change for the new Portugal: democracy; decolonization of the overseas empire, after ending the colonial wars; and developing a backward economy in the spirit of opportunity and equality. During the first 24 months after the coup, there was civil strife, some anarchy, and a power struggle. With the passing of the Estado Novo, public euphoria burst forth as the new provisional military government proclaimed the freedoms of speech, press, and assembly, and abolished censorship, the political police, the Portuguese Legion, Portuguese Youth, and other New State organizations, including the National Union. Scores of political parties were born and joined the senior political party, the Portuguese Community Party (PCP), and the Socialist Party (PS), founded shortly before the coup.
       Portugal's Revolution of Carnations went through several phases. There was an attempt to take control by radical leftists, including the PCP and its allies. This was thwarted by moderate officers in the army, as well as by the efforts of two political parties: the PS and the Social Democrats (PPD, later PSD). The first phase was from April to September 1974. Provisional president General Antonio Spínola, whose 1974 book Portugal and the Future had helped prepare public opinion for the coup, met irresistible leftist pressures. After Spinola's efforts to avoid rapid decolonization of the African empire failed, he resigned in September 1974. During the second phase, from September 1974 to March 1975, radical military officers gained control, but a coup attempt by General Spínola and his supporters in Lisbon in March 1975 failed and Spínola fled to Spain.
       In the third phase of the Revolution, March-November 1975, a strong leftist reaction followed. Farm workers occupied and "nationalized" 1.1 million hectares of farmland in the Alentejo province, and radical military officers in the provisional government ordered the nationalization of Portuguese banks (foreign banks were exempted), utilities, and major industries, or about 60 percent of the economic system. There were power struggles among various political parties — a total of 50 emerged—and in the streets there was civil strife among labor, military, and law enforcement groups. A constituent assembly, elected on 25 April 1975, in Portugal's first free elections since 1926, drafted a democratic constitution. The Council of the Revolution (CR), briefly a revolutionary military watchdog committee, was entrenched as part of the government under the constitution, until a later revision. During the chaotic year of 1975, about 30 persons were killed in political frays while unstable provisional governments came and went. On 25 November 1975, moderate military forces led by Colonel Ramalho Eanes, who later was twice elected president of the republic (1976 and 1981), defeated radical, leftist military groups' revolutionary conspiracies.
       In the meantime, Portugal's scattered overseas empire experienced a precipitous and unprepared decolonization. One by one, the former colonies were granted and accepted independence—Guinea-Bissau (September 1974), Cape Verde Islands (July 1975), and Mozambique (July 1975). Portugal offered to turn over Macau to the People's Republic of China, but the offer was refused then and later negotiations led to the establishment of a formal decolonization or hand-over date of 1999. But in two former colonies, the process of decolonization had tragic results.
       In Angola, decolonization negotiations were greatly complicated by the fact that there were three rival nationalist movements in a struggle for power. The January 1975 Alvor Agreement signed by Portugal and these three parties was not effectively implemented. A bloody civil war broke out in Angola in the spring of 1975 and, when Portuguese armed forces withdrew and declared that Angola was independent on 11 November 1975, the bloodshed only increased. Meanwhile, most of the white Portuguese settlers from Angola and Mozambique fled during the course of 1975. Together with African refugees, more than 600,000 of these retornados ("returned ones") went by ship and air to Portugal and thousands more to Namibia, South Africa, Brazil, Canada, and the United States.
       The second major decolonization disaster was in Portugal's colony of East Timor in the Indonesian archipelago. Portugal's capacity to supervise and control a peaceful transition to independence in this isolated, neglected colony was limited by the strength of giant Indonesia, distance from Lisbon, and Portugal's revolutionary disorder and inability to defend Timor. In early December 1975, before Portugal granted formal independence and as one party, FRETILIN, unilaterally declared East Timor's independence, Indonesia's armed forces invaded, conquered, and annexed East Timor. Indonesian occupation encountered East Timorese resistance, and a heavy loss of life followed. The East Timor question remained a contentious international issue in the UN, as well as in Lisbon and Jakarta, for more than 20 years following Indonesia's invasion and annexation of the former colony of Portugal. Major changes occurred, beginning in 1998, after Indonesia underwent a political revolution and allowed a referendum in East Timor to decide that territory's political future in August 1999. Most East Timorese chose independence, but Indonesian forces resisted that verdict until
       UN intervention in September 1999. Following UN rule for several years, East Timor attained full independence on 20 May 2002.
       Consolidation of Democracy, 1976-2000
       After several free elections and record voter turnouts between 25 April 1975 and June 1976, civil war was averted and Portugal's second democratic republic began to stabilize. The MFA was dissolved, the military were returned to the barracks, and increasingly elected civilians took over the government of the country. The 1976 Constitution was revised several times beginning in 1982 and 1989, in order to reempha-size the principle of free enterprise in the economy while much of the large, nationalized sector was privatized. In June 1976, General Ram-alho Eanes was elected the first constitutional president of the republic (five-year term), and he appointed socialist leader Dr. Mário Soares as prime minister of the first constitutional government.
       From 1976 to 1985, Portugal's new system featured a weak economy and finances, labor unrest, and administrative and political instability. The difficult consolidation of democratic governance was eased in part by the strong currency and gold reserves inherited from the Estado Novo, but Lisbon seemed unable to cope with high unemployment, new debt, the complex impact of the refugees from Africa, world recession, and the agitation of political parties. Four major parties emerged from the maelstrom of 1974-75, except for the Communist Party, all newly founded. They were, from left to right, the Communists (PCP); the Socialists (PS), who managed to dominate governments and the legislature but not win a majority in the Assembly of the Republic; the Social Democrats (PSD); and the Christian Democrats (CDS). During this period, the annual growth rate was low (l-2 percent), and the nationalized sector of the economy stagnated.
       Enhanced economic growth, greater political stability, and more effective central government as of 1985, and especially 1987, were due to several developments. In 1977, Portugal applied for membership in the European Economic Community (EEC), now the European Union (EU) since 1993. In January 1986, with Spain, Portugal was granted membership, and economic and financial progress in the intervening years has been significantly influenced by the comparatively large investment, loans, technology, advice, and other assistance from the EEC. Low unemployment, high annual growth rates (5 percent), and moderate inflation have also been induced by the new political and administrative stability in Lisbon. Led by Prime Minister Cavaco Silva, an economist who was trained abroad, the PSD's strong organization, management, and electoral support since 1985 have assisted in encouraging economic recovery and development. In 1985, the PSD turned the PS out of office and won the general election, although they did not have an absolute majority of assembly seats. In 1986, Mário Soares was elected president of the republic, the first civilian to hold that office since the First Republic. In the elections of 1987 and 1991, however, the PSD was returned to power with clear majorities of over 50 percent of the vote.
       Although the PSD received 50.4 percent of the vote in the 1991 parliamentary elections and held a 42-seat majority in the Assembly of the Republic, the party began to lose public support following media revelations regarding corruption and complaints about Prime Minister Cavaco Silva's perceived arrogant leadership style. President Mário Soares voiced criticism of the PSD's seemingly untouchable majority and described a "tyranny of the majority." Economic growth slowed down. In the parliamentary elections of 1995 and the presidential election of 1996, the PSD's dominance ended for the time being. Prime Minister Antônio Guterres came to office when the PS won the October 1995 elections, and in the subsequent presidential contest, in January 1996, socialist Jorge Sampaio, the former mayor of Lisbon, was elected president of the republic, thus defeating Cavaco Silva's bid. Young and popular, Guterres moved the PS toward the center of the political spectrum. Under Guterres, the PS won the October 1999 parliamentary elections. The PS defeated the PSD but did not manage to win a clear, working majority of seats, and this made the PS dependent upon alliances with smaller parties, including the PCP.
       In the local elections in December 2001, the PSD's criticism of PS's heavy public spending allowed the PSD to take control of the key cities of Lisbon, Oporto, and Coimbra. Guterres resigned, and parliamentary elections were brought forward from 2004 to March 2002. The PSD won a narrow victory with 40 percent of the votes, and Jose Durão Barroso became prime minister. Having failed to win a majority of the seats in parliament forced the PSD to govern in coalition with the right-wing Popular Party (PP) led by Paulo Portas. Durão Barroso set about reducing government spending by cutting the budgets of local authorities, freezing civil service hiring, and reviving the economy by accelerating privatization of state-owned enterprises. These measures provoked a 24-hour strike by public-sector workers. Durão Barroso reacted with vows to press ahead with budget-cutting measures and imposed a wage freeze on all employees earning more than €1,000, which affected more than one-half of Portugal's work force.
       In June 2004, Durão Barroso was invited by Romano Prodi to succeed him as president of the European Commission. Durão Barroso accepted and resigned the prime ministership in July. Pedro Santana Lopes, the leader of the PSD, became prime minister. Already unpopular at the time of Durão Barroso's resignation, the PSD-led government became increasingly unpopular under Santana Lopes. A month-long delay in the start of the school year and confusion over his plan to cut taxes and raise public-sector salaries, eroded confidence even more. By November, Santana Lopes's government was so unpopular that President Jorge Sampaio was obliged to dissolve parliament and hold new elections, two years ahead of schedule.
       Parliamentary elections were held on 20 February 2005. The PS, which had promised the electorate disciplined and transparent governance, educational reform, the alleviation of poverty, and a boost in employment, won 45 percent of the vote and the majority of the seats in parliament. The leader of the PS, José Sôcrates became prime minister on 12 March 2005. In the regularly scheduled presidential elections held on 6 January 2006, the former leader of the PSD and prime minister, Aníbal Cavaco Silva, won a narrow victory and became president on 9 March 2006. With a mass protest, public teachers' strike, and street demonstrations in March 2008, Portugal's media, educational, and social systems experienced more severe pressures. With the spreading global recession beginning in September 2008, Portugal's economic and financial systems became more troubled.
       Owing to its geographic location on the southwestern most edge of continental Europe, Portugal has been historically in but not of Europe. Almost from the beginning of its existence in the 12th century as an independent monarchy, Portugal turned its back on Europe and oriented itself toward the Atlantic Ocean. After carving out a Christian kingdom on the western portion of the Iberian peninsula, Portuguese kings gradually built and maintained a vast seaborne global empire that became central to the way Portugal understood its individuality as a nation-state. While the creation of this empire allows Portugal to claim an unusual number of "firsts" or distinctions in world and Western history, it also retarded Portugal's economic, social, and political development. It can be reasonably argued that the Revolution of 25 April 1974 was the most decisive event in Portugal's long history because it finally ended Portugal's oceanic mission and view of itself as an imperial power. After the 1974 Revolution, Portugal turned away from its global mission and vigorously reoriented itself toward Europe. Contemporary Portugal is now both in and of Europe.
       The turn toward Europe began immediately after 25 April 1974. Portugal granted independence to its African colonies in 1975. It was admitted to the European Council and took the first steps toward accession to the European Economic Community (EEC) in 1976. On 28 March 1977, the Portuguese government officially applied for EEC membership. Because of Portugal's economic and social backwardness, which would require vast sums of EEC money to overcome, negotiations for membership were long and difficult. Finally, a treaty of accession was signed on 12 June 1985. Portugal officially joined the EEC (the European Union [EU] since 1993) on 1 January 1986. Since becoming a full-fledged member of the EU, Portugal has been steadily overcoming the economic and social underdevelopment caused by its imperial past and is becoming more like the rest of Europe.
       Membership in the EU has speeded up the structural transformation of Portugal's economy, which actually began during the Estado Novo. Investments made by the Estado Novo in Portugal's economy began to shift employment out of the agricultural sector, which, in 1950, accounted for 50 percent of Portugal's economically active population. Today, only 10 percent of the economically active population is employed in the agricultural sector (the highest among EU member states); 30 percent in the industrial sector (also the highest among EU member states); and 60 percent in the service sector (the lowest among EU member states). The economically active population numbers about 5,000,000 employed, 56 percent of whom are women. Women workers are the majority of the workforce in the agricultural and service sectors (the highest among the EU member states). The expansion of the service sector has been primarily in health care and education. Portugal has had the lowest unemployment rates among EU member states, with the overall rate never being more than 10 percent of the active population. Since joining the EU, the number of employers increased from 2.6 percent to 5.8 percent of the active population; self-employed from 16 to 19 percent; and employees from 65 to 70 percent. Twenty-six percent of the employers are women. Unemployment tends to hit younger workers in industry and transportation, women employed in domestic service, workers on short-term contracts, and poorly educated workers. Salaried workers earn only 63 percent of the EU average, and hourly workers only one-third to one-half of that earned by their EU counterparts. Despite having had the second highest growth of gross national product (GNP) per inhabitant (after Ireland) among EU member states, the above data suggest that while much has been accomplished in terms of modernizing the Portuguese economy, much remains to be done to bring Portugal's economy up to the level of the "average" EU member state.
       Membership in the EU has also speeded up changes in Portuguese society. Over the last 30 years, coastalization and urbanization have intensified. Fully 50 percent of Portuguese live in the coastal urban conurbations of Lisbon, Oporto, Braga, Aveiro, Coimbra, Viseu, Évora, and Faro. The Portuguese population is one of the oldest among EU member states (17.3 percent are 65 years of age or older) thanks to a considerable increase in life expectancy at birth (77.87 years for the total population, 74.6 years for men, 81.36 years for women) and one of the lowest birthrates (10.59 births/1,000) in Europe. Family size averages 2.8 persons per household, with the strict nuclear family (one or two generations) in which both parents work being typical. Common law marriages, cohabitating couples, and single-parent households are more and more common. The divorce rate has also increased. "Youth Culture" has developed. The young have their own meeting places, leisure-time activities, and nightlife (bars, clubs, and discos).
       All Portuguese citizens, whether they have contributed or not, have a right to an old-age pension, invalidity benefits, widowed persons' pension, as well as payments for disabilities, children, unemployment, and large families. There is a national minimum wage (€385 per month), which is low by EU standards. The rapid aging of Portugal's population has changed the ratio of contributors to pensioners to 1.7, the lowest in the EU. This has created deficits in Portugal's social security fund.
       The adult literacy rate is about 92 percent. Illiteracy is still found among the elderly. Although universal compulsory education up to grade 9 was achieved in 1980, only 21.2 percent of the population aged 25-64 had undergone secondary education, compared to an EU average of 65.7 percent. Portugal's higher education system currently consists of 14 state universities and 14 private universities, 15 state polytechnic institutions, one Catholic university, and one military academy. All in all, Portugal spends a greater percentage of its state budget on education than most EU member states. Despite this high level of expenditure, the troubled Portuguese education system does not perform well. Early leaving and repetition rates are among the highest among EU member states.
       After the Revolution of 25 April 1974, Portugal created a National Health Service, which today consists of 221 hospitals and 512 medical centers employing 33,751 doctors and 41,799 nurses. Like its education system, Portugal's medical system is inefficient. There are long waiting lists for appointments with specialists and for surgical procedures.
       Structural changes in Portugal's economy and society mean that social life in Portugal is not too different from that in other EU member states. A mass consumption society has been created. Televisions, telephones, refrigerators, cars, music equipment, mobile phones, and personal computers are commonplace. Sixty percent of Portuguese households possess at least one automobile, and 65 percent of Portuguese own their own home. Portuguese citizens are more aware of their legal rights than ever before. This has resulted in a trebling of the number of legal proceeding since 1960 and an eight-fold increase in the number of lawyers. In general, Portuguese society has become more permissive and secular; the Catholic Church and the armed forces are much less influential than in the past. Portugal's population is also much more culturally, religiously, and ethnically diverse, a consequence of the coming to Portugal of hundreds of thousands of immigrants, mainly from former African colonies.
       Portuguese are becoming more cosmopolitan and sophisticated through the impact of world media, the Internet, and the World Wide Web. A prime case in point came in the summer and early fall of 1999, with the extraordinary events in East Timor and the massive Portuguese popular responses. An internationally monitored referendum in East Timor, Portugal's former colony in the Indonesian archipelago and under Indonesian occupation from late 1975 to summer 1999, resulted in a vote of 78.5 percent for rejecting integration with Indonesia and for independence. When Indonesian prointegration gangs, aided by the Indonesian military, responded to the referendum with widespread brutality and threatened to reverse the verdict of the referendum, there was a spontaneous popular outpouring of protest in the cities and towns of Portugal. An avalanche of Portuguese e-mail fell on leaders and groups in the UN and in certain countries around the world as Portugal's diplomats, perhaps to compensate for the weak initial response to Indonesian armed aggression in 1975, called for the protection of East Timor as an independent state and for UN intervention to thwart Indonesian action. Using global communications networks, the Portuguese were able to mobilize UN and world public opinion against Indonesian actions and aided the eventual independence of East Timor on 20 May 2002.
       From the Revolution of 25 April 1974 until the 1990s, Portugal had a large number of political parties, one of the largest Communist parties in western Europe, frequent elections, and endemic cabinet instability. Since the 1990s, the number of political parties has been dramatically reduced and cabinet stability increased. Gradually, the Portuguese electorate has concentrated around two larger parties, the right-of-center Social Democrats (PSD) and the left-of-center Socialist (PS). In the 1980s, these two parties together garnered 65 percent of the vote and 70 percent of the seats in parliament. In 2005, these percentages had risen to 74 percent and 85 percent, respectively. In effect, Portugal is currently a two-party dominant system in which the two largest parties — PS and PSD—alternate in and out of power, not unlike the rotation of the two main political parties (the Regenerators and the Historicals) during the last decades (1850s to 1880s) of the liberal constitutional monarchy. As Portugal's democracy has consolidated, turnout rates for the eligible electorate have declined. In the 1970s, turnout was 85 percent. In Portugal's most recent parliamentary election (2005), turnout had fallen to 65 percent of the eligible electorate.
       Portugal has benefited greatly from membership in the EU, and whatever doubts remain about the price paid for membership, no Portuguese government in the near future can afford to sever this connection. The vast majority of Portuguese citizens see membership in the EU as a "good thing" and strongly believe that Portugal has benefited from membership. Only the Communist Party opposed membership because it reduces national sovereignty, serves the interests of capitalists not workers, and suffers from a democratic deficit. Despite the high level of support for the EU, Portuguese voters are increasingly not voting in elections for the European Parliament, however. Turnout for European Parliament elections fell from 40 percent of the eligible electorate in the 1999 elections to 38 percent in the 2004 elections.
       In sum, Portugal's turn toward Europe has done much to overcome its backwardness. However, despite the economic, social, and political progress made since 1986, Portugal has a long way to go before it can claim to be on a par with the level found even in Spain, much less the rest of western Europe. As Portugal struggles to move from underde-velopment, especially in the rural areas away from the coast, it must keep in mind the perils of too rapid modern development, which could damage two of its most precious assets: its scenery and environment. The growth and future prosperity of the economy will depend on the degree to which the government and the private sector will remain stewards of clean air, soil, water, and other finite resources on which the tourism industry depends and on which Portugal's world image as a unique place to visit rests. Currently, Portugal is investing heavily in renewable energy from solar, wind, and wave power in order to account for about 50 percent of its electricity needs by 2010. Portugal opened the world's largest solar power plant and the world's first commercial wave power farm in 2006.
       An American documentary film on Portugal produced in the 1970s described this little country as having "a Past in Search of a Future." In the years after the Revolution of 25 April 1974, it could be said that Portugal is now living in "a Present in Search of a Future." Increasingly, that future lies in Europe as an active and productive member of the EU.

    Historical dictionary of Portugal > Historical Portugal

  • 4 desear

    v.
    1 to want.
    ¿qué desea? what can I do for you? (en tienda)
    ¿desea algo más? would you like anything else?, is that everything? (en tienda)
    desearía estar allí I wish I was there
    estoy deseando que llegue I can't wait for her to arrive
    dejar mucho/no dejar nada que desear to leave much/nothing to be desired
    es de desear que las negociaciones terminen pronto a quick end to the negotiations would be desirable
    2 to wish.
    te deseo mucha suerte I wish you the best of luck
    me deseó lo mejor/un buen viaje he wished me all the best/a pleasant journey
    3 to desire (sexualmente).
    Quiero paz I want peace.
    4 to wish to, to ache to, to be longing to, to desire to.
    Quiero estudiar I want to study.
    * * *
    1 (querer) to want
    2 (anhelar) to long for, wish for, desire; (para alguien) to wish
    ■ ¿qué desea? can I help you?, what can I do for you?
    3 (sexualmente) to desire
    \
    dejar mucho/bastante que desear to leave a lot to be desired
    es de desear que it is to be hoped that
    * * *
    verb
    2) want
    * * *
    VT
    1) (=anhelar) to want

    no deseo que le pase nada malo — I wouldn't want o wish anything bad to happen to him

    • dejar bastante o mucho que desear — to leave a lot to be desired

    • estar deseando algo, estaba deseando conocerte — I've been looking forward to meeting you

    estoy deseando que esto termine — I'm really looking forward to this finishing, I can't wait for this to finish

    estoy deseando que lleguen las vacaciones — I'm really looking forward to the holidays, I can't wait for o till the holidays

    • ser de desear, sería de desear que actualizaran su información — it would be desirable for them to update their information

    2) frm
    a) [en peticiones] to wish

    desearía ver al director — I would like o I wish to see the manager

    b) [en preguntas, sugerencias]

    ¿desearía el señor algún postre? — would Sir like a dessert?, do you wish a dessert?

    ¿qué desean beber? — what would you like to drink?

    ¿desea que le hagamos una factura? — do you wish us to make out an invoice?

    ¿qué desea? — can I help you?

    3) [en fórmulas de cortesía] [+ éxito, suerte] to wish
    4) [sexualmente] to want
    * * *
    verbo transitivo
    1) <suerte/éxito> to wish
    2) ( querer)

    lo que más deseo es... — my greatest wish is...

    ¿qué desea? — (frml) can I help you?

    ¿desea el señor algo más? — (frml) would you like anything else, sir?

    desear + inf: el director desea verlo (frml) the director wishes to see you (frml); está deseando verte he's really looking forward to seeing you; desear que + subj: ¿desea que se lo envuelva? (frml) would you like me to wrap it for you?; estoy deseando que llegue el verano I can't wait for summer; estaba deseando que le dijeran que no I was really hoping they'd say no to him; sería de desear que nos avisaran pronto — ideally we would like to know as soon as possible; dejar I 1) a)

    3) < persona> to desire, want
    * * *
    = be keen to, desire, long (for), want, wish, reach out for, crave, lust (for/after/over), yearn, crave for, itch for.
    Ex. Hosts are less keen to standardise, although the EURONET Common Command Language has been adopted by various hosts, and there is some recognition of the potential benefits to the user of greater standardisation.
    Ex. Some types of indexing are appropriate where it is desired to concentrate effort on generating good indexes.
    Ex. After you have chosen a story you long to tell, read it over and over and then analyse it.
    Ex. On other occasions a user wants every document or piece of information on a topic traced, and then high recall must be sought, to the detriment of precision.
    Ex. Step 1 Familiarisation: A searcher must be adequately familiar with that which he wishes to retrieve.
    Ex. If people want regimentation which relieves them of responsibility, how then do you explain parents reaching out for control of schools, disdaining the help of experts.
    Ex. Mayo maintained that workers are motivated by 'togetherness' and crave individual recognition within the group = Mayo mantenía que los trabajadores se motivan por la solidaridad y anhelan el reconocimiento individual dentro del grupo.
    Ex. These two women were Samaria and Jerusalem, lusting after foreigners and foreign ways, and abandoning their god for shallow and ephemeral pleasures.
    Ex. Since time immemorial, people have yearned for an immediate way to capture living moments in a picture.
    Ex. With all of the things that make up our daily grind, we often find ourselves craving for the next getaway, for the next relaxation period.
    Ex. It seems like he's itching for a change but doesn't know exactly the direction or directions to pursue in order to accomplish the change.
    ----
    * dejar bastante que desear = leave + a lot to be desired, leave + much to be desired.
    * dejar mucho que desear = fall (far) short of + ideal, leave + a lot to be desired, leave + much to be desired.
    * dejar que desear = leave + something + to be desired, leave + a bit to be desired.
    * deseando desesperadamente realizarse = crying to come out.
    * desear a Algo o Alguien toda la suerte del mundo = wish + Nombre + every success.
    * desear ardientemente = gag for.
    * desear fuertemente que Algo desaparezca = will + Nombre + away.
    * desearle a Alguien que tenga un buen día = bid + Nombre + good day.
    * desear mucha suerte a Alguien = wish + Nombre + the (very) best of luck.
    * desear suerte = cross + Posesivo + fingers.
    * desear suerte a Alguien = wish + Nombre + luck.
    * desear vivamente = be eager to.
    * despedirse de Alguien deseándole que todo vaya bien = wish + well.
    * que desee(n) = of + Posesivo + choice, of + Posesivo + choosing.
    * según se desee = at will.
    * si así lo desean = should they so wish.
    * sin desearlo = unwantedly.
    * * *
    verbo transitivo
    1) <suerte/éxito> to wish
    2) ( querer)

    lo que más deseo es... — my greatest wish is...

    ¿qué desea? — (frml) can I help you?

    ¿desea el señor algo más? — (frml) would you like anything else, sir?

    desear + inf: el director desea verlo (frml) the director wishes to see you (frml); está deseando verte he's really looking forward to seeing you; desear que + subj: ¿desea que se lo envuelva? (frml) would you like me to wrap it for you?; estoy deseando que llegue el verano I can't wait for summer; estaba deseando que le dijeran que no I was really hoping they'd say no to him; sería de desear que nos avisaran pronto — ideally we would like to know as soon as possible; dejar I 1) a)

    3) < persona> to desire, want
    * * *
    = be keen to, desire, long (for), want, wish, reach out for, crave, lust (for/after/over), yearn, crave for, itch for.

    Ex: Hosts are less keen to standardise, although the EURONET Common Command Language has been adopted by various hosts, and there is some recognition of the potential benefits to the user of greater standardisation.

    Ex: Some types of indexing are appropriate where it is desired to concentrate effort on generating good indexes.
    Ex: After you have chosen a story you long to tell, read it over and over and then analyse it.
    Ex: On other occasions a user wants every document or piece of information on a topic traced, and then high recall must be sought, to the detriment of precision.
    Ex: Step 1 Familiarisation: A searcher must be adequately familiar with that which he wishes to retrieve.
    Ex: If people want regimentation which relieves them of responsibility, how then do you explain parents reaching out for control of schools, disdaining the help of experts.
    Ex: Mayo maintained that workers are motivated by 'togetherness' and crave individual recognition within the group = Mayo mantenía que los trabajadores se motivan por la solidaridad y anhelan el reconocimiento individual dentro del grupo.
    Ex: These two women were Samaria and Jerusalem, lusting after foreigners and foreign ways, and abandoning their god for shallow and ephemeral pleasures.
    Ex: Since time immemorial, people have yearned for an immediate way to capture living moments in a picture.
    Ex: With all of the things that make up our daily grind, we often find ourselves craving for the next getaway, for the next relaxation period.
    Ex: It seems like he's itching for a change but doesn't know exactly the direction or directions to pursue in order to accomplish the change.
    * dejar bastante que desear = leave + a lot to be desired, leave + much to be desired.
    * dejar mucho que desear = fall (far) short of + ideal, leave + a lot to be desired, leave + much to be desired.
    * dejar que desear = leave + something + to be desired, leave + a bit to be desired.
    * deseando desesperadamente realizarse = crying to come out.
    * desear a Algo o Alguien toda la suerte del mundo = wish + Nombre + every success.
    * desear ardientemente = gag for.
    * desear fuertemente que Algo desaparezca = will + Nombre + away.
    * desearle a Alguien que tenga un buen día = bid + Nombre + good day.
    * desear mucha suerte a Alguien = wish + Nombre + the (very) best of luck.
    * desear suerte = cross + Posesivo + fingers.
    * desear suerte a Alguien = wish + Nombre + luck.
    * desear vivamente = be eager to.
    * despedirse de Alguien deseándole que todo vaya bien = wish + well.
    * que desee(n) = of + Posesivo + choice, of + Posesivo + choosing.
    * según se desee = at will.
    * si así lo desean = should they so wish.
    * sin desearlo = unwantedly.

    * * *
    desear [A1 ]
    vt
    A ‹suerte/éxito/felicidad› to wish
    llamó para desearme suerte he called to wish me good luck
    te deseo un feliz viaje I hope you have a good trip
    te deseamos mucha felicidad we wish you every happiness
    B
    (querer): no se puede desear un novio mejor you couldn't wish for a better boyfriend
    un embarazo no deseado an unwanted pregnancy
    por fin podrá disfrutar de esas tan deseadas vacaciones at last you can really enjoy those long-awaited holidays
    lo que más deseo es volver a ver a mi hijo my greatest wish is to see my son again
    esa moto que tanto había deseado that motorcycle he had wanted so much o he had so longed for
    ¿qué desea? ( frml); can I help you?, what would you like?
    ¿desea el señor algo más? ( frml); would you like anything else, sir?
    se lo podemos enviar si así lo desea we can send it to you if you (so) wish ( frml)
    desearía una contestación antes del lunes I would o ( BrE frml) should like a reply before Monday
    desear + INF:
    el director desea verlo en su despacho ( frml); the director would like o ( frml) wishes to see you in his office
    ¿desea la señora ver otro modelo? ( frml); would you like me to show you another style, madam?
    desearía expresar mi satisfacción ( frml); I would o ( BrE frml) should like to express my satisfaction
    está deseando verte he's really looking forward to seeing you, he's dying to see you ( colloq)
    desear QUE + SUBJ:
    no deseamos que la situación llegue a tal extremo ( frml); we would not wish the situation to reach that point ( frml)
    ¿desea el señor que se lo envuelva? ( frml); would you like me to wrap it for you, sir?
    desearía que me diera su respuesta esta semana ( frml); I would o ( BrE frml) should like to have your reply this week
    estoy deseando que llegue el verano I can't wait for o I'm longing for summer
    estaba deseando que le dijeran que no I was really hoping they'd say no to him
    dejar mucho que desear to leave a lot to be desired
    su rendimiento deja mucho que desear his performance leaves a lot to be desired
    vérselas y deseárselas to have a hard time (of it)
    C ‹persona› to desire, want
    no desearás a la mujer del prójimo ( Bib) thou shalt not covet thy neighbor's wife
    * * *

     

    desear ( conjugate desear) verbo transitivo
    1 ‹suerte/éxito/felicidad› to wish;

    2 ( querer):

    las tan deseadas vacaciones the long-awaited holidays;
    lo que más deseo es … my greatest wish is …;
    si tú lo deseas if you want to;
    desearía una respuesta ahora I would like a reply now;
    está deseando verte he's really looking forward to seeing you;
    ¿desea que se lo envuelva? (frml) would you like me to wrap it for you?
    3 ‹ persona› to desire, want
    desear verbo transitivo
    1 (anhelar, querer con intensidad) to desire: estoy deseando verte, I'm looking forward to seeing you
    te deseo lo mejor, I wish you all the best
    (suerte, felicidad, etc) to wish: os deseo unas felices vacaciones, have a good holiday
    2 (sexualmente) to desire, want
    3 frml (querer) to want: ¿desea usted algo, caballero?, can I help you, Sir?
    deseo ver al director, I would like to see the manager
    ♦ Locuciones: deja mucho/bastante que desear, it leaves a lot to be desired
    ' desear' also found in these entries:
    Spanish:
    apetecer
    - dejar
    - esperar
    - rezar
    - soñar
    - suspirar
    - aspirar
    - bastante
    English:
    desire
    - lust
    - want
    - will
    - wish
    * * *
    desear vt
    1. [querer] to want;
    [anhelar] to wish;
    siempre he deseado visitar Australia I've always wanted to go to Australia;
    desearía estar allí I wish I was there;
    por fin, la bici que tanto había deseado at last, the bicycle I'd wanted so much;
    desearía agradecerle su apoyo I would like to thank you for your help;
    si desea mayor información, llame al 900 1234 if you would like more information, please ring 900 1234;
    desearíamos que nos informara sobre su disponibilidad we would be grateful if you could inform us whether or not you would be available;
    en nuestra empresa deseamos ofrecer lo mejor a nuestros clientes in our company we want to offer our clients the best;
    ¿qué desea? [en tienda] what can I do for you?;
    ¿desea algo más? [en tienda] would you like anything else?, is that everything?;
    ¿desea que le enseñe más modelos? [en tienda] would you like me to show you some other models?;
    si lo desea, se lo enviamos a su domicilio if you wish, we will deliver it to your home;
    aquí estamos para lo que desee [a cliente] we are at your entire disposal;
    estar deseando hacer algo to be looking forward to doing sth;
    estaba deseando salir de allí I couldn't wait to get out of there;
    estoy deseando que lleguen las vacaciones I'm really looking forward to the holidays;
    ¿te hace ilusión lo de ir en barco? – ¡estoy deseando! are you looking forward to going by boat? – you bet I am! o am I ever!;
    ser de desear to be desirable;
    es de desear que las negociaciones terminen pronto a quick end to the negotiations would be desirable;
    dejar mucho/no dejar nada que desear to leave much/nothing to be desired
    2. [felicidad, éxito, parabienes] to wish;
    desear algo a alguien to wish sb sth;
    te deseo mucha suerte I wish you the best of luck;
    ¡deséame suerte! wish me luck!;
    me deseó lo mejor/un buen viaje he wished me all the best/a pleasant journey;
    me deseó buenas noches he said goodnight (to me);
    todos deseamos que te mejores pronto we all wish you a speedy recovery
    3. [sexualmente] to desire;
    te deseo, no puedo vivir sin ti I want you, I can't live without you;
    no desearás a la mujer de tu prójimo thou shalt not covet thy neighbour's wife
    * * *
    v/t
    1 wish for; suerte etc wish
    2
    :
    ¿qué desea? what would you like?;
    ¿desea algo más? would you like anything else?
    * * *
    desear vt
    1) : to wish
    te deseo buena suerte: I wish you good luck
    2) querer: to want, to desire
    * * *
    desear vb
    2. (querer) to want
    estoy deseando irme de vacaciones I can't wait to go on holiday / I'm really looking forward to going on holiday

    Spanish-English dictionary > desear

  • 5 AF

    of
    * * *
    prep. w. dat.
    I. Of place:
    1) off, from;
    G. hljóp af hesti sínum, G. jumped off his horse;
    ganga af mótinu, to go away from the meeting;
    Flosi kastaði af sér skikkjunni, threw off his cloak;
    Gizzur gekk af útsuðri at gerðinu, from the south-west;
    hann hafði leyst af sér skúa sína, he had taken off his shoes;
    Steinarr vildi slíta hann af sér, throw him off;
    tók Gísli þá af sér vápnin, took off his arms;
    bréf af Magnúsi konungi, a letter from king Magnus;
    hverr af öðrum, one after another, in succession;
    vil ek þú vinnir af þér skuldina, work off the debt;
    muntu enga sætt af mér fá, no peace at my hand;
    rísa af dauða, to rise from the dead;
    vakna af draumi, to awaken from a dream;
    lúka upp af hrossi, to open a gate from off a horse;
    vindr stóð af landi, the wind blew from the land;
    2) out of;
    verða tekinn af heimi, to be taken out of the world;
    gruflar hón af læknum, she scrambles out of the brook;
    Otradalr var mjök af vegi, far out of the way.
    Connected with út; föstudaginn fór út herrinn af borginni, marched out of the town.
    II. Of time; past, beyond:
    af ómagaaldri, able to support oneself, of age;
    ek em nú af léttasta skeiði, no longer in the prime of life;
    þá er sjau vikur eru af sumri, when seven weeks of summer are past;
    var mikit af nótt, much of the night was past.
    III. In various other relations:
    1) þiggja lið af e-m, to receive help from one;
    hafa umboð af e-m, to be another’s deputy;
    vera góðs (ills) maklegr af e-m, to deserve good (bad) of one;
    féll þar lið mart af Eyvindi, many of Eyvind’s men fell there;
    þá eru þeir útlagir ok af goðorði sínu, have forfeited their goðorð;
    þá skalt þú af allri fjárheimtunni, forfeit all the claim;
    ek skal stefna þér af konunni, summon thee to give up;
    2) off, of;
    höggva fót, hönd, af e-m, to cut off one’s foot, hand;
    vil ek, at þú takir slíkt sem þér líkar af varningi, whatever you like of the stores;
    þar lá forkr einn ok brotit af endanum, with the point broken off;
    absol., beit hann höndina af, bit the hand off;
    fauk af höfuðit, the head flew off;
    3) of, among;
    hinn efniligasti maðr af ungum mönnum, the most promising of the young men;
    4) with;
    hláða, (ferma) skip af e-u, to load (freight) a ship with;
    fylla heiminn af sínu kyni, to fill the world with his offspring;
    5) of (= ór which is more frequent);
    húsit var gert af timbr stokkum, was built of trunks of trees;
    6) fig., eigi vita menn hvat af honum er orðit, what has become of him;
    hvat hefir þú gert af Gunnari, what hast thou done with Gunnar?;
    7) denoting parentage, descent, origin;
    ok eru af þeim komnir Gilsbekkingar, are descended from them;
    kominn af Trójumönnum, descended from the Trojans;
    8) by, of (after passive);
    ek em sendr hingat af Starkaði, sent hither by;
    ástsæll af landsmónnum, beloved of;
    9) on account of, by reason of, by;
    úbygðr at frosti ok kulda, because of frost and cold;
    ómáli af áverkum, speechless from wounds;
    af ástæld hans, by his popularity;
    af því, therefore;
    af hví, wherefor why;
    af því at, because;
    10) by means of, by;
    framfœra e-n af verkum sínum, by means of his own labour;
    af sínu fé, by one’s own means;
    absol., hann fekk af hina mestu sœmd, derived great honour from it;
    11) with adjectives, in regard to;
    mildr af fé, liberal of money;
    góðr af griðum, merciful;
    12) used absol. with a verb, off away;
    hann bað hann þá róa af fjörðinn, to row the firth off;
    ok er þeir höfðu af fjörðung, when they had covered one forth of the way;
    sofa af nóttina, to sleep the night away.
    * * *
    prep. often used elliptically by dropping the case, or even merely adverbially, [Ulf. af; A. S. and Engl. of, off; Hel. ab; Germ. ab; Gr. άπό; Lat. a, ab.] With dat. denoting a motion a loco; one of the three prepp. af, ór, frá, corresponding to those in loco—á, í, við, and ad locum—á, í, at. It in general corresponds to the prepp. in loco—á, or in locum— til, whilst ór answers more to í; but it also frequently corresponds to yfir, um or í. It ranges between ór and frá, generally denoting the idea from the surface of, while ór means from the inner part, and frá from the outer part or border. The motion from a hill, plain, open place is thus denoted by af; by ór that from an enclosed space, depth, cavity, thus af fjalli, but ór of a valley, dale; af Englandi, but ór Danmörk, as mörk implies the notion of a deep wood, forest. The wind blows af landi, but a ship sets sail frá landi; frá landi also means a distance from: af hendi, of a glove, ring; ór hendi, of whatever has been kept in the hand (correl. to á hendi and í hendi). On the other hand af is more general, whilst frá and ór are of a more special character; frá denoting a departure, ór an impulse or force; a member goes home af þingi, whereas ór may denote an inmate of a district, or convey the notion of secession or exclusion from, Eb. 105 new Ed.; the traveller goes af landi, the exile ór landi: taka e-t af e-m is to take a thing out of one’s hand, that of taka frá e-m to remove out of one’s sight, etc. In general af answers to Engl. of, off, ór to out of, and frá to from: the Lat. prepp. ab, de, and ex do not exactly correspond to the Icelandic, yet as a rule ór may answer to ex, af sometimes to ab, sometimes to de. Of, off, from among; with, by; on account of by means of, because of concerning, in respect of.
    A. Loc.
    I. With motion, off, from:
    1. prop. corresp. to á,
    α. konungr dró gullhring af hendi sér (but á hendi), Ld. 32; Höskuldr lætr bera farm af skipi, unload the ship (but bera farm á skip), id.; var tekit af hestum þeirra, they were unsaddled, Nj. 4; Gunnarr hafði farit heiman af bæ sínum, he was away from home, 82; Gunnarr hljóp af hesti sínum, jumped off his horse (but hl. á hest), 83; hlaupa, stökkva af baki, id., 112, 264 ; Gunnarr skýtr til hans af boganum, from the bow, where af has a slight notion of instrumentality, 96; flýja af fundinum, to fly from off the battle-field, 102; ríða af Þríhyrningshálsum, 206; út af Langaholti, Eg. 744 ; sunnan ór Danmörk ok af Saxlandi, 560; ganga af mótinu, to go from the meeting, Fms. vii. 130; af þeirra fundi reis María upp ok fór, 625. 85 ; Flosi kastaði af ser skikkjunni, threw his cloak off him (but kasta á sik),Nj. 176; taka Hrungnis fót af honum, of a load, burden, Edda 58; land þat er hann fiskði af, from which he set off to fish, Grág. i. 151, is irregular, frá would suit better; slíta af baki e-s, from off one’s back, ii. 9 ; bera af borði, to clear the table, Nj. 75.
    β. where it more nearly answers to í; þeir koma af hafi, of sailors coming in (but leggja í haf), Nj. 128 ; fara til Noregs af Orkneyjum (but í or til O.), 131; þeim Agli fórst vel ok komu af hafi i Borgarfjörð, Eg. 392 ; hann var útlagi ( outlawed) af Noregi, where ór would be more regular, 344; af Islandi, of a traveller, Fms. x. 3; búa her af báðum ríkjunum, to take a levy from, 51; hinir beztu bændr ór Norðlendingafjórðungi ok af Sunnlendingafjórðungi, the most eminent Southerners and Northerners, 113; Gizzurr gékk af útsuðri at gerðinu, from south-west, Sturl. ii. 219; prestar af hvárutveggja biskupsdæmi, from either diocess, Dipl. ii. 11; verða tekinn af heimi, to be taken out of the world, 623. 21; gruflar hon af læknum, scrambles out of the brook, Ísl. ii. 340; Egill kneyfði af horninu í einum drykk, drained off the horn at one draught, literally squeezed every drop out of it, Eg. 557; brottuaf herbúðunurn, Fms. x. 343.
    γ. of things more or less surrounding the subject, corresp. to yfir or um; láta þeir þegar af sér tjöldin, break off, take down the tents in preparing for battle, Eg. 261; kyrtillinn rifnaði af honum, his coat burst, caused by the swollen body, 602; hann hafði leyst af sér skúa sína, he untied his shoes (but binda á sik), 716; Steinarr vildi slíta hann af sér, throw him off, of one clinging to one’s body, 747; tók Gísli þá af sér vápnin, took off his arms, Fms. vii. 39. Of putting off clothes; fara af kápu, Nj. 143; far þú eigi af brynjunni, Bs. i. 541; þá ætlaði Sigurðr at fara af brynjunni, id.; þá var Skarphéðinn flettr af klæðunum, Nj. 209: now more usually fara or klæðum, fötum, exuere, to undress.
    δ. connected with út; föstudaginn for út herrinn af borginni, marched out of the town, Nj. 274; ganga út af kirkjunni, to go out of the church, now út úr, Fms. vii. 107: drekki hann af þeirri jörðunni, of something impregnated with the earth, Laekn. 402.
    ε. more closely corresponding to frá, being in such cases a Latinism (now frá); bréf af páfa, a pope’s bull, Fms. x. 6; rit af hánum, letter from him, 623. 52; bréf af Magnúsi konungi, a letter from king Magnus, Bs. i. 712; farið þér á brautu af mér í eilífan eld, Hom. 143; brott af drottins augliti, Stj. 43.
    ζ. denoting an uninterrupted continuity, in such phrases as land aflandi, from land to land, Eg. 343, Fas. ii. 539; skip af skipl. from ship to ship, Fms. v. 10; brann hvat af öðru, one after another, of an increasing fire, destroying everything, i. 128; brandr af brandi brenn, funi kveykist af funa, one from another, Hm. 56; hverr af öðrum, one after another, in succession, also hverr at öðrum, Eb. 272, 280 (where at in both passages).
    2. metaph., at ganga af e-m dauðum, to go from, leave one dead on the spot, of two combatants; en hann segiz bani hins ef hann gekk af dauðum manni, Grág. ii. 88, Hkr. 1. 327; undr þykir mér er bróðir þinn vildi eigi taka af þér starf þetta, would not take this toil from thee, Nj. 77; þegnar hans glöddust af honum, were fain of him, Fms. x. 380; at koma þeim manni af sér er settr var á fé hans, to get rid of, Ld. 52; vil ek þú vinriir af þér skuldina, work off the debt, Njarð. 366; reka af sér, to repel, Sturl. ii. 219; hann á þá sonu er aldri munu af oss ganga, who will never leave us, whom we shall never get rid of, Fas. i. 280; leysa e-n af e-u, to relieve, 64; taka e-n af lífi, to kill, Eg. 48, 416, Nj. 126; af lífdögum, Fms. vii. 204; ek mun ná lögum af því máli, get the benefit of the law in this case, Eg. 468; muntu enga sætt af mér fá, no peace at my hand, 414; rísa af dauða, to rise from death, Fms. ii. 142; guð bætti honum þó af þessi sótt, healed him of this sickness, ix. 390; vakna af sýn, draumi, svefni, to awaken from a vision, dream, sleep, 655 xxxii. I, Gísl. 24, Eb. 192, Fas. i. 41. Rather with the notion out of, in the phrase af sér etc., e. g. sýna e-t af scr, to shew, exhibit a disposition for or against, Ld. 18; gera mikit af sér, to shew great prowess, Ísl. ii. 368; éf þú gerir eigi meira af þér um aðra leika, unless you make more of thyself, Edda 32; Svipdagr hafði mikit af sér gert, fought bravely, Fas. i. 41; góðr (illr) af sér, good ( bad) of oneself, by nature; mikill af sjálfum sér, proud, bold, stout, Nj. 15; ágætastr maðr af sjálfum sér, the greatest hero, Bret.: góðr af ser, excellent, Hrafn. 7; but, on the contrary, af sér kominn, ruinous, in decay; this phrase is used of old houses or buildings, as in Bs. i. 488 = Sturl. l. c.; af sér kominn af mæði can also be said of a man fallen off from what he used to be; kominn af fotum fram, off his legs from age, Sturl. i. 223, Korm. 154 (in a verse).
    II. WITHOUT MOTION:
    1. denoting direction from, but at the same time continuous connection with an object from which an act or thing proceeds, from; tengja skip hvárt fram af stafni annars, to tie the ships in a line, stem to stern, Fms. i. 157, xi. 111; svá at þeir tóku út af borðum, jutted out of the boards, of rafters or poles, iv. 49; stjarna ok af sem skaft, of a comet, ix. 482; lúka upp af hrossi, to open a gate from off a horse, Grág. ii. 264; hon svarar af sínu sæti sem álpt af baru, Fás. i. 186; þar er sjá mátti utau af firði, af þjóðleið, that might be seen from the fareway on the sea when sailing in the firth, Hkr. ii. 64; þá mun hringt af (better at) Burakirkju, of bells rung at the church, Fms. xi. 160; gengr þar af Meðalfellsströnd, projects from, juts out, of a promontory, Ld. 10.
    2. denoting direction alone; upp af víkinni stóð borg mikil, a burg inland from the inlet, Eg. 161; lokrekkja innar af seti, a shut bed inward from the benches in the hall, Ísl. ii. 262; kapella upp af konungs herbergjum, upwards from, Fms. x. 153; vindr stóð af landi, the wind stood off the land, Bárð. 166.
    β. metaph., stauda af e-u, vide VI. 4.
    γ. ellipt., hallaði af norðr, of the channel, north of a spot, Boll. 348; also, austr af, suðr af, vestr af, etc.
    3. denoting absence; þingheyendr skulu eigi vera um nótt af þingi ( away from the meeting), eðr lengr, þá eru þeir af þingi ( away from (be meeting) ef þeir eru or ( out of) þingmarki, Grág. i. 25; vera um nótt af várþingi, 115; meðan hann er af landi héðan, abroad, 150.
    β. metaph., gud hvíldi af öllum verkum sínum á sjaunda degi, rested from his labours, Ver. 3.
    4. denoting distance; þat er komit af þjóðleið, out of the high road, remote, Eg. 369; af þjóðbraut, Grág. ii. 264, i. 15; Otradalr (a farm) var mjök af vegi, far out of the way, Háv. 53.
    B. TEMP, past, from, out of, beyond:
    1. of a person’s age, in the sense of having past a period of life; af ómaga aldri, of age, able to support oneself, Grág. i. 243; af aeskualdri, stricken in years, having past the prime of life, Eg. 202; lítið af barnsaldri, still a child, Ld. 74; ek em nú af léttasia skeiði, no longer in the prime of life, Háv. 40.
    2. of a part or period of time, past; eigi síðar en nótt er af þingi, a night of the session past, Grág. i. 101; þá er sjau vikur eru af sumri, seven weeks past of the summer, 182; tíu vikur af sumri, Íb. 10; var mikit af nótt, much of the night was past, Háv. 41; mikið af vetri, much of the winter was past, Fas. ii. 186; þriðjungr af nótt, a third of the night past, Fms. x. 160; stund af degi, etc.; tveir mánoðr af sumri, Gþl. 103.
    3. in adverbial phrases such as, af stundu, soon; af bragði, at once; af tómi, at leisure, at ease; af nýju, again; af skyndingu, speedily; af bráðungu, in a hurry, etc.
    C. In various other relations:
    I. denoting the passage or transition of an object, concrete or abstract, of, from.
    1. where a thing is received, derived from, conferred by a person or object; þiggja lið af e-m, to derive help from, Edda 26; taka traust af e-m, to receive support, comfort from, Fms. xi. 243; taka mála af e-m, to be in one’s pay, of a soldier, Eg. 266; halda land af e-m, to hold land of any one, 282; verða viss af e-m, to get information from, 57, Nj. 130; taka við sök af manni (a law term), to undertake a case, suit, Grág. i. 142; hafa umboð af e-m, to be another’s deputy, ii. 374; vera góðs (ills) maklegr af e-m, to deserve good (bad) of, Vd. 88 (old Ed., the new reads frá), Fs. 45; afla matar af eyjum, to derive supplies from, Eb. 12.
    2. where an object is taken by force:
    α. prop. out of a person’s hand; þú skalt hnykkja smíðit af honum, wrest it out of his hand, Nj. 32; cp. taka, þrífa, svipta e-u (e-t) af e-m, to wrest from.
    β. metaph. of a person’s deprival of anything in general; hann tók af þér konuna, carried thy wife off, Nj. 33; tók Gunnarr af þér sáðland þitt, robbed thee of seedland, 103; taka af honum tignina, to depose, degrade him, Eg. 271; vinna e-t af e-m, to carry off by force of arms, conquer, Fms. iii. 29; drepa menn af e-m, for one, slay one’s man, Eg. 417; fell þar lið mart af Eyvindi, many of Eyvind’s people fell there, 261.
    γ. in such phrases as, hyggja af e-u (v. afhuga), hugsa af e-u, to forget; hyggja af harmi; sjá af e-u, to lose, miss; var svá ástúðigt með þeim, at livargi þóttist mega af öðrum sjá, neither of them could take his eyes off the other, Sturl. i. 194; svá er mörg við ver sinn vær, at varla um sér hon af hoiuun nær, Skálda 163.
    3. denoting forfeiture; þá eru þeir útlagir, ok af goðorði sínu, have forfeited their priesthood, Grág. i. 24; telja hann af ráðunum fjár síns alls, to oust one, on account of idiocy or madness, 176; verða af kaupi, to be off the bargain, Edda 26; þá skalt þú af allri fjárheimtunni, forfeit all the claim, Nj. 15; ek skal stefna þér af konunni, summon thee to forfeit, a case of divorce, id.; ella er hann af rettarfari um hana, has forfeited the suit, Grág. i. 381.
    β. ellipt., af ferr eindagi ef, is forfeited, Grág. i. 140.
    II. denoting relation of a part to a whole, off, of, Lat. de; höggva hönd, höfuð, fót af e-um, to cut one’s hand, head, foot off, Nj. 97, 92, Bs. i. 674; höggva spjót af skapti, to sever the blade from the shaft, 264; hann lét þá ekki hafa af föðurarfi sínum, nothing of their patrimony, Eg. 25; vil ek at þú takir slíkt sem þér líkar af varningi, take what you like of the stores, Nj. 4; at þú eignist slíkt af fé okkru sem þú vili, 94.
    β. ellipt., en nú höfum vér kjörit, en þat er af krossinum, a slice of, Fms. vii. 89; Þórðr gaf Skólm frænda sínum af landnámi sínu, a part of, Landn. 211; hafði hann þat af hans eigu er hann vildi, Sturl. ii. 169; þar lá forkr einn ok brotið af endanum, the point broken off, Háv. 24, Sturl. i. 169.
    γ. absol. off; beit hann höndina af, þar sem nú heitir úlfliðr, bit the hand off, Edda 17; fauk af höfuðit, the head flew off, Nj. 97; jafnt er sem þér synist, af er fótrinn, the foot is off, id.; af bæði eyru, both ears off, Vm. 29.
    2. with the notion of—among; mestr skörungr af konum á Norðrlöndum, the greatest heroine in the North, Fms. i. 116; hinn efniligasti maðr af ungum mönnum í Austfjörðum, the most hopeful of youths in the Eastfirths, Njarð. 364; af ( among) öllurn hirðmönnuni virði konungr mest skáld sín, Eg. 27; ef hann vildi nokkura kaupa af þessum konum, Ld. 30; ör liggr þar útiá vegginum, ok er sú af þeirra örum, one of their own arrows, Nj. 115.
    β. from, among, belonging to; guð kaus hana af ollum konum sér til móður, of the Virgin Mary, Mar. A. i. 27.
    γ. metaph., kunna mikit (lítið) af e-u, to know much, little of, Bragi kann mest af skáldskap, is more cunning of poetry than any one else, Edda 17.
    δ. absol. out of, before, in preference to all others; Gunnarr bauð þér góð boð, en þú vildir eingi af taka, you would choose none of them, Nj. 77; ráða e-t af, to decide; þó mun faðir minn mestu af ráða, all depends upon him, Ld. 22; konungr kveðst því mundu heldr af trúa, preferred believing that of the two, Eg. 55; var honum ekki vildara af ván, he could expect nothing better, 364.
    3. with the additional sense of instrumentality, with; ferma skip af e-u, to freight a ship with, Eg. 364; hlaða mörg skip af korni, load many ships with corn, Fms. xi. 8; klyfja tvá hesta af mat, Nj. 74; var vágrinn skipaðr af herskipum, the bay was covered with war ships, 124; fylla ker af glóðum, fill it with embers, Stj. 319; fylla heiminn af sínu kyni, to fill the world with his offspring, Ver. 3.
    III. denoting the substance of which a thing is made, of; used indifferently with ór, though ór be more frequent; þeir gerðu af honum jörðina, af blóði hans sæinn ok vötnin, of the creation of the world from the corpse of the giant Ymir; the poem Gm. 40, 41, constantly uses ór in this sense, just as in modern Icelandic, Edda 5; svá skildu þeir, at allir hlutir væri smíðaðir af nokkru efni, 147 (pref.); húsit var gert af timbrstokkum, built of trunks of timber, Eg. 233; hjöhin vóru af gulli, of gold, golden, Fms. i. 17; af osti, of cheese, but in the verse 1. c. ór osti, Fms. vi. 253; línklæði af lérepti, linen, Sks. 287.
    2. metaph. in the phrases, göra e-t af e-n ( to dispose of), verða af ( become of), hvat hefir þú gört af Gunnari, what hast thou done with Gunnar? Njarð. 376; hvat af motrinuni er orðit, what has become of it? of a lost thing, Ld. 208; hverfr Óspakr á burt, svá eigi vita menn hvat af honum er orðit, what has become of him? Band. 5.
    IV. denoting parentage, descent, origin, domicile, abode:
    1. parentage, of, from, used indifferently with frá; ok eru af þeim komnir Gilsbekkingar, descend from them, but a little below—frá honum eru konmir Sturlungar, Eb. 338, cp. afkvæmi; af ætt Hörðakára, Fms. i. 287; kominn af Trojumönnum, xi. 416; af Ása-ætt (Kb. wrongly at), Edda I.
    β. metaph., vera af Guði (theol.), of God, = righteous, 686 B. 9; illr ávöxtr af íllri rót, Fms. ii. 48; Asia er kölluð af nafni nokkurar konu, derives her name from, Stj. 67; af honum er bragr kallaðr skáldskapr, called after his name, Edda 17.
    2. of domicile; af danskri tungu, of Danish or Scandinavian origin, speaking the Danish tongue, Grág. ii. 73; hvaðan af löndum, whence, native of what country? Ísl.
    β. especially denoting a man’s abode, and answering to á and í, the name of the farm (or country) being added to proper names, (as in Scotland,) to distinguish persons of the same name; Hallr af Síðu, Nj. 189; Erlingr af Straumey, 273; Ástríðr af Djúpárbakka, 39; Gunnarr af Hlíðarenda (more usual frá); þorir haklangr konungr af Ögðum, king of Agdir, Eg. 35, etc.; cp. ór and frá.
    V. denoting a person with whom an act, feeling, etc. originates, for the most part with a periphrastic passive:
    1. by, the Old Engl. of; as, ek em sendr hingað af Starkaði ok sonum hans, sent hither by, Nj. 94; inna e-t af hendi, to perform, 257; þó at alþýða væri skírð af kennimönnum, baptized of, Fms. ii. 158; meira virðr af mönnum, higher esteemed, Ld. 158; ástsæll af landsmönnum, beloved, íb. 16; vinsæll af mönnum, Nj. 102; í allgóðu yfirlæti af þeim feðgum, hospitably treated by them, Eg. 170; var þá nokkut drukkið af alþjóð, there was somewhat hard drinking of the people, Sturl. iii. 229; mun þat ekki upp tekið af þeim sükudólgum mínum, they will not clutch at that, Nj. 257; ef svá væri í hendr þér búit af mér, if í had so made everything ready to thy hands, Ld. 130; þá varð fárætt um af föður hans, his father said little about it, Fms. ii. 154.
    2. it is now also sometimes used as a periphrase of a nom., e. g. ritað, þýtt af e-m, written, translated, edited by, but such phrases scarcely occur in old writers.
    VI. denoting cause, ground, reason:
    1. originating from, on account of, by reason of; af frændsemis sökum, for kinship’s sake, Grág. ii. 72; ómáli af áverkum, speechless from wounds, 27; af manna völdum, by violence, not by natural accident, of a crime, Nj. 76; af fortölum Halls, through his pleading, 255; af ástsæld hans ok af tölum þeirra Sæmundar, by his popularity and the eloquence of S., Íb. 16; af ráðum Haralds konungs, by his contriving, Landn. 157; úbygðr af frosti ok kulda, because of frost and cold, Hkr. i. 5.
    β. adverbially, af því, therefore, Nj. 78; af hví, why? 686 B. 9; þá verðr bóndi heiðinn af barni sínu, viz. if he does not cause his child to be christened, K. Þ. K. 20.
    2. denoting instrumentality, by means of; af sinu fé, by one’s own means, Grág. i. 293; framfæra e-n af verkum sinum, by means of one’s own labour, K. Þ. K. 142; draga saman auð af sökum, ok vælum ok kaupum, make money by, 623. I; af sínum kostnaði, at hi s own expense, Hkr. i. 217.
    β. absol., hún fellir á mik dropa svá heita at ek brenn af öll, Ld. 328; hann fékk af hina mestu sæmd, derived great honotur from it, Nj. 88; elli sótti á hendr honum svá at hann lagðist í rekkju af, he grew bedridden from age, Ld. 54; komast undan af hlaupi, escape by running, Fms. viii. 58; spinna garn af rokki, spin off a wheel (now, spinna á rokk), from a notion of instrumentality, or because of the thread being spun out (?), Eb. 92.
    3. denoting proceeding, originating from; lýsti af höndum hennar, her hands spread beams of light, Edda 22; allir heimar lýstust ( were illuminated) af henni, id.; en er lýsti af degi, when the day broke forth, Fms. ii. 16; lítt var lýst af degi, the day was just beginning to break, Ld. 46; þá tók at myrkja af nótt, the ‘mirk-time’ of night began to set in, Eg. 230; tók þá brátt at myrkva af nótt, the night grew dark, Hkr. ii. 230.
    4. metaph., standa, leiða, hljótast af, to be caused by, result from; opt hlýtst íllt af kvenna hjali, great mischief is wrought by women’s gossip (a proverb), Gísl. 15, 98; at af þeim mundi mikit mein ok úhapp standa, be caused by, Edda 18; kenna kulda af ráðum e-s, to feel sore from, Eb. 42; þó mun her hljótast af margs manns bani, Nj, 90.
    5. in adverbial phrases, denoting state of mind; af mikilli æði, in fury, Nj. 116; af móð, in great emotion, Fms. xi. 221; af áhyggju, with concern, i. 186; af létta, frankly, iii. 91; af viti, collectedly, Grág. ii. 27; af heilu, sincerely, Eg. 46; áf fári, in rage; af æðru, timidly, Nj. (in a verse); af setning, composedly, in tune, Fms. iii. 187; af mikilli frægð, gallantly, Fas. i. 261; af öllu afli, with all might, Grág. ii. 41; af riki, violently, Fbr. (in a verse); af trúnaði, confidently, Grág. i. 400.
    VII. denoting regard to, of, concerning, in respect of, as regards:
    1. with verbs, denoting to tell of, be informed, inquire about, Lat. de; Dioscorides segir af grasi því, speaks of, 655 xxx. 5; er menn spurðu af landinu, inquired about it, Landn. 30; halda njósn af e-u, Nj. 104; er þat skjótast þar af at segja, Eg. 546, Band. 8.
    β. absol., hann mun spyrja, hvárt þér sé nokkut af kunnigt hversu for með okkr, whether you know anything about, how, Nj. 33; halda skóla af, to hold a school in a science, 656 A. i. 19 (sounds like a Latinism); en ek gerða þik sera mestan mann af öllu, in respect of all, that you should get all the honour of it, Nj. 78.
    2. with adjectives such as mildr, illr, góðrafe-u, denoting disposition or character in respect to; alira manna mildastr af fo, very liberal, often-banded, Fms. vii. 197; mildr af gulli, i. 33; góðr af griðum, merciful, Al. 33; íllr af mat en mildr af gulli, Fms. i. 53; fastr af drykk, close, stingy in regard to, Sturl. ii. 125; gat þess Hildigunnr at þú mundir góðr af hestinum, that you would be good about the horse, Nj. 90, cp. auðigr at, v. at, which corresponds to the above phrases; cp. also the phrase af sér above, p. 4, col. I, ll. 50 sqq.
    VIII. periphrasis of a genitive (rare); provincialis af öllum Predikaraklaustrum, Fms. x. 76; vera af hinum mesta fjandskap, to breathe deep hatred to, be on bad terms with, ix. 220; af hendi, af hálfu e-s, on one’s behalf, v. those words.
    IX. in adverbial phrases; as, af launungu, secretly; af hljóði, silently; v. those words.
    β. also used absolutely with a verb, almost adverbially, nearly in the signification off, away; hann bað þá róa af fjörðinn, pass the firth swiftly by rowing, row the firth off, Fms. ix. 502; var pá af farit þat seni skerjóttast var, was past, sailed past, Ld. 142; ok er þeir höfðu af fjórðung, past one fourth of the way, Dropl. 10: skína af, to clear up, of the skv, Eb. 152; hence in common language, skína af sér, when the sun breaks forth: sofa af nóttina, to sleep it away, Fms. ii. 98; leið af nóttin, the night past away, Nj. 53; dvelja af stundir, to kill the time, Band. 8; drepa af, to kill; láta af, to slaughter, kill off;
    γ. in exclamations; af tjöldin, off with the awnings, Bs. i. 420, Fins, ix. 49.
    δ. in the phrases, þar af, thence; hér af, hence, Fms. ii. 102; af fram, straight on, Nj. 144; now, á fram, on, advance.
    X. it often refers to a whole sentence or to an adverb, not only like other prepp. to hér, hvar, þar, but also redundantly to hvaðan, héðan, þaðan, whence, hence, thence.
    2. the preposition may sometimes be repeated, once elliptically or adverbially, and once properly, e. g. en er af var borit at borðinu, the cloth was taken off from the table, Nj. 176; Guð þerrir af (off, away) hvert tár af ( from) augum heilagra manna, God wipes off every tear from the eyes of his saints, 655 xx. vii. 17; skal þó fyrst bætr af lúka af fé vegaiula, pay off, from, Gþl. 160, the last af may be omitted—var þá af borið borðinu—and the prep. thus be separated from its case, or it may refer to some of the indecl. relatives er or sem, the prep. hvar, hér, þar being placed behind them without a case, and referring to the preceding relative, e. g. oss er þar mikit af sagt auð þeim, we have been told much about these riches, Band. 24; er þat skjótast þar af at segja, in short, shortly. Eg. 546; þaðan af veit ek, thence í infer, know, Fms. i. 97.
    XI. it is moreover connected with a great many verbs besides those mentioned above, e. g. bera af, to excel, whence afbragð, afbrigði; draga af, to detract, deduct, hence afdráttr; veita ekki af, to be hard with; ganga at, to be left, hence afgangr; standast af um e-t, to stand, how matters stand; sem af tekr, at a furious rate; vita af, to be conscious, know about (vide VII).
    D. As a prefix to compounds distinction is to be made between:
    I. af privativum, denoting diminution, want, deduction, loss, separation, negation of, etc., answering indifferently to Lat. ab-, de-, ex-, dis-, and rarely to re- and se-, v. the following COMPDS, such as segja, dicere, but afsegja, negare; rækja, colere, but afrækja, negligere; aflaga, contra legem; skapligr, normalis, afskapligr, deformis; afvik, recessus; afhús, afhellir, afdalr, etc.
    II. af intensivum, etymologically different, and akin to of, afr-, e. g. afdrykkja = ofdrykkja, inebrietas; afbrýði, jealously; afbendi, tenesmus; afglapi, vir fatuus, etc. etc. Both the privative and the intensive af may be contracted into á, esp. before a labial f, m, v, e. g. á fram = af fram; ábrýði = afbrýði; ávöxtr = afvöxtr; áburðr = afburðr; ávíta = afvíta (?). In some cases dubious. With extenuated and changed vowel; auvirðiligr or övirðiligr, depreciated, = afv- etc., v. those words.

    Íslensk-ensk orðabók > AF

  • 6 Leonardo da Vinci

    [br]
    b. 15 April 1452 Vinci, near Florence, Italy,
    d. 2 May 1519 St Cloux, near Amboise, France.
    [br]
    Italian scientist, engineer, inventor and artist.
    [br]
    Leonardo was the illegitimate son of a Florentine lawyer. His first sixteen years were spent with the lawyer's family in the rural surroundings of Vinci, which aroused in him a lifelong love of nature and an insatiable curiosity in it. He received little formal education but extended his knowledge through private reading. That gave him only a smattering of Latin, a deficiency that was to be a hindrance throughout his active life. At sixteen he was apprenticed in the studio of Andrea del Verrochio in Florence, where he received a training not only in art but in a wide variety of crafts and technical arts.
    In 1482 Leonardo went to Milan, where he sought and obtained employment with Ludovico Sforza, later Duke of Milan, partly to sculpt a massive equestrian statue of Ludovico but the work never progressed beyond the full-scale model stage. He did, however, complete the painting which became known as the Virgin of the Rocks and in 1497 his greatest artistic achievement, The Last Supper, commissioned jointly by Ludovico and the friars of Santa Maria della Grazie and painted on the wall of the monastery's refectory. Leonardo was responsible for the court pageants and also devised a system of irrigation to supply water to the plains of Lombardy. In 1499 the French army entered Milan and deposed Leonardo's employer. Leonardo departed and, after a brief visit to Mantua, returned to Florence, where for a time he was employed as architect and engineer to Cesare Borgia, Duke of Romagna. Around 1504 he completed another celebrated work, the Mona Lisa.
    In 1506 Leonardo began his second sojourn in Milan, this time in the service of King Louis XII of France, who appointed him "painter and engineer". In 1513 Leonardo left for Rome in the company of his pupil Francesco Melzi, but his time there was unproductive and he found himself out of touch with the younger artists active there, Michelangelo above all. In 1516 he accepted with relief an invitation from King François I of France to reside at the small château of St Cloux in the royal domain of Amboise. With the pension granted by François, Leonardo lived out his remaining years in tranquility at St Cloux.
    Leonardo's career can hardly be regarded as a success or worthy of such a towering genius. For centuries he was known only for the handful of artistic works that he managed to complete and have survived more or less intact. His main activity remained hidden until the nineteenth and twentieth centuries, during which the contents of his notebooks were gradually revealed. It became evident that Leonardo was one of the greatest scientific investigators and inventors in the history of civilization. Throughout his working life he extended a searching curiosity over an extraordinarily wide range of subjects. The notes show careful investigation of questions of mechanical and civil engineering, such as power transmission by means of pulleys and also a form of chain belting. The notebooks record many devices, such as machines for grinding and polishing lenses, a lathe operated by treadle-crank, a rolling mill with conical rollers and a spinning machine with pinion and yard divider. Leonardo made an exhaustive study of the flight of birds, with a view to designing a flying machine, which obsessed him for many years.
    Leonardo recorded his observations and conclusions, together with many ingenious inventions, on thousands of pages of manuscript notes, sketches and drawings. There are occasional indications that he had in mind the publication of portions of the notes in a coherent form, but he never diverted his energy into putting them in order; instead, he went on making notes. As a result, Leonardo's impact on the development of science and technology was virtually nil. Even if his notebooks had been copied and circulated, there were daunting impediments to their understanding. Leonardo was left-handed and wrote in mirror-writing: that is, in reverse from right to left. He also used his own abbreviations and no punctuation.
    At his death Leonardo bequeathed his entire output of notes to his friend and companion Francesco Melzi, who kept them safe until his own death in 1570. Melzi left the collection in turn to his son Orazio, whose lack of interest in the arts and sciences resulted in a sad period of dispersal which endangered their survival, but in 1636 the bulk of them, in thirteen volumes, were assembled and donated to the Ambrosian Library in Milan. These include a large volume of notes and drawings compiled from the various portions of the notebooks and is now known as the Codex Atlanticus. There they stayed, forgotten and ignored, until 1796, when Napoleon's marauding army overran Italy and art and literary works, including the thirteen volumes of Leonardo's notebooks, were pillaged and taken to Paris. After the war in 1815, the French government agreed to return them but only the Codex Atlanticus found its way back to Milan; the rest remained in Paris. The appendix to one notebook, dealing with the flight of birds, was later regarded as of sufficient importance to stand on its own. Four small collections reached Britain at various times during the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries; of these, the volume in the Royal Collection at Windsor Castle is notable for its magnificent series of anatomical drawings. Other collections include the Codex Leicester and Codex Arundel in the British Museum in London, and the Madrid Codices in Spain.
    Towards the end of the nineteenth century, Leonardo's true stature as scientist, engineer and inventor began to emerge, particularly with the publication of transcriptions and translations of his notebooks. The volumes in Paris appeared in 1881–97 and the Codex Atlanticus was published in Milan between 1894 and 1904.
    [br]
    Principal Honours and Distinctions
    "Premier peintre, architecte et mécanicien du Roi" to King François I of France, 1516.
    Further Reading
    E.MacCurdy, 1939, The Notebooks of Leonardo da Vinci, 2 vols, London; 2nd edn, 1956, London (the most extensive selection of the notes, with an English translation).
    G.Vasari (trans. G.Bull), 1965, Lives of the Artists, London: Penguin, pp. 255–271.
    C.Gibbs-Smith, 1978, The Inventions of Leonardo da Vinci, Oxford: Phaidon. L.H.Heydenreich, Dibner and L. Reti, 1981, Leonardo the Inventor, London: Hutchinson.
    I.B.Hart, 1961, The World of Leonardo da Vinci, London: Macdonald.
    LRD / IMcN

    Biographical history of technology > Leonardo da Vinci

  • 7 Philosophy

       And what I believe to be more important here is that I find in myself an infinity of ideas of certain things which cannot be assumed to be pure nothingness, even though they may have perhaps no existence outside of my thought. These things are not figments of my imagination, even though it is within my power to think of them or not to think of them; on the contrary, they have their own true and immutable natures. Thus, for example, when I imagine a triangle, even though there may perhaps be no such figure anywhere in the world outside of my thought, nor ever have been, nevertheless the figure cannot help having a certain determinate nature... or essence, which is immutable and eternal, which I have not invented and which does not in any way depend upon my mind. (Descartes, 1951, p. 61)
       Let us console ourselves for not knowing the possible connections between a spider and the rings of Saturn, and continue to examine what is within our reach. (Voltaire, 1961, p. 144)
       As modern physics started with the Newtonian revolution, so modern philosophy starts with what one might call the Cartesian Catastrophe. The catastrophe consisted in the splitting up of the world into the realms of matter and mind, and the identification of "mind" with conscious thinking. The result of this identification was the shallow rationalism of l'esprit Cartesien, and an impoverishment of psychology which it took three centuries to remedy even in part. (Koestler, 1964, p. 148)
       It has been made of late a reproach against natural philosophy that it has struck out on a path of its own, and has separated itself more and more widely from the other sciences which are united by common philological and historical studies. The opposition has, in fact, been long apparent, and seems to me to have grown up mainly under the influence of the Hegelian philosophy, or, at any rate, to have been brought out into more distinct relief by that philosophy.... The sole object of Kant's "Critical Philosophy" was to test the sources and the authority of our knowledge, and to fix a definite scope and standard for the researches of philosophy, as compared with other sciences.... [But Hegel's] "Philosophy of Identity" was bolder. It started with the hypothesis that not only spiritual phenomena, but even the actual world-nature, that is, and man-were the result of an act of thought on the part of a creative mind, similar, it was supposed, in kind to the human mind.... The philosophers accused the scientific men of narrowness; the scientific men retorted that the philosophers were crazy. And so it came about that men of science began to lay some stress on the banishment of all philosophic influences from their work; while some of them, including men of the greatest acuteness, went so far as to condemn philosophy altogether, not merely as useless, but as mischievous dreaming. Thus, it must be confessed, not only were the illegitimate pretensions of the Hegelian system to subordinate to itself all other studies rejected, but no regard was paid to the rightful claims of philosophy, that is, the criticism of the sources of cognition, and the definition of the functions of the intellect. (Helmholz, quoted in Dampier, 1966, pp. 291-292)
       Philosophy remains true to its classical tradition by renouncing it. (Habermas, 1972, p. 317)
       I have not attempted... to put forward any grand view of the nature of philosophy; nor do I have any such grand view to put forth if I would. It will be obvious that I do not agree with those who see philosophy as the history of "howlers" and progress in philosophy as the debunking of howlers. It will also be obvious that I do not agree with those who see philosophy as the enterprise of putting forward a priori truths about the world.... I see philosophy as a field which has certain central questions, for example, the relation between thought and reality.... It seems obvious that in dealing with these questions philosophers have formulated rival research programs, that they have put forward general hypotheses, and that philosophers within each major research program have modified their hypotheses by trial and error, even if they sometimes refuse to admit that that is what they are doing. To that extent philosophy is a "science." To argue about whether philosophy is a science in any more serious sense seems to me to be hardly a useful occupation.... It does not seem to me important to decide whether science is philosophy or philosophy is science as long as one has a conception of both that makes both essential to a responsible view of the world and of man's place in it. (Putnam, 1975, p. xvii)
       What can philosophy contribute to solving the problem of the relation [of] mind to body? Twenty years ago, many English-speaking philosophers would have answered: "Nothing beyond an analysis of the various mental concepts." If we seek knowledge of things, they thought, it is to science that we must turn. Philosophy can only cast light upon our concepts of those things.
       This retreat from things to concepts was not undertaken lightly. Ever since the seventeenth century, the great intellectual fact of our culture has been the incredible expansion of knowledge both in the natural and in the rational sciences (mathematics, logic).
       The success of science created a crisis in philosophy. What was there for philosophy to do? Hume had already perceived the problem in some degree, and so surely did Kant, but it was not until the twentieth century, with the Vienna Circle and with Wittgenstein, that the difficulty began to weigh heavily. Wittgenstein took the view that philosophy could do no more than strive to undo the intellectual knots it itself had tied, so achieving intellectual release, and even a certain illumination, but no knowledge. A little later, and more optimistically, Ryle saw a positive, if reduced role, for philosophy in mapping the "logical geography" of our concepts: how they stood to each other and how they were to be analyzed....
       Since that time, however, philosophers in the "analytic" tradition have swung back from Wittgensteinian and even Rylean pessimism to a more traditional conception of the proper role and tasks of philosophy. Many analytic philosophers now would accept the view that the central task of philosophy is to give an account, or at least play a part in giving an account, of the most general nature of things and of man. (Armstrong, 1990, pp. 37-38)
       8) Philosophy's Evolving Engagement with Artificial Intelligence and Cognitive Science
       In the beginning, the nature of philosophy's engagement with artificial intelligence and cognitive science was clear enough. The new sciences of the mind were to provide the long-awaited vindication of the most potent dreams of naturalism and materialism. Mind would at last be located firmly within the natural order. We would see in detail how the most perplexing features of the mental realm could be supported by the operations of solely physical laws upon solely physical stuff. Mental causation (the power of, e.g., a belief to cause an action) would emerge as just another species of physical causation. Reasoning would be understood as a kind of automated theorem proving. And the key to both was to be the depiction of the brain as the implementation of multiple higher level programs whose task was to manipulate and transform symbols or representations: inner items with one foot in the physical (they were realized as brain states) and one in the mental (they were bearers of contents, and their physical gymnastics were cleverly designed to respect semantic relationships such as truth preservation). (A. Clark, 1996, p. 1)
       Socrates of Athens famously declared that "the unexamined life is not worth living," and his motto aptly explains the impulse to philosophize. Taking nothing for granted, philosophy probes and questions the fundamental presuppositions of every area of human inquiry.... [P]art of the job of the philosopher is to keep at a certain critical distance from current doctrines, whether in the sciences or the arts, and to examine instead how the various elements in our world-view clash, or fit together. Some philosophers have tried to incorporate the results of these inquiries into a grand synoptic view of the nature of reality and our human relationship to it. Others have mistrusted system-building, and seen their primary role as one of clarifications, or the removal of obstacles along the road to truth. But all have shared the Socratic vision of using the human intellect to challenge comfortable preconceptions, insisting that every aspect of human theory and practice be subjected to continuing critical scrutiny....
       Philosophy is, of course, part of a continuing tradition, and there is much to be gained from seeing how that tradition originated and developed. But the principal object of studying the materials in this book is not to pay homage to past genius, but to enrich one's understanding of central problems that are as pressing today as they have always been-problems about knowledge, truth and reality, the nature of the mind, the basis of right action, and the best way to live. These questions help to mark out the territory of philosophy as an academic discipline, but in a wider sense they define the human predicament itself; they will surely continue to be with us for as long as humanity endures. (Cottingham, 1996, pp. xxi-xxii)
       In his study of ancient Greek culture, The Birth of Tragedy, Nietzsche drew what would become a famous distinction, between the Dionysian spirit, the untamed spirit of art and creativity, and the Apollonian, that of reason and self-control. The story of Greek civilization, and all civilizations, Nietzsche implied, was the gradual victory of Apollonian man, with his desire for control over nature and himself, over Dionysian man, who survives only in myth, poetry, music, and drama. Socrates and Plato had attacked the illusions of art as unreal, and had overturned the delicate cultural balance by valuing only man's critical, rational, and controlling consciousness while denigrating his vital life instincts as irrational and base. The result of this division is "Alexandrian man," the civilized and accomplished Greek citizen of the later ancient world, who is "equipped with the greatest forces of knowledge" but in whom the wellsprings of creativity have dried up. (Herman, 1997, pp. 95-96)

    Historical dictionary of quotations in cognitive science > Philosophy

  • 8 AT

    I) prep.
    A. with dative.
    I. Of motion;
    1) towards, against;
    Otkell laut at Skamkatli, bowed down to S.;
    hann sneri egginni at Ásgrími, turned the edge against A.;
    Brynjólfr gengr alit at honum, quite up to him;
    þeir kómust aldri at honum, they could never get near him, to close quarters with him;
    3) to, at;
    koma at landi, to come to land;
    ganga at dómi, to go into court;
    4) along (= eptir);
    ganga at stræti, to walk along the street;
    dreki er niðr fór at ánni (went down the river) fyrir strauminum;
    refr dró hörpu at ísi, on the ice;
    5) denoting hostility;
    renna (sœkja) at e-m, to rush at, assault;
    gerði þá at þeim þoku mikla, they were overtaken by a thick fog;
    6) around;
    vefja motri at höfði sér, to wrap a veil round one’s head;
    bera grjót at e-m, to heap stones upon the body;
    7) denoting business, engagement;
    ríða at hrossum, at sauðum, to go looking after horses, watching sheep;
    fara at landskuldum, to go collecting rents.
    II. Of position, &c.;
    1) denoting presence at, near, by, upon;
    at kirkju, at church;
    at dómi, in court;
    at lögbergi, at the hill of laws;
    2) denoting participation in;
    vera at veizlu, brullaupi, to be at a banquet, wedding;
    3) ellipt., vera at, to be about, to be busy at;
    kvalararnir, er at vóru at pína hann, who were tormenting him;
    var þar at kona nökkur at binda (was there busy dressing) sár manna;
    4) with proper names of places (farms);
    konungr at Danmörku ok Noregi, king of;
    biskup at Hólum, bishop of Holar;
    at Helgafelli, at Bergþórshváli;
    5) used ellipt. with a genitive, at (a person’s) house;
    at hans (at his house) gisti fjölmenni mikit;
    at Marðar, at Mara’s home;
    at hins beilaga Ólafs konungs, at St. Olave’s church;
    at Ránar, at Ran’s (abode).
    III. Of time;
    1) at, in;
    at upphafi, at first, in the beginning;
    at skilnaði, at parting, when they parted;
    at páskum, at Easter;
    at kveldi, at eventide;
    at fjöru, at the ebb;
    at flœðum, at the floodtide;
    2) adding ‘komanda’ or ‘er kemr’;
    at ári komanda, next year;
    at vári, er kemr, next spring;
    generally with ‘komanda’ understood;
    at sumri, hausti, vetri, vári, next summer, &c.;
    3) used with an absolute dative and present or past part.;
    at sér lifanda, duing his lifetime;
    at öllum ásjándum, in the sight of all;
    at áheyranda höfðingjanum, in the hearing of the chief;
    at upprennandi sólu, at sunrise;
    at liðnum sex vikum, after six weeks are past;
    at honum önduðum, after his death;
    4) denoting uninterrupted succession, after;
    hverr at öðrum, annarr at öðrum, one after another;
    skildu menn at þessu, thereupon, after this;
    at því (thereafter) kómu aðrar meyjar.
    IV. fig. and in various uses;
    1) to, into, with the notion of destruction or change;
    brenna (borgina) at ösku, to burn to ashes;
    verða at ormi, to become a snake;
    2) for, as;
    gefa e-t at gjöf, as a present;
    eiga e-n at vin, to have one as friend;
    3) by;
    taka sverð at hjöltum, by the hilt;
    draga út björninn at hlustunum, by the ears;
    kjósa at afli, álitum, by strength, appearrance;
    auðigr at fé, wealthy in goods;
    vænn (fagr) at áliti, fair of face;
    5) as a law term, on the grounds of, by reason of;
    ryðja ( to challenge) dóm at mægðum, kvið at frændsemi;
    6) as a paraphrase of a genitive;
    faðir, móðir at barni (= barns, of a child);
    aðili at sök = aðili sakar;
    7) with adjectives denoting colour, size, age, of;
    hvítr, svartr, rauðr at lit, while, black, red of colour;
    mikill, lítill at stœrð, vexti, tall, small of stature;
    tvítugr at aldri, twenty years of age;
    kýr at fyrsta, öðrum kálfi, a cow that has calved once, twice;
    8) determining the source from which anything comes, of, from;
    Ari nam ok marga frœði at Þuríði (from her);
    þiggja, kaupa, geta, leigja e-t at e-m, to receive, buy, obtain, borrow a thing from one;
    hafa veg (virðing) styrk at e-m, to derive honour, power, from one;
    9) according, to, after (heygðr at fornum sið);
    at ráði allra vitrustu manna, by the advice of;
    at landslögum, by the law of the land;
    at leyfi e-s, by one’s leave;
    10) in adverbial phrases;
    gróa (vera grœddr) at heilu, to be quite healed;
    bíta af allt gras at snøggu, quite bare;
    at fullu, fully;
    at vísu, surely;
    at frjálsu, freely;
    at eilífu, for ever and ever;
    at röngu, at réttu, wrongly, rightly;
    at líku, at sömu, equally, all the same;
    at mun, at ráði, at marki, to a great extent.
    B. with acc., after, upon (= eptir);
    sonr á at taka arf at föður sinn, to take the inheritance after his father;
    at þat (= eptir þat), after that, thereafter;
    connected with a past part. or a., at Gamla fallinn, after the fall of Gamli;
    at Hrungni dauðan, upon the death of Hrungnir.
    1) as the simple mark of the infinitive, to;
    at ganga, at ríða, at hlaupa, to walk, to ride, to run;
    2) in an objective sense;
    hann bauð þeim at fara, sitja, he bade (ordered) them to go, sit;
    gefa e-m at eta, at drekka, to give one to eat, to drink;
    3) denoting design or purpose, in order to (hann gekk í borg at kaupa silfr).
    1) demonstrative particle before a comparative, the, all the, so much the;
    hón grét at meir, she wept the more;
    þykkir oss at líkara, all the more likely;
    þú ert maðr at verri (so much the worse), er þú hefir þetta mælt;
    2) rel. pron., who, which, that (= er);
    þeir allir, at þau tíðindi heyrðu, all those who heard;
    sem þeim er títt, at ( as is the custom of those who) kaupferðir reka.
    conj., that;
    1) introducing a subjective or objective clause;
    þat var einhverju sinni, at Höskuldr hafði vinaboð, it happened once that H.;
    vilda ek, at þú réðist austr í fjörðu, I should like you to go;
    2) relative to svá, denoting proportion, degree;
    svá mikill lagamaðr, at, so great a lawyer, that;
    3) with subj., denoting end or purpose, in order that (skáru þeir fyrir þá (viz. hestana) melinn, at þeir dœi eigi af sulti);
    4) since, because, as (= því at);
    5) connected with þó, því, svá;
    þó at (with subj.), though, although;
    því at, because, for;
    svá at, so that;
    6) temp., þá at (= þá er), when;
    þegar at (= þegar er), as soon as;
    þar til at (= þar til er), until, till;
    áðr at (= á. en), before;
    7) used superfluously after an int. pron. or adv.;
    Ólafr spurði, hvern styrk at hann mundi fá honum, what help he was likely to give him;
    in a relative sense; með fullkomnum ávexti, hverr at (which) þekkr ok þægiligr mun verða.
    V)
    negative verbal suffix, = ata; var-at, was not.
    odda at, Yggs at, battle.
    * * *
    1.
    and að, prep., often used ellipt. dropping the case and even merely as an adverb, [Lat. ad; Ulf. at = πρός and παρά, A. S. ät; Engl. at; Hel. ad = apud; O. H. G. az; lost in mod. Germ., and rare in Swed. and Dan.; in more freq. use in Engl. than any other kindred language, Icel. only excepted]:—the mod. pronunciation and spelling is að (aþ); this form is very old, and is found in Icel. vellum MSS. of the 12th century, e. g. aþ, 623. 60; yet in earlier times it was sounded with a tenuis, as we may infer from rhymes, e. g. jöfurr hyggi at | hve ek yrkja fat, Egill: Sighvat also makes it rhyme with a t. The verse by Thorodd—þar vastu at er fjáðr klæðið þvat (Skálda 162)—is hardly intelligible unless we accept the spelling with an aspirate (að), and say that þvað is = þvá = þváði, lavabat; it may be that by the time of Thorodd and Ari the pure old pronunciation was lost, or is ‘þvat’ simply the A. S. þvât, secuit? The Icelanders still, however, keep the tenuis in compounds before a vowel, or before h, v, or the liquids l, r, thus—atyrða, atorka, athöfn, athugi, athvarf, athlægi; atvinna, atvik; atlaga, atlíðanði ( slope), atriði, atreið, atróðr: but aðdjúpr, aðfinsla (critic), aðferð, aðkoma, aðsókn, aðsúgr (crowding), aðgæzla. In some words the pronunciation is irregular, e. g. atkvæði not aðkv-; atburðr, but aðbúnaðr; aðhjúkran not athjúkran; atgörvi not aðgörfi. At, to, towards; into; against; along, by; in regard to; after.
    Mostly with dat.; rarely with acc.; and sometimes ellipt.—by dropping the words ‘home,’ ‘house,’ or the like—with gen.
    WITH DAT.
    A. LOC.
    I. WITH MOTION; gener. the motion to the borders, limits of an object, and thus opp. to frá:
    1. towards, against, with or without the notion of arrival, esp. connected with verbs denoting motion (verba movendi et eundi), e. g. fara, ganga, koma, lúta, snúa, rétta at…; Otkell laut at Skamkatli, O. louted (i. e. bowed down) towards S., Nj. 77, Fms. xi. 102; sendimaðrinn sneri ( turned) hjöltum sverðsins at konungi, towards the king, i. 15; hann sneri egginni at Ásgrími, turned the edge towards A., Nj. 220; rétta e-t at e-m, to reach, hand over, Ld. 132; ganga at, to step towards, Ísl. ii. 259.
    2. denoting proximity, close up to, up to; Brynjólfr gengr … allt at honum, B. goes quite up to him, Nj. 58; Gunnarr kom þangat at þeim örunum, G. reached them even there with his arrows, 115; þeir kómust aldri at honum, they could never get near him, to close quarters, id.; reið maðr at þeim (up to them), 274; þeir höfðu rakit sporin allt at ( right up to) gammanum, Fms. i. 9; komu þeir at sjó fram, came down to the sea, Bárð. 180.
    3. without reference to the space traversed, to or at; koma at landi, to land, Ld. 38, Fms. viii. 358; ríða at dyrum, Boll. 344; hlaupa at e-m, to run up to, run at, Fms. vii. 218, viii. 358; af sjáfarganginum er hann gekk at landinu, of the surf dashing against the shore, xi. 6; vísa ólmum hundi at manni, to set a fierce hound at a man, Grág. ii. 118; leggja e-n at velli, to lay low, Eg. 426, Nj. 117; hníga at jörðu, at grasi, at moldu, to bite the dust, to die, Njarð. 378; ganga at dómi, a law term, to go into court, of a plaintiff, defendant, or bystander, Nj. 87 (freq.)
    4. denoting a motion along, into, upon; ganga at stræti, to walk along the street, Korm. 228, Fms. vii. 39; at ísi, on the ice, Skálda 198, Fms. vii. 19, 246, viii. 168, Eb. 112 new Ed. (á is perh. wrong); máttu menn ganga bar yfir at skipum einum, of ships alone used as a bridge, Fas. i. 378; at höfðum, at nám, to trample on the slain on the battle-field, Lex. Poët.; at ám, along the rivers; at merkiósum, at the river’s mouth, Grág. ii. 355; at endilöngu baki, all along its back, Sks. 100.
    5. denoting hostility, to rush at, assault; renna at, hlaupa at, ganga, fara, ríða, sækja, at e-m, (v. those words), whence the nouns atrenna, athlaup, atgangr, atför, atreið, atsókn, etc.
    β. metaph., kom at þeim svefnhöfgi, deep sleep fell on them, Nj. 104. Esp. of weather, in the impers. phrase, hríð, veðr, vind, storm görir at e-m, to be overtaken by a snow storm, gale, or the like; görði þá at þeim þoku mikla, they were overtaken by a thick fog, Bárð. 171.
    6. denoting around, of clothing or the like; bregða skikkju at höfði sér, to wrap his cloak over his head, Ld. 62; vefja motri at höfði sér, to wrap a snood round her head, 188; sauma at, to stick, cling close, as though sewn on; sauma at höndum sér, of tight gloves, Bs. i. 453; kyrtill svá þröngr sem saumaðr væri at honum, as though it were stitched to him, Nj. 214; vafit at vándum dreglum, tight laced with sorry tags, id.; hosa strengd fast at beini, of tight hose, Eg. 602; hann sveipar at sér iðrunum ok skyrtunni, he gathers up the entrails close to him and the skirt too, Gísl. 71; laz at síðu, a lace on the side, to keep the clothes tight, Eg. 602.
    β. of burying; bera grjót at einum, to heap stones upon the body, Eg. 719; var gör at þeim dys or grjóti, Ld. 152; gora kistu at líki, to make a coffin for a body, Eb. 264, Landn. 56, Ld. 142.
    γ. of summoning troops or followers; stefna at sér mönnum, to summon men to him, Nj. 104; stefna at sér liði, Eg. 270; kippa mönnum at sér, to gather men in haste, Ld. 64.
    7. denoting a business, engagement; ríða at hrossum, at sauðum, to go looking after after horses, watching sheep, Glúm. 362, Nj. 75; fara at fé, to go to seek for sheep, Ld. 240; fara at heyi, to go a-haymaking, Dropl. 10; at veiðum, a-hunting; at fuglum, a-fowling; at dýrum, a-sbooting; at fiski, a-fishing; at veiðiskap, Landn. 154, Orkn. 416 (in a verse), Nj. 25; fara at landskuldum, to go a-collecling rents, Eg. 516; at Finnkaupum, a-marketing with Finns, 41; at féföngum, a-plundering, Fms. vii. 78; ganga at beina, to wait on guests, Nj. 50; starfa at matseld, to serve at table, Eb. 266; hitta e-n at nauðsynjum, on matters of business; at máli, to speak with one, etc., Fms. xi. 101; rekast at e-m, to pursue one, ix. 404; ganga at liði sér, to go suing for help, Grág. ii. 384.
    β. of festivals; snúa, fá at blóti, veizlu, brullaupi, to prepare for a sacrificial banquet, wedding, or the like, hence at-fangadagr, Eb. 6, Ld. 70; koma at hendi, to happen, befall; ganga at sínu, to come by one’s own, to take it, Ld. 208; Egill drakk hvert full er at honum kom, drained every horn that came to him, Eg. 210; komast at keyptu, to purchase dearly, Húv. 46.
    8. denoting imaginary motion, esp. of places, cp. Lat. spectare, vergere ad…, to look or lie towards; horfði botninn at höfðanum, the bight of the bay looked toward the headland, Fms. i. 340, Landn. 35; also, skeiðgata liggr at læknum, leads to the brook, Ísl. ii. 339; á þann arminn er vissi at sjánum, on that wing which looked toward the sea, Fms. viii. 115; sár þau er horft höfðu at Knúti konungi, xi. 309.
    β. even connected with verbs denoting motion; Gilsáreyrr gengr austan at Fljótinu, G. extends, projects to F. from the east, Hrafh. 25; hjá sundi því, er at gengr þingstöðinni, Fms. xi. 85.
    II. WITHOUT MOTION; denoting presence at, near, by, at the side of, in, upon; connected with verbs like sitja, standa, vera…; at kirkju, at church, Fms. vii. 251, K. f). K. 16, Ld. 328, Ísl. ii. 270, Sks. 36; vera at skála, at húsi, to be in, at home, Landn. 154; at landi, Fms. i. 82; at skipi, on shipboard, Grág. i. 209, 215; at oldri, at a banquet, inter pocula; at áti, at dinner, at a feast, inter edendum, ii. 169, 170; at samförum ok samvistum, at public meetings, id.; at dómi, in a court; standa (to take one’s stand) norðan, sunnan, austan, vestan at dómi, freq. in the proceedings at trials in lawsuits, Nj.; at þingi, present at the parliament, Grág. i. 142; at lögbergi, o n the hill of laws, 17, Nj.; at baki e-m, at the back of.
    2. denoting presence, partaking in; sitja at mat, to sit at meat, Fms. i. 241; vera at veizlu, brullaupi, to be at a banquet, nuptials, Nj. 51, Ld. 70: a law term, vera at vígi, to be an accessory in manslaying, Nj. 89, 100; vera at e-u simply means to be about, be busy in, Fms. iv. 237; standa at máli, to stand by one in a case, Grág. ii. 165, Nj. 214; vera at fóstri, to be fostered, Fms. i. 2; sitja at hégóma, to listen to nonsense, Ld. 322; vera at smíð, to be at one’s work, Þórð. 62: now absol., vera at, to go on with, be busy at.
    3. the law term vinna eið at e-u has a double meaning:
    α. vinna eið at bók, at baugi, to make an oath upon the book by laying the band upon it, Landn. 258, Grág., Nj.; cp. Vkv. 31, Gkv. 3. 3, Hkv. 2. 29, etc.: ‘við’ is now used in this sense.
    β. to confirm a fact (or the like) by an oath, to swear to, Grág. i. 9, 327.
    γ. the law phrase, nefna vátta at e-u, of summoning witnesses to a deed, fact, or the like; nefna vátta at benjum, to produce evidence, witnesses as to the wounds, Nj., Grág.; at görð, Eg. 738; at svörum, Grág. i. 19: this summoning of witnesses served in old lawsuits the same purpose as modern pleadings and depositions; every step in a suit to be lawful must be followed by such a summoning or declaration.
    4. used ellipt., vera at, to be about, to be busy at; kvalararnir er at vóru at pína hann, who were tormenting him; þar varstu at, you were there present, Skálda 162; at várum þar, Gísl. (in a verse): as a law term ‘vera at’ means to be guilty, Glúm. 388; vartattu at þar, Eg. (in a verse); hence the ambiguity of Glum’s oath, vask at þar, I was there present: var þar at kona nokkur ( was there busy) at binda sár manna, Fms. v. 91; hann var at ok smíðaði skot, Rd. 313; voru Varbelgir at ( about) at taka af, þau lög …, Fms. ix. 512; ek var at ok vafk, I was about weaving, xi. 49; þeir höfðu verit at þrjú sumur, they had been busy at it for three summers, x. 186 (now very freq.); koma at, come in, to arrive unexpectedly; Gunnarr kom at í því, G. came in at that moment; hvaðan komtú nú at, whence did you come? Nj. 68, Fms. iii. 200.
    5. denoting the kingdom or residence of a king or princely person; konungr at Danmörk ok Noregi, king of…, Fms. i. 119, xi. 281; konungr, jarl, at öllum Noregi, king, earl, over all N., íb. 3, 13, Landn. 25; konungr at Dyflinni, king of Dublin, 25; but í or yfir England!, Eg. 263: cp. the phrase, sitja at landi, to reside, of a king when at home, Hkr. i. 34; at Joini, Fms. xi. 74: used of a bishop; biskup at Hólum, bishop of Hólar, Íb. 18, 19; but biskup í Skálaholti, 19: at Rómi, at Rome, Fbr. 198.
    6. in denoting a man’s abode (vide p. 5, col. 1, l. 27), the prep. ‘at’ is used where the local name implies the notion of by the side of, and is therefore esp. applied to words denoting a river, brook, rock, mountain, grove, or the like, and in some other instances, by, at, e. g. at Hofi (a temple), Landn. 198; at Borg ( a castle), 57; at Helgafelli (a mountain), Eb. constantly so; at Mosfelli, Landn. 190; at Hálsi (a hill), Fms. xi. 22; at Bjargi, Grett. 90; Hálsum, Landn. 143; at Á ( river), 296, 268; at Bægisá, 212; Giljá, 332; Myrká, 211; Vatnsá, id.; þverá, Glúm. 323; at Fossi (a ‘force’ or waterfall), Landn. 73; at Lækjamoti (waters-meeting), 332; at Hlíðarenda ( end of the lithe or hill), at Bergþórshváli, Nj.; at Lundi (a grove), at Melum (sandhill), Landn. 70: the prep. ‘á’ is now used in most of these cases, e. g. á Á, á Hofi, Helgafelli, Felli, Hálsi, etc.
    β. particularly, and without any regard to etymology, used of the abode of kings or princes, to reside at; at Uppsölum, at Haugi, Alreksstöðum, at Hlöðum, Landn., Fms.
    γ. konungr lét kalla at stofudyrum, the king made a call at the hall door, Eg. 88; þeir kölluðu at herberginu, they called at the inn, Fms. ix. 475.
    7. used ellipt. with a gen., esp. if connected with such words as gista, to be a guest, lodge, dine, sup (of festivals or the like) at one’s home; at Marðar, Nj. 4; at hans, 74; þingfesti at þess bóanda, Grág. i. 152; at sín, at one’s own home, Eg. 371, K. Þ. K. 62; hafa náttstað at Freyju, at the abode of goddess Freyja, Eg. 603; at Ránar, at Ran’s, i. e. at Ran’s house, of drowned men who belong to the queen of the sea, Ran, Eb. 274; at hins heilaga Ólafs konungs, at St. Olave’s church, Fms. vi. 63: cp. ad Veneris, εις Κίμωνος.
    B. TEMP.
    I. at, denoting a point or period of time; at upphafi, at first, in the beginning, Ld. 104; at lyktum, at síðustu, at lokum, at last; at lesti, at last, Lex. Poët., more freq. á lesti; at skilnaði, at parting, at last, Band. 3; at fornu, in times of yore, formerly, Eg. 267, D. I. i. 635; at sinni, as yet, at present; at nýju, anew, of present time; at eilífu, for ever and ever; at skömmu, soon, shortly, Ísl. ii. 272, v. l.
    II. of the very moment when anything happens, the beginning of a term; denoting the seasons of the year, months, weeks, the hours of the day; at Jólum, at Yule, Nj. 46; at Pálmadegi, on Palm Sunday, 273; at Páskum, at Easter; at Ólafsvöku, on St. Olave’s eve, 29th of July, Fms.; at vetri, at the beginning of the winter, on the day when winter sets in, Grág. 1. 151; at sumarmálum, at vetrnáttum; at Tvímánaði, when the Double month (August) begins, Ld. 256, Grág. i. 152; at kveldi, at eventide, Eg. 3; at því meli, at that time; at eindaga, at the term, 395; at eykð, at 4 o’clock p. m., 198; at öndverðri æfi Abra hams, Ver. II; at sinni, now at once, Fms. vi. 71; at öðruhverju, every now and then.
    β. where the point of time is marked by some event; at þingi, at the meeting of parliament (18th to the 24th of June), Ld. 182; at féránsdómi, at the court of execution, Grág. i. 132, 133; at þinglausnum, at the close of the parliament (beginning of July), 140; at festarmálum, eðr at eiginorði, at betrothal or nuptials, 174; at skilnaði, when they parted, Nj. 106 (above); at öllum minnum, at the general drinking of the toasts, Eg. 253; at fjöru, at the ebb; at flæðum, at flood tide, Fms. viii. 306, Orkn. 428; at hrörum, at an inquest, Grág. i. 50 (cp. ii. 141, 389); at sökum, at prosecutions, 30; at sinni, now, as yet, v. that word.
    III. ellipt., or adding ‘komanda’ or ‘er kemr,’ of the future time:
    1. ellipt., komanda or the like being understood, with reference to the seasons of the year; at sumri, at vetri, at hausti, at vári, next summer, winter…, Ísl. ii. 242; at miðju sumri, at ári, at Midsummer, next year, Fas. i. 516; at miðjum vetri, Fms. iv. 237,
    2. adding ‘komanda’ or ‘er kemr;’ at ári komanda, Bárð. 177; at vári er kemr, Dipl. iii. 6.
    IV. used with an absolute dat. and with a pres. part.:
    1. with pres. part.; at morni komanda, on the coming morrow, Fms. i. 263; at sér lifanda, in vivo, in his life time, Grág. ii. 202; at þeim sofundum, illis dormientibus, Hkr. i. 234; at öllum ásjándum, in the sight of all, Fms. x. 329; at úvitanda konungi, illo nesciente, without his knowledge, 227; at áheyranda höfðingjanum, in the chief’s bearing, 235.
    2. of past time with a past part. (Lat. abl. absol.); at hræjum fundnum, on the bodies being found, Grág. ii. 87; at háðum dómum ok föstu þingi, during the session, the courts being set, i. 484; at liðnum sex vikum, after six weeks past, Band. 13; at svá búnu, so goru, svá komnu, svá mæltu (Lat. quibus rebus gestis, dictis, quo facto, dicto, etc.), v. those words; at úreyndu, without trial, without put ting one to the test, Ld. 76; at honum önduðum, illo mortuo.
    3. ellipt. without ‘at;’ en þessum hlutum fram komnum, when all this has been done, Eb. 132.
    V. in some phrases with a slight temp, notion; at görðum gildum, the fences being strong, Gþl. 387; at vörmu spori, at once, whilst the trail is warm; at úvörum, unawares, suddenly, Nj. 95, Ld. 132; at þessu, at this cost, on that condition, Eb. 38, Nj. 55; at illum leiki, to have a narrow escape, now við illan leik, Fms. ix. 473; at því, that granted, Grág. ii. 33: at því, at pessu, thereafter, thereupon, Nj. 76.
    2. denoting succession, without interruption, one after another; hverr at öðrum, annarr maðr at öðrum, aðrir at öðrum; eina konu at annarri, Eg. 91, Fms. ii. 236, vi. 25, Bs. i. 22, 625. 80, H. E. i. 522.
    C. METAPH. and in various cases:
    I. denoting a transformation or change into, to, with the notion of destruction; brenna at ösku, at köldum kolum, to burn to ashes, to be quite destroyed, Fms. i. 105, Edda 3, Sturl. ii. 51: with the notion of transformation or transfiguration, in such phrases as, verða at e-u, göra e-t at e-u, to turn it into:
    α. by a spell; verða at ormi, to become a snake, Fms. xi. 158; at flugdrekum, Gullþ. 7; urðu þau bönd at járni, Edda 40.
    β. by a natural process it can often be translated by an acc. or by as; göra e-n at urðarmanni, to make him an outlaw, Eg. 728; græða e-n at orkumlamanni, to heal him so as to maim him for life, of bad treatment by a leech, Eb. 244: in the law terms, sár görist at ben, a wound turning into a ben, proving to be mortal, Grág., Nj.; verða at ljúgvætti, to prove to be a false evidence, Grág. i. 44; verða at sætt, to turn into reconciliation, Fms. i. 13; göra e-t at reiði málum, to take offence at, Fs. 20; at nýjum tíðindum, to tell as news, Nj. 14; verða fátt at orðum, to be sparing of words, 18; kveðr (svá) at orði, to speak, utter, 10; verða at þrifnaði, to geton well, Fms. vii. 196: at liði, at skaða, to be a help or hurt to one; at bana, to cause one’s death, Nj. 223, Eg. 21, Grág. ii. 29: at undrum, at hlátri, to become a wonder, a laughing-stock, 623. 35, Eg. 553.
    II. denoting capacity, where it may be translated merely by as or for; gefa at Jólagjöf, to give for a Christmas-box, Eg. 516; at gjöf, for a present; at erfð, at láni, launum, as an inheritance, a loan; at kaupum ok sökum, for buying and selling, Ísl. ii. 223, Grág. i. 423; at solum, ii. 204; at herfangi, as spoil or plunder; at sakbótum, at niðgjöldum, as a compensation, weregeld, i. 339, ii. 171, Hkr. ii. 168; taka at gíslingu, to take as an hostage, Edda 15; eiga e-n at vin, at óvin, to have one as friend or foe, illt er at eiga þræl at eingavin, ‘tis ill to have a thrall for one’s bosom friend (a proverb), Nj. 77; fæða, eiga, at sonum (syni), to beget a son, Edda 8, Bs. i. 60 (but eiga at dóttur cannot be said); hafa möttul at yfirhöfn, Fms. vii. 201; verða nökkut at manni (mönnum), to turn out to be a worthy man; verða ekki at manni, to turn out a worthless person, xi. 79, 268.
    2. in such phrases as, verða at orðum, to come towards, Nj. 26; var þat at erindum, Eg. 148; hafa at veizlum, to draw veizlur ( dues) from, Fms. iv. 275, Eg. 647; gora e-t at álitum, to take it into consideration, Nj. 3.
    III. denoting belonging to, fitting, of parts of the whole or the like; vóru at honum (viz. the sword) hjölt gullbúin, the sword was ornamented with a hilt of gold, Ld. 330; umgörð at ( belonging to) sverði, Fs. 97 (Hs.) in a verse; en ef mór er eigi at landinu, if there be no turf moor belonging to the land, Grág. ii. 338; svá at eigi brotnaði nokkuð at Orminum, so that no harm happened to the ship Worm, Fms. x. 356; hvatki er meiðir at skipinu eðr at reiðinu eðr at viðum, damage done t o …, Grág. ii. 403; lesta ( to injure) hús at lásum, við eðr torfi, 110; ef land hefir batnað at húsum, if the land has been bettered as to its buildings, 210; cp. the phrase, göra at e-u, to repair: hamlaðr at höndum eðr fótum, maimed as to hands or feet, Eg. 14; heill at höndum en hrumr at fótum, sound in band, palsied in foot, Fms. vii. 12; lykill at skrá, a key belonging, fitting, to the latch; hurð at húsi; a key ‘gengr at’ ( fits) skrá; and many other phrases. 2. denoting the part by which a thing is held or to which it belongs, by; fá, taka at…, to grasp by …; þú tókt við sverði hans at hjöltunum, you took it by the bill, Fms. i. 15; draga út björninn at hlustum, to pull out the bear by the ears, Fas. ii. 237; at fótum, by the feet, Fms. viii. 363; mæla ( to measure) at hrygg ok at jaðri, by the edge or middle of the stuff, Grág. i. 498; kasta e-m at höfði, head foremost, Nj. 84; kjósa e-n at fótum, by the feet alone, Edda 46; hefja frændsemi at bræðrum, eða at systkynum, to reckon kinship by the brother’s or the sister’s side, Grág. i. 28; kjósa at afli, at álitum, by strength, sight, Gs. 8, belongs rather to the following.
    IV. in respect of, as regards, in regard to, as to; auðigr at fé, wealthy of goods, Nj. 16, 30, 51; beztir hestar at reið, the best racehorses, 186; spekingr at viti, a man of great intellect, Ld. 124; vænn (fagr) at áliti, fair of face, Nj. 30, Bs. i. 61; kvenna vænst at ásjónu ok vits munum, of surpassing beauty and intellect, Ld. 122; fullkominn at hyggju, 18; um fram aðra menn at vinsældum ok harðfengi, of surpassing popularity and hardihood, Eb. 30.
    2. a law term, of challenging jurors, judges, or the like, on account of, by reason of; ryðja ( to challenge) at mægðum, guðsifjum, frændsemi, hrörum …; at leiðarlengd, on account of distance, Grág. i. 30, 50, Nj. (freq.)
    3. in arithm. denoting proportion; at helmingi, þriðjungi, fjórðungi, tíunda hluta, cp. Lat. ex asse, quadrante, for the half, third… part; máttr skal at magni (a proverb), might and main go together, Hkr. ii. 236; þú munt vera at því mikill fræðimaðr á kvæði, in the same proportion, as great, Fms. vi. 391, iii. 41; at e-s hluta, at… leiti, for one’s part, in turn, as far as one is con cerned, Grág. i. 322, Eg. 309, Fms. iii. 26 (freq.): at öðrum kosti, in the other case, otherwise (freq.) More gener., at öllu, öngu, in all (no) respects; at sumu, einhverju, nokkru, partly; at flestu, mestu, chiefly.
    4. as a paraphrase of a genitive; faðir, móðir at barni (= barns); aðili at sök (= sakar a.); morðingi at barni (= barns), faðerni at barni (barns); illvirki at fé manna (cp. Lat. felo de se), niðrfall at sökum (saka), land gangr at fiskum (fiska), Fms. iv. 274, Grág. i. 277, 416, N. G. L. i. 340, K. Þ. K. 112, Nj. 21.
    5. the phrase ‘at sér,’ of himself or in himself, either ellipt. or by adding the participle görr, and with the adverbs vel, ilia, or the like; denoting breeding, bearing, endowments, character …; væn kona, kurteis ok vel at sér, an accomplished, well-bred, gifted lady, Nj. I; vitr maðr ok vel at sér, a wise man and thoroughly good in feeling and bearing, 5; þú ert maðr vaskr ok vel at þér, 49; gerr at sér, accomplished, 51; bezt at sér görr, the finest, best bred man, 39, Ld. 124; en þó er hann svá vel at sér, so generous, Nj. 77; þeir höfðingjar er svá vóru vel at sér, so noble-minded, 198, Fms. i. 160: the phrase ‘at sér’ is now only used of knowledge, thus maðr vel að sér means clever, a man of great knowledge; illa að sér, a blockhead.
    6. denoting relations to colour, size, value, age, and the like; hvitr, svartr, grár, rauðr … at lit, white, swarthy, gray, red … of colour, Bjarn. 55, 28, Ísl. ii. 213, etc.; mikill, lítill, at stærð, vexti, tall, small of size, etc.; ungr, gamall, barn, at aldri, young, old, a child of age; tvítugr, þrítugr … at aldri, twenty, thirty … years of age (freq.): of animals; kyr at fyrsta, öðrum … kálfi, a cow having calved once, twice…, Jb. 346: value, amount, currency of money, kaupa e-t at mörk, at a mark, N. G. L. 1. 352; ok er eyririnn at mörk, amounts to a mark, of the value of money, Grág. i. 392; verðr þá at hálfri murk vaðmála eyrir, amounts to a half a mark, 500.
    β. metaph. of value, connected with verbs denoting to esteem, hold; meta, hafa, halda at miklu, litlu, vettugi, engu, or the like, to hold in high or low esteem, to care or not to care for (freq.): geta e-s at góðu, illu, öngu, to mention one favourably, unfavourably, indifferently … (freq.), prop. in connection with. In many cases it may be translated by in; ekki er mark at draumum, there is no meaning in dreams, no heed is to be paid to dreams, Sturl. ii. 217; bragð er at þá barnið finnr, it goes too far, when even a child takes offence (a proverb): hvat er at því, what does it mean? Nj. 11; hvert þat skip er vöxtr er at, any ship of mark, i. e. however small, Fms. xi. 20.
    V. denoting the source of a thing:
    1. source of infor mation, to learn, perceive, get information from; Ari nam ok marga fræði at Þuríði, learnt as her pupil, at her hands, as St. Paul at the feet of Gamaliel, (just as the Scotch say to speer or ask at a person); Ari nam at Þorgeiri afraðskoll, Hkr. (pref.); nema kunnáttu at e-m, used of a pupil, Fms. i. 8; nema fræði at e-m, xi. 396.
    2. of receiving, acquiring, buying, from; þiggja e-t at e-m, to receive a thing at his hands, Nj. 51; líf, to be pardoned, Fms. x. 173; kaupa land at e-m, to buy it from, Landn. 72, Íb. II, (now af is more freq. in this sense); geta e-t at e-m, to obtain, procure at one’s hands, impetrare; þeirra manna er þeir megu þat geta at, who are willing to do that, Grág. i. I; heimta e-t at e-m (now af), to call in, demand (a debt, money), 279; fala e-t at e-m (now af), to chaffer for or cheapen anything, Nj. 73; sækja e-t at e-m, to ask, seek for; sækja heilræði ok traust at e-m, 98; leiga e-t at e-m (now af), to borrow, Grág. ii. 334; eiga e-t (fé, skuld) at e-m, to be owed money by any one, i. 399: metaph. to deserve of one, Nj. 113; eiga mikit at e-m, to have much to do with, 138; hafa veg, virðing, styrk, at, to derive honour, power from, Fms. vi. 71, Eg. 44, Bárð. 174; gagn, to be of use, Ld. 216; mein, tálma, mischief, disadvantage, 158, 216, cp. Eg. 546; ótta, awe, Nj. 68.
    VI. denoting conformity, according to, Lat. secundum, ex, after; at fornum sið, Fms. i. 112; at sögn Ara prests, as Ari relates, on his authority, 55; at ráði allra vitrustu manna, at the advice of, Ísl. ii. 259, Ld. 62; at lögum, at landslögum, by the law of the land, Grág., Nj.; at líkindum, in all likelihood, Ld. 272; at sköpum, in due course (poet.); at hinum sama hætti, in the very same manner, Grág. i. 90; at vánum, as was to be expected, Nj. 255; at leyfi e-s, by one’s leave, Eg. 35; úlofi, Grág. ii. 215; at ósk, vilja e-s, as one likes…; at mun, id. (poet.); at sólu, happily (following the course of the sun), Bs. i. 70, 137; at því sem …, as to infer from …, Nj. 124: ‘fara, láta, ganga at’ denotes to yield, agree to, to comply with, give in, Ld. 168, Eg. 18, Fms. x. 368.
    VII. in phrases nearly or quite adverbial; gróa, vera græddr, at heilu, to be quite healed, Bárð. 167, Eb. 148; bíta at snöggu, to bite it bare, Fms. xi. 6; at þurru, till it becomes dry, Eb. 276; at endilöngu, all along, Fas. ii; vinnast at litlu, to avail little, 655 x. 14; at fullu, fully, Nj. 257, Hkr. i. 171; at vísu, of a surety, surely, Ld. 40; at frjálsu, freely, 308; at líku, at sömu, equally, all the same, Hom. 80, Nj. 267; at röngu, wrongly, 686 B. 2; at hófi, temperately, Lex. Poët.; at mun, at ráði, at marki, to a great extent; at hringum, utterly, all round, (rare), Fms. x. 389; at einu, yet, Orkn. 358; svá at einu, því at einu, allt at einu, yet, however, nevertheless.
    VIII. connected with comparatives of adverbs and adjectives, and strengthening the sense, as in Engl. ‘the,’ so much the more, all the more; ‘at’ heldr tveimr, at ek munda gjarna veita yðr öllum, where it may be translated by so much the more to two, as I would willingly grant it to all of you; hon grét at meir, she grat (wept) the more, Eg. 483; þykir oss at líkara, all the more likely, Fms. viii. 6; þess at harðari, all the harder, Sturl. iii. 202 C; svá at hinn sé bana at nær, Grág. ii. 117; at auðnara, at hólpnara, the more happy, Al. 19, Grett. 116 B; þess at meiri, Fms. v. 64; auvirðismaðr at meiri, Sturl. ii. 139; maðr at vaskari, id.; at feigri, any the more fey, Km. 22; maðr at verri, all the worse, Nj. 168; ok er ‘at’ firr…, at ek vil miklu heldr, cp. Lat. tantum abest… ut, Eg. 60.
    β. following after a negation; eigi at síðr, no less, Nj. 160, Ld. 146; eigi… at meiri maðr, any better, Eg. 425, 489; erat héra at borgnara, any the better off for that, Fms. vii. 116; eigi at minni, no less for that, Edda (pref.) 146; eigi at minna, Ld. 216, Fms. ix. 50; ekki at verri drengr, not a bit worse for that, Ld. 42; er mér ekki son minn at bættari, þótt…, 216; at eigi vissi at nær, any more, Fas. iii. 74.
    IX. following many words:
    1. verbs, esp. those denoting, a. to ask, enquire, attend, seek, e. g. spyrja at, to speer (ask) for; leita at, to seek for; gæta, geyma at, to pay attention to; huga, hyggja at; hence atspurn, to enquire, aðgæzla, athugi, attention, etc.
    β. verbs denoting laughter, play, joy, game, cp. the Engl. to play at …, to laugh at …; hlæja, brosa at e-u, to laugh, smile at it; leika (sér) at e-u, to play at; þykja gaman at, to enjoy; hæða, göra gys at …, to make sport at …
    γ. verbs denoting assistance, help; standa, veita, vinna, hjálpa at; hence atstoð, atvinna, atverk:—mode, proceeding; fara at, to proceed, hence atför and atferli:—compliance; láta, fara at e-u, v. above:— fault; e-t er at e-u, there is some fault in it, Fms. x. 418; skorta at e-u, to fall short of, xi. 98:—care, attendance; hjúkra at, hlýja at, v. these words:—gathering, collecting; draga, reiða, flytja, fá at, congerere:—engagement, arrival, etc.; sækja at, to attack; ganga at, vera at, to be about; koma at, ellipt. to arrive: göra at, to repair: lesta at, to impair (v. above); finna at, to criticise (mod.); telja at, id.: bera at, to happen; kveða at e-m, to address one, 625. 15, (kveða at (ellipt.) now means to pronounce, and of a child to utter (read) whole syllables); falla at, of the flood-tide (ellipt.): metaph. of pains or straits surrounding one; þreyngja, herða at, to press hard: of frost and cold, with regard to the seasons; frjósa at, kólna at, to get really cold (SI. 44), as it were from the cold stiffening all things: also of the seasons themselves; hausta, vetra að, when the season really sets in; esp. the cold seasons, ‘sumra at’ cannot be used, yet we may say ‘vára að’ when the spring sets in, and the air gets mild.
    δ. in numberless other cases which may partly be seen below.
    2. connected ellipt. with adverbs denoting motion from a place; norðan, austan, sunnan, vestan at, those from the north, east…; utan at, innan at, from the outside or inside.
    3. with adjectives (but rarely), e. g. kærr, elskr, virkr (affectionate), vandr (zealous), at e-m; v. these words.
    WITH ACC.
    TEMP.: Lat. post, after, upon, esp. freq. in poetry, but rare in prose writers, who use eptir; nema reisi niðr at nið (= maðr eptir mann), in succession, of erecting a monument, Hm. 71; in prose, at þat. posthac, deinde, Fms. x. 323, cp. Rm., where it occurs several times, 2, 6, 9, 14, 18, 24, 28, 30, 35; sonr á at taka arf at föður sinn, has to take the inheritance after his father, Grág. i. 170 new Ed.; eiga féránsdóm at e-n, Grág. i. 89; at Gamla fallinn, after the death of G., Fms. x. 382; in Edda (Gl.) 113 ought to be restored, grét ok at Oð, gulli Freyja, she grat (wept) tears of gold for her lost husband Od. It is doubtful if it is ever used in a purely loc. sense; at land, Grág. (Sb.)ii. 211, is probably corrupt; at hönd = á hönd, Grág. (Sb.) i. 135; at mót = at móti, v. this word.
    ☞ In compounds (v. below) at- or að- answers in turn to Lat. ad- or in- or con-; atdráttr e. g. denotes collecting; atkoma is adventus: it may also answer to Lat. ob-, in atburðr = accidence, but might also be compared with Lat. occurrere.
    2.
    and að, the mark of the infinitive [cp. Goth. du; A. S. and Engl. to; Germ. zu]. Except in the case of a few verbs ‘at’ is always placed immediately before the infinitive, so as to be almost an inseparable part of the verb.
    I. it is used either,
    1. as, a simple mark of the infinitive, only denoting an action and independent of the subject, e. g. at ganga, at hlaupa, at vita, to go, to run, to know; or,
    2. in an objective sense when following such verbs as bjóða segja…, to invite, command …; hann bauð þeim at ganga, at sitja, be bade, ordered them to go, sit, or the like; or as gefa and fá; gefa e-m at drekka, at eta, to give one to drink or to eat, etc. etc.
    β. with the additional notion of intention, esp. when following verba cogitandi; hann ætlaði, hafði í hyggju at fara, he had it in his mind to go (where ‘to go’ is the real object to ætlaði and hafði í hyggju).
    3. answering to the Gr. ινα, denoting intention, design, in order to; hann gékk í borg at kaupa silfr, in order to buy, Nj. 280; hann sendi riddara sína með þeim at varðveita þær, 623. 45: in order to make the phrase more plain, ‘svá’ and ‘til’ are frequently added, esp. in mod. writers, ‘svá at’ and contr. ‘svát’ (the last however is rare), ‘til at’ and ‘til þess at,’ etc.
    II. in the earlier times the infin., as in Greek and Lat., had no such mark; and some verbs remain that cannot be followed by ‘at;’ these verbs are almost the same in Icel. as in Engl.:
    α. the auxiliary verbs vil, mun ( μέλλω), skal; as in Engl. to is never used after the auxiliaries shall, will, must; ek vil ganga, I will go; ek mun fara, (as in North. E.) I mun go; ek skal göra þat, I shall do that, etc.
    β. the verbs kunna, mega, as in Engl. I can or may do, I dare say; svá hygginn at hann kunni fyrir sökum ráða, Grág. ii. 75; í öllu er prýða má góðan höfðingja, Nj. 90; vera má, it may be; vera kann þat, id.: kunnu, however, takes ‘at’ whenever it means to know, and esp. in common language in phrases such as, það kann að vera, but vera kann þat, v. above.
    γ. lata, biðja, as in Engl. to let, to bid; hann lét (bað) þá fara, he let (bade) them go.
    δ. þykkja, þykjast, to seem; hann þykir vera, he is thought to be: reflex., hann þykist vera, sibi videtur: impers., mér þykir vera, mibi videtur, in all cases without ‘at.’ So also freq. the verbs hugsa, hyggja, ætla, halda, to think, when denoting merely the act of thinking; but if there be any notion of intention or purpose, they assume the ‘at;’ thus hann ætlaði, hugði, þá vera góða menn, he thought them to be, acc. c. inf.; but ætlaði at fara, meant to go, etc.
    ε. the verbs denoting to see, bear; sjá, líta, horfa á … ( videre); heyra, audire, as in Engl. I saw them come, I heard him tell, ek sá þá koma, ek heyrði hann tala.
    ζ. sometimes after the verbs eiga and ganga; hann gékk steikja, be went to roast, Vkv. 9; eiga, esp. when a mere periphrasis instead of skal, móður sína á maðr fyrst fram færa (better at færa), Grág. i. 232; á þann kvið einskis meta, 59; but at meta, id. l. 24; ráða, nema, göra …, freq. in poetry, when they are used as simple auxiliary verbs, e. g. nam hann sér Högna hvetja at rúnum, Skv. 3. 43.
    η. hljóta and verða, when used in the sense of must (as in Engl. he must go), and when placed after the infin.of another verb; hér muntu vera hljóta, Nj. 129; but hljóta at vera: fara hlýtr þú, Fms. 1. 159; but þú hlýtr at fara: verða vita, ii. 146; but verða at vita: hann man verða sækja, þó verðr (= skal) maðr eptir mann lifa, Fms. viii. 19, Fas. ii. 552, are exceptional cases.
    θ. in poetry, verbs with the verbal neg. suffix ‘-at,’ freq. for the case of euphony, take no mark of the infinitive, where it would be indispensable with the simple verb, vide Lex. Poët. Exceptional cases; hvárt sem hann vill ‘at’ verja þá sök, eða, whatever he chooses, either, Grág. i. 64; fyrr viljum vér enga kórónu at bera, en nokkut ófrelsi á oss at taka, we would rather bear no crown than …, Fms. x. 12; the context is peculiar, and the ‘at’ purposely added. It may be left out ellipt.; e. g. þá er guð gefr oss finnast (= at finnast), Dipl. ii. 14; gef honum drekka (= at drekka), Pr. 470; but mostly in unclassical writers, in deeds, or the like, written nastily and in an abrupt style.
    3.
    and að, conj. [Goth. þatei = οτι; A. S. þät; Engl. that; Germ, dass; the Ormul. and Scot. at, see the quotations sub voce in Jamieson; in all South-Teutonic idioms with an initial dental: the Scandinavian idioms form an exception, having all dropped this consonant; Swed. åt, Dan. at]. In Icel. the Bible translation (of the 16th century) was chiefly based upon that of Luther; the hymns and the great bulk of theol. translations of that time were also derived from Germany; therefore the germanised form það frequently appears in the Bible, and was often employed by theol. authors in sermons since the time of the Reformation. Jón Vidalin, the greatest modern Icel. preacher, who died in 1720, in spite of his thoroughly classical style, abounds in the use of this form; but it never took root in the language, and has never passed into the spoken dialect. After a relative or demonstr. pronoun, it freq. in mod. writers assumes the form eð, hver eð, hverir eð, hvað eð, þar eð. Before the prep. þú (tu), þ changes into t, and is spelt in a single word attú, which is freq. in some MS.;—now, however, pronounced aððú, aððeir, aððið …, = að þú…, with the soft Engl. th sound. It gener. answers to Lat. ut, or to the relat. pron. qui.
    I. that, relative to svá, to denote proportion, degree, so…, that, Lat. tam, tantus, tot…, ut; svá mikill lagamaðr, at…, so great a lawyer, that…, Nj. 1; hárið svá mikit, at þat…, 2; svá kom um síðir því máli, at Sigvaldi, it came so far, that…, Fms. xi. 95, Edda 33. Rarely and unclass., ellipt. without svá; Bæringr var til seinn eptir honum, at hann … (= svá at), Bær. 15; hlífði honum, at hann sakaði ekki, Fas. iii. 441.
    II. it is used,
    1. with indic, in a narrative sense, answering partly to Gr. οτι, Lat. quod, ut, in such phrases as, it came to pass, happened that …; þat var einhverju sinni, at Höskuldr hafði vinaboð, Nj. 2; þat var á palmdrottinsdag, at Ólafr konungr gékk út um stræti, Fms. ii. 244.
    2. with subj. answering to Lat. acc. with infin., to mark the relation of an object to the chief verb, e. g. vilda ek at þú réðist, I wished that you would, Nj. 57.
    β. or in an oblique sentence, answering to ita ut…; ef svá kann verða at þeir láti…, if it may be so that they might…, Fms. xi. 94.
    γ. with a subj. denoting design, answering to ϊνα or Lat. ut with subj., in order that; at öll veraldar bygðin viti, ut sciat totus orbis, Stj.; þeir skáru fyrir þá melinn, at þeir dæi eigi af sulti, ut ne fame perirent, Nj. 265; fyrsti hlutr bókarinnar er Kristindómsbálkr, at menn skili, in order that men may understand, Gþl. p. viii.
    III. used in connection with conjunctions,
    1. esp. þó, því, svá; þó at freq. contr. þótt; svát is rare and obsolete.
    α. þóat, þótt (North. E. ‘thof’), followed by a subjunctive, though, although, Lat. etsi, quamquam (very freq.); þóat nokkurum mönnum sýnist þetta með freku sett… þá viljum vér, Fms. vi. 21: phrases as, gef þú mér þó at úverðugri, etsi indignae (dat.), Stj. MS. col. 315, are unclass., and influenced by the Latin: sometimes ellipt. without ‘þó,’ eigi mundi hón þá meir hvata göngu sinni, at (= þóat) hon hraeddist bana sinn, Edda 7, Nj. 64: ‘þó’ and ‘at’ separated, svarar hann þó rétt, at hann svari svá, Grág. i. 23; þó er rétt at nýta, at hann sé fyrr skorinn, answering to Engl. yet—though, Lat. attamen —etsi, K. Þ. K.
    β. því at, because, Lat. nam, quia, with indic.; því at allir vóru gerfiligir synir hans, Ld. 68; því at af íþróttum verðr maðr fróðr, Sks. 16: separated, því þegi ek, at ek undrumst, Fms. iii. 201; því er þessa getið, at þat þótti, it i s mentioned because …, Ld. 68.
    γ. svá at, so that, Lat. ut, ita ut; grátrinn kom upp, svá at eingi mátti öðrum segja, Edda 37: separated, so … that, svá úsvúst at …, so bad weather, that, Bs. i. 339, etc.
    2. it is freq. used superfluously, esp. after relatives; hver at = hverr, quis; því at = því, igitur; hverr at þekkr ok þægiligr mun verða, Fms. v. 159; hvern stvrk at hann mundi fá, 44; ek undrumst hvé mikil ógnarraust at liggr í þér, iii. 201; því at ek mátti eigi þar vera elligar, því at þar var kristni vel haldin, Fas. i. 340.
    IV. as a relat. conj.:
    1. temp, when, Lat. quum; jafnan er ( est) mér þá verra er ( quum) ek fer á braut þaðan, en þá at ( quum) ek kem, Grett. 150 A; þar til at vér vitum, till we know, Fms. v. 52; þá at ek lýsta (= þá er), when, Nj. 233.
    2. since, because; ek færi yðr (hann), at þér eruð í einum hrepp allir, because of your being all of the same Rape, Grág. i. 260; eigi er kynlegt at ( though) Skarphéðinn sé hraustr, at þat er mælt at…, because (since) it is a saying that…, Nj. 64.
    V. in mod. writers it is also freq. superfluously joined to the conjunctions, ef að = ef, si, (Lv. 45 is from a paper MS.), meðan að = meðan, dum; nema að, nisi; fyrst að = fyrst, quoniam; eptir að, síðan að, postquam; hvárt að = hvárt, Lat. an. In the law we find passages such as, þá er um er dæmt eina sök, at þá eigu þeir aptr at ganga í dóminn, Grág. i. 79; ef þing ber á hina helgu viku, at þat á eigi fyrir þeim málum at standa, 106; þat er ok, at þeir skulu reifa mál manna, 64; at þeir skulu með váttorð þá sök sækja, 65: in all these cases ‘at’ is either superfluous or, which is more likely, of an ellipt. nature, ‘the law decrees’ or ‘it is decreed’ being understood. The passages Sks. 551, 552, 568, 718 B, at lokit (= at ek hefi lokit), at hugleitt (= at ek hefi h.), at sent (= at ek hefi sent) are quite exceptional.
    4.
    and að, an indecl. relat. pronoun [Ulf. þatei = ος, ος αν, οστις, οσπερ, οιος, etc.; Engl. that, Ormul. at], with the initial letter dropped, as in the conj. at, (cp. also the Old Engl. at, which is both a conj. and a pronoun, e. g. Barbour vi. 24 in Jamieson: ‘I drede that his gret wassalage, | And his travail may bring till end, | That at men quhilc full litil wend.’ | ‘His mestyr speryt quhat tithings a t he saw.’—Wyntoun v. 3. 89.) In Icel. ‘er’ (the relat. pronoun) and ‘at’ are used indifferently, so that where one MS. reads ‘er,’ another reads ‘at,’ and vice versâ; this may easily be seen by looking at the MSS.; yet as a rule ‘er’ is much more freq. used. In mod. writers ‘at’ is freq. turned into ‘eð,’ esp. as a superfluous particle after the relative pron. hverr (hver eð, hvað eð, hverir eð, etc.), or the demonstr. sá (sá eð, þeir eð, hinir eð, etc.):—who, which, that, enn bezta grip at ( which) hafði til Íslands komið, Ld. 202; en engi mun sá at ( cui) minnisamara mun vera, 242; sem blótnaut at ( quae) stærst verða, Fms. iii. 214; þau tiðendi, at mér þætti verri, Nj. 64, etc. etc.
    5.
    n. collision (poët.); odda at, crossing of spears, crash of spears, Höfuðl. 8.
    β. a fight or bait of wild animals, esp. of horses, v. hesta-at and etja.
    6.
    the negative verbal suffix, v. -a.

    Íslensk-ensk orðabók > AT

  • 9 Edison, Thomas Alva

    [br]
    b. 11 February 1847 Milan, Ohio, USA
    d. 18 October 1931 Glenmont
    [br]
    American inventor and pioneer electrical developer.
    [br]
    He was the son of Samuel Edison, who was in the timber business. His schooling was delayed due to scarlet fever until 1855, when he was 8½ years old, but he was an avid reader. By the age of 14 he had a job as a newsboy on the railway from Port Huron to Detroit, a distance of sixty-three miles (101 km). He worked a fourteen-hour day with a stopover of five hours, which he spent in the Detroit Free Library. He also sold sweets on the train and, later, fruit and vegetables, and was soon making a profit of $20 a week. He then started two stores in Port Huron and used a spare freight car as a laboratory. He added a hand-printing press to produce 400 copies weekly of The Grand Trunk Herald, most of which he compiled and edited himself. He set himself to learn telegraphy from the station agent at Mount Clements, whose son he had saved from being run over by a freight car.
    At the age of 16 he became a telegraphist at Port Huron. In 1863 he became railway telegraphist at the busy Stratford Junction of the Grand Trunk Railroad, arranging a clock with a notched wheel to give the hourly signal which was to prove that he was awake and at his post! He left hurriedly after failing to hold a train which was nearly involved in a head-on collision. He usually worked the night shift, allowing himself time for experiments during the day. His first invention was an arrangement of two Morse registers so that a high-speed input could be decoded at a slower speed. Moving from place to place he held many positions as a telegraphist. In Boston he invented an automatic vote recorder for Congress and patented it, but the idea was rejected. This was the first of a total of 1180 patents that he was to take out during his lifetime. After six years he resigned from the Western Union Company to devote all his time to invention, his next idea being an improved ticker-tape machine for stockbrokers. He developed a duplex telegraphy system, but this was turned down by the Western Union Company. He then moved to New York.
    Edison found accommodation in the battery room of Law's Gold Reporting Company, sleeping in the cellar, and there his repair of a broken transmitter marked him as someone of special talents. His superior soon resigned, and he was promoted with a salary of $300 a month. Western Union paid him $40,000 for the sole rights on future improvements on the duplex telegraph, and he moved to Ward Street, Newark, New Jersey, where he employed a gathering of specialist engineers. Within a year, he married one of his employees, Mary Stilwell, when she was only 16: a daughter, Marion, was born in 1872, and two sons, Thomas and William, in 1876 and 1879, respectively.
    He continued to work on the automatic telegraph, a device to send out messages faster than they could be tapped out by hand: that is, over fifty words per minute or so. An earlier machine by Alexander Bain worked at up to 400 words per minute, but was not good over long distances. Edison agreed to work on improving this feature of Bain's machine for the Automatic Telegraph Company (ATC) for $40,000. He improved it to a working speed of 500 words per minute and ran a test between Washington and New York. Hoping to sell their equipment to the Post Office in Britain, ATC sent Edison to England in 1873 to negotiate. A 500-word message was to be sent from Liverpool to London every half-hour for six hours, followed by tests on 2,200 miles (3,540 km) of cable at Greenwich. Only confused results were obtained due to induction in the cable, which lay coiled in a water tank. Edison returned to New York, where he worked on his quadruplex telegraph system, tests of which proved a success between New York and Albany in December 1874. Unfortunately, simultaneous negotiation with Western Union and ATC resulted in a lawsuit.
    Alexander Graham Bell was granted a patent for a telephone in March 1876 while Edison was still working on the same idea. His improvements allowed the device to operate over a distance of hundreds of miles instead of only a few miles. Tests were carried out over the 106 miles (170 km) between New York and Philadelphia. Edison applied for a patent on the carbon-button transmitter in April 1877, Western Union agreeing to pay him $6,000 a year for the seventeen-year duration of the patent. In these years he was also working on the development of the electric lamp and on a duplicating machine which would make up to 3,000 copies from a stencil. In 1876–7 he moved from Newark to Menlo Park, twenty-four miles (39 km) from New York on the Pennsylvania Railway, near Elizabeth. He had bought a house there around which he built the premises that would become his "inventions factory". It was there that he began the use of his 200- page pocket notebooks, each of which lasted him about two weeks, so prolific were his ideas. When he died he left 3,400 of them filled with notes and sketches.
    Late in 1877 he applied for a patent for a phonograph which was granted on 19 February 1878, and by the end of the year he had formed a company to manufacture this totally new product. At the time, Edison saw the device primarily as a business aid rather than for entertainment, rather as a dictating machine. In August 1878 he was granted a British patent. In July 1878 he tried to measure the heat from the solar corona at a solar eclipse viewed from Rawlins, Wyoming, but his "tasimeter" was too sensitive.
    Probably his greatest achievement was "The Subdivision of the Electric Light" or the "glow bulb". He tried many materials for the filament before settling on carbon. He gave a demonstration of electric light by lighting up Menlo Park and inviting the public. Edison was, of course, faced with the problem of inventing and producing all the ancillaries which go to make up the electrical system of generation and distribution-meters, fuses, insulation, switches, cabling—even generators had to be designed and built; everything was new. He started a number of manufacturing companies to produce the various components needed.
    In 1881 he built the world's largest generator, which weighed 27 tons, to light 1,200 lamps at the Paris Exhibition. It was later moved to England to be used in the world's first central power station with steam engine drive at Holborn Viaduct, London. In September 1882 he started up his Pearl Street Generating Station in New York, which led to a worldwide increase in the application of electric power, particularly for lighting. At the same time as these developments, he built a 1,300yd (1,190m) electric railway at Menlo Park.
    On 9 August 1884 his wife died of typhoid. Using his telegraphic skills, he proposed to 19-year-old Mina Miller in Morse code while in the company of others on a train. He married her in February 1885 before buying a new house and estate at West Orange, New Jersey, building a new laboratory not far away in the Orange Valley.
    Edison used direct current which was limited to around 250 volts. Alternating current was largely developed by George Westinghouse and Nicola Tesla, using transformers to step up the current to a higher voltage for long-distance transmission. The use of AC gradually overtook the Edison DC system.
    In autumn 1888 he patented a form of cinephotography, the kinetoscope, obtaining film-stock from George Eastman. In 1893 he set up the first film studio, which was pivoted so as to catch the sun, with a hinged roof which could be raised. In 1894 kinetoscope parlours with "peep shows" were starting up in cities all over America. Competition came from the Latham Brothers with a screen-projection machine, which Edison answered with his "Vitascope", shown in New York in 1896. This showed pictures with accompanying sound, but there was some difficulty with synchronization. Edison also experimented with captions at this early date.
    In 1880 he filed a patent for a magnetic ore separator, the first of nearly sixty. He bought up deposits of low-grade iron ore which had been developed in the north of New Jersey. The process was a commercial success until the discovery of iron-rich ore in Minnesota rendered it uneconomic and uncompetitive. In 1898 cement rock was discovered in New Village, west of West Orange. Edison bought the land and started cement manufacture, using kilns twice the normal length and using half as much fuel to heat them as the normal type of kiln. In 1893 he met Henry Ford, who was building his second car, at an Edison convention. This started him on the development of a battery for an electric car on which he made over 9,000 experiments. In 1903 he sold his patent for wireless telegraphy "for a song" to Guglielmo Marconi.
    In 1910 Edison designed a prefabricated concrete house. In December 1914 fire destroyed three-quarters of the West Orange plant, but it was at once rebuilt, and with the threat of war Edison started to set up his own plants for making all the chemicals that he had previously been buying from Europe, such as carbolic acid, phenol, benzol, aniline dyes, etc. He was appointed President of the Navy Consulting Board, for whom, he said, he made some forty-five inventions, "but they were pigeonholed, every one of them". Thus did Edison find that the Navy did not take kindly to civilian interference.
    In 1927 he started the Edison Botanic Research Company, founded with similar investment from Ford and Firestone with the object of finding a substitute for overseas-produced rubber. In the first year he tested no fewer than 3,327 possible plants, in the second year, over 1,400, eventually developing a variety of Golden Rod which grew to 14 ft (4.3 m) in height. However, all this effort and money was wasted, due to the discovery of synthetic rubber.
    In October 1929 he was present at Henry Ford's opening of his Dearborn Museum to celebrate the fiftieth anniversary of the incandescent lamp, including a replica of the Menlo Park laboratory. He was awarded the Congressional Gold Medal and was elected to the American Academy of Sciences. He died in 1931 at his home, Glenmont; throughout the USA, lights were dimmed temporarily on the day of his funeral.
    [br]
    Principal Honours and Distinctions
    Member of the American Academy of Sciences. Congressional Gold Medal.
    Further Reading
    M.Josephson, 1951, Edison, Eyre \& Spottiswode.
    R.W.Clark, 1977, Edison, the Man who Made the Future, Macdonald \& Jane.
    IMcN

    Biographical history of technology > Edison, Thomas Alva

  • 10 Stephenson, Robert

    [br]
    b. 16 October 1803 Willington Quay, Northumberland, England
    d. 12 October 1859 London, England
    [br]
    English engineer who built the locomotive Rocket and constructed many important early trunk railways.
    [br]
    Robert Stephenson's father was George Stephenson, who ensured that his son was educated to obtain the theoretical knowledge he lacked himself. In 1821 Robert Stephenson assisted his father in his survey of the Stockton \& Darlington Railway and in 1822 he assisted William James in the first survey of the Liverpool \& Manchester Railway. He then went to Edinburgh University for six months, and the following year Robert Stephenson \& Co. was named after him as Managing Partner when it was formed by himself, his father and others. The firm was to build stationary engines, locomotives and railway rolling stock; in its early years it also built paper-making machinery and did general engineering.
    In 1824, however, Robert Stephenson accepted, perhaps in reaction to an excess of parental control, an invitation by a group of London speculators called the Colombian Mining Association to lead an expedition to South America to use steam power to reopen gold and silver mines. He subsequently visited North America before returning to England in 1827 to rejoin his father as an equal and again take charge of Robert Stephenson \& Co. There he set about altering the design of steam locomotives to improve both their riding and their steam-generating capacity. Lancashire Witch, completed in July 1828, was the first locomotive mounted on steel springs and had twin furnace tubes through the boiler to produce a large heating surface. Later that year Robert Stephenson \& Co. supplied the Stockton \& Darlington Railway with a wagon, mounted for the first time on springs and with outside bearings. It was to be the prototype of the standard British railway wagon. Between April and September 1829 Robert Stephenson built, not without difficulty, a multi-tubular boiler, as suggested by Henry Booth to George Stephenson, and incorporated it into the locomotive Rocket which the three men entered in the Liverpool \& Manchester Railway's Rainhill Trials in October. Rocket, was outstandingly successful and demonstrated that the long-distance steam railway was practicable.
    Robert Stephenson continued to develop the locomotive. Northumbrian, built in 1830, had for the first time, a smokebox at the front of the boiler and also the firebox built integrally with the rear of the boiler. Then in Planet, built later the same year, he adopted a layout for the working parts used earlier by steam road-coach pioneer Goldsworthy Gurney, placing the cylinders, for the first time, in a nearly horizontal position beneath the smokebox, with the connecting rods driving a cranked axle. He had evolved the definitive form for the steam locomotive.
    Also in 1830, Robert Stephenson surveyed the London \& Birmingham Railway, which was authorized by Act of Parliament in 1833. Stephenson became Engineer for construction of the 112-mile (180 km) railway, probably at that date the greatest task ever undertaken in of civil engineering. In this he was greatly assisted by G.P.Bidder, who as a child prodigy had been known as "The Calculating Boy", and the two men were to be associated in many subsequent projects. On the London \& Birmingham Railway there were long and deep cuttings to be excavated and difficult tunnels to be bored, notoriously at Kilsby. The line was opened in 1838.
    In 1837 Stephenson provided facilities for W.F. Cooke to make an experimental electrictelegraph installation at London Euston. The directors of the London \& Birmingham Railway company, however, did not accept his recommendation that they should adopt the electric telegraph and it was left to I.K. Brunel to instigate the first permanent installation, alongside the Great Western Railway. After Cooke formed the Electric Telegraph Company, Stephenson became a shareholder and was Chairman during 1857–8.
    Earlier, in the 1830s, Robert Stephenson assisted his father in advising on railways in Belgium and came to be increasingly in demand as a consultant. In 1840, however, he was almost ruined financially as a result of the collapse of the Stanhope \& Tyne Rail Road; in return for acting as Engineer-in-Chief he had unwisely accepted shares, with unlimited liability, instead of a fee.
    During the late 1840s Stephenson's greatest achievements were the design and construction of four great bridges, as part of railways for which he was responsible. The High Level Bridge over the Tyne at Newcastle and the Royal Border Bridge over the Tweed at Berwick were the links needed to complete the East Coast Route from London to Scotland. For the Chester \& Holyhead Railway to cross the Menai Strait, a bridge with spans as long-as 460 ft (140 m) was needed: Stephenson designed them as wrought-iron tubes of rectangular cross-section, through which the trains would pass, and eventually joined the spans together into a tube 1,511 ft (460 m) long from shore to shore. Extensive testing was done beforehand by shipbuilder William Fairbairn to prove the method, and as a preliminary it was first used for a 400 ft (122 m) span bridge at Conway.
    In 1847 Robert Stephenson was elected MP for Whitby, a position he held until his death, and he was one of the exhibition commissioners for the Great Exhibition of 1851. In the early 1850s he was Engineer-in-Chief for the Norwegian Trunk Railway, the first railway in Norway, and he also built the Alexandria \& Cairo Railway, the first railway in Africa. This included two tubular bridges with the railway running on top of the tubes. The railway was extended to Suez in 1858 and for several years provided a link in the route from Britain to India, until superseded by the Suez Canal, which Stephenson had opposed in Parliament. The greatest of all his tubular bridges was the Victoria Bridge across the River St Lawrence at Montreal: after inspecting the site in 1852 he was appointed Engineer-in-Chief for the bridge, which was 1 1/2 miles (2 km) long and was designed in his London offices. Sadly he, like Brunel, died young from self-imposed overwork, before the bridge was completed in 1859.
    [br]
    Principal Honours and Distinctions
    FRS 1849. President, Institution of Mechanical Engineers 1849. President, Institution of Civil Engineers 1856. Order of St Olaf (Norway). Order of Leopold (Belgium). Like his father, Robert Stephenson refused a knighthood.
    Further Reading
    L.T.C.Rolt, 1960, George and Robert Stephenson, London: Longman (a good modern biography).
    J.C.Jeaffreson, 1864, The Life of Robert Stephenson, London: Longman (the standard nine-teenth-century biography).
    M.R.Bailey, 1979, "Robert Stephenson \& Co. 1823–1829", Transactions of the Newcomen Society 50 (provides details of the early products of that company).
    J.Kieve, 1973, The Electric Telegraph, Newton Abbot: David \& Charles.
    PJGR

    Biographical history of technology > Stephenson, Robert

  • 11 completo

    adj.
    1 complete, entire, integral, uncut.
    2 complete, total, exhaustive, out-and-out.
    3 complete, full-length, all-inclusive, all-round.
    4 complete, concluded, done, finished.
    5 square, hearty.
    pres.indicat.
    1st person singular (yo) present indicative of spanish verb: completar.
    * * *
    1 (terminado) finished, completed
    2 (lleno) full
    \
    al completo full up, filled to capacity
    por completo completely
    * * *
    (f. - completa)
    adj.
    2) full
    * * *
    1. ADJ
    1) (=entero) [dieta] balanced; [colección] complete; [texto, informe] full, complete; [felicidad] complete, total; [panorama] full
    jornada 1), obra 2), b), pensión 3)
    2) (=lleno) full; [hotel] full, fully booked

    completo — [en pensión, hostal] no vacancies; [en taquilla] sold out

    al completo: el tren está al completo — the train is full

    3) (=total) [éxito, fracaso] complete, total

    por completo — [desaparecer, desconocer] completely

    su partido apoyaba por completo la iniciativa — his party fully supported the initiative, his party gave its full support to the initiative

    4) (=terminado)
    5) (=bien hecho)

    este libro es pequeño, pero bastante completo — this book is small, but quite comprehensive

    6) (=polifacético) [actor, deportista] all-round
    2.
    SM Chile hot dog ( with salad)
    * * *
    I
    - ta adjetivo
    1)
    a) ( entero) complete
    b) (total, absoluto) complete, total
    c) ( exhaustivo) < explicación> detailed; <obra/diccionario> comprehensive; <tesis/ensayo> thorough
    d) <deportista/actor> complete, very versatile
    2) ( lleno) full

    completo — ( en hostal) no vacancies; ( en taquilla) sold out

    II
    masculino (Chi) hot dog (with all the trimmings)
    * * *
    = complete, comprehensive, entire, exhaustive, full [fuller -comp., fullest -sup.], full-blown, full-bodied, full-featured, full-fledged, full-length, full-scale, full-service, thorough, total, well-rounded, end to end, supine, enriched, all-round, whole, utter, all-inclusive, fully formed, fully featured, the works!, unmitigaged, fully blown.
    Ex. The main entry is the complete catalogue record of the document.
    Ex. One of the factors to consider in the selection of a data base is whether the data base is comprehensive or not.
    Ex. Plainly such representative sections may not be present in many documents, but sometimes an extract from the results, conclusions or recommendations of a document may serve to identify the key issues covered by the entire document.
    Ex. The enumeration of isolates should be exhaustive or complete for the subject area.
    Ex. Since recall goes up as precision goes down, it is clearly not possible to achieve in general a system which gives full recall at the same time as full precision.
    Ex. Reference transactions can range from the ready-reference, or short-answer question, to the full-blown research inquiry to establish methodology.
    Ex. By adulthood the child's literary consciousness has grown into a full-bodied appreciation of the work of the great imaginative writers.
    Ex. The EPIC service is a full-featured on-line reference system that provides subject access, and keyword and Boolean searching to a variety of databases.
    Ex. Once the functional and informal network seeks to widen its influence, it becomes a full-fledged institution.
    Ex. Plays and music performances put on by staff and children require less arduous preparation than a full-length public performance.
    Ex. Obviously, staff will have to be instructed in the use of the new system, be it word processing or a full-scale circulation system.
    Ex. In other words, they want us to start from scratch and come up with a plan for a full-service center, which might then be used as a model for the other regional centers.
    Ex. Timely and thorough planning is essential.
    Ex. This situation requires a very skilled information worker if total disaster is to be avoided.
    Ex. This has produced the matriarchal system in society on the one hand, and well-rounded libraries organized under the slogan 'Libraries are for wallowing in' on the other.
    Ex. Next morning the heap, now damp right through, was set up on one end of the horse (later called the bank), a bench long enough to take two piles of paper end to end, and about as high as the coffin of the press.
    Ex. 'I was saying that we shouldn't have a supine acceptance for temporary limitations'.
    Ex. Union Catalogues may also decide that they need more enriched records because of specific needs.
    Ex. The finest and most influential of these French italics were the work of Robert Granjon, an artist of the stature of his countryman and near-contemporary Garamont and one of the greatest all-round type designers of any period.
    Ex. One of them will take instructions and data from a whole roomful of girls armed with simple keyboard punches.
    Ex. There is little to be said for this grudging acceptance or utter rejection of pseudonyms.
    Ex. It is not an all-inclusive listing of materials on this topic.
    Ex. The film's supple structure, surprisingly light touch, and bravura performances make it perhaps the most fully formed, half-hearted goof ever.
    Ex. The technology has matured sufficiently that it's now cheap and relatively easy to set up a fully featured repository in quite a short time.
    Ex. Whole cities laid to waste, heroes falling in battle, death of gods, the works!.
    Ex. Only Bush could take a horrible situation and create an unmitigated disaster.
    Ex. This time it's a hairline fracture rather than a fully blown break of a metatarsal, however the result is the same.
    ----
    * alojamiento en régimen de pensión completa = full-board accommodation.
    * a tiempo completo = full-time.
    * base de datos completa = full-provision database.
    * base de datos de texto completo = full text database.
    * catalogación completa = full cataloguing.
    * catálogo de obras completas = back catalogue.
    * curso a tiempo completo = full-time course.
    * de forma completa = in full.
    * de página completa = full-page.
    * de pantalla completa = full-screen.
    * detenerse por completo = come to + a standstill, be at a standstill.
    * dominar por completo = sweep + the board.
    * edición completa = full edition.
    * el + Nombre + más completo = the + Nombre + to end all + Nombre.
    * estar al completo = overbook.
    * fuego + destruir por completo = fire + gut.
    * información de texto completo = full-text information.
    * letra cuya impresión en papel no está completa = broken letter.
    * nombre completo = full name.
    * obras completas = collected works.
    * pagar por completo = pay off.
    * pantalla de información completa = full information display, full information screen.
    * pararse por completo = come to + a standstill, be at a standstill.
    * pensión completa = food and board, bed and board, full board, full-board accommodation.
    * por completo = fully.
    * ser completo = be all inclusive.
    * texto completo = full text.
    * * *
    I
    - ta adjetivo
    1)
    a) ( entero) complete
    b) (total, absoluto) complete, total
    c) ( exhaustivo) < explicación> detailed; <obra/diccionario> comprehensive; <tesis/ensayo> thorough
    d) <deportista/actor> complete, very versatile
    2) ( lleno) full

    completo — ( en hostal) no vacancies; ( en taquilla) sold out

    II
    masculino (Chi) hot dog (with all the trimmings)
    * * *
    = complete, comprehensive, entire, exhaustive, full [fuller -comp., fullest -sup.], full-blown, full-bodied, full-featured, full-fledged, full-length, full-scale, full-service, thorough, total, well-rounded, end to end, supine, enriched, all-round, whole, utter, all-inclusive, fully formed, fully featured, the works!, unmitigaged, fully blown.

    Ex: The main entry is the complete catalogue record of the document.

    Ex: One of the factors to consider in the selection of a data base is whether the data base is comprehensive or not.
    Ex: Plainly such representative sections may not be present in many documents, but sometimes an extract from the results, conclusions or recommendations of a document may serve to identify the key issues covered by the entire document.
    Ex: The enumeration of isolates should be exhaustive or complete for the subject area.
    Ex: Since recall goes up as precision goes down, it is clearly not possible to achieve in general a system which gives full recall at the same time as full precision.
    Ex: Reference transactions can range from the ready-reference, or short-answer question, to the full-blown research inquiry to establish methodology.
    Ex: By adulthood the child's literary consciousness has grown into a full-bodied appreciation of the work of the great imaginative writers.
    Ex: The EPIC service is a full-featured on-line reference system that provides subject access, and keyword and Boolean searching to a variety of databases.
    Ex: Once the functional and informal network seeks to widen its influence, it becomes a full-fledged institution.
    Ex: Plays and music performances put on by staff and children require less arduous preparation than a full-length public performance.
    Ex: Obviously, staff will have to be instructed in the use of the new system, be it word processing or a full-scale circulation system.
    Ex: In other words, they want us to start from scratch and come up with a plan for a full-service center, which might then be used as a model for the other regional centers.
    Ex: Timely and thorough planning is essential.
    Ex: This situation requires a very skilled information worker if total disaster is to be avoided.
    Ex: This has produced the matriarchal system in society on the one hand, and well-rounded libraries organized under the slogan 'Libraries are for wallowing in' on the other.
    Ex: Next morning the heap, now damp right through, was set up on one end of the horse (later called the bank), a bench long enough to take two piles of paper end to end, and about as high as the coffin of the press.
    Ex: 'I was saying that we shouldn't have a supine acceptance for temporary limitations'.
    Ex: Union Catalogues may also decide that they need more enriched records because of specific needs.
    Ex: The finest and most influential of these French italics were the work of Robert Granjon, an artist of the stature of his countryman and near-contemporary Garamont and one of the greatest all-round type designers of any period.
    Ex: One of them will take instructions and data from a whole roomful of girls armed with simple keyboard punches.
    Ex: There is little to be said for this grudging acceptance or utter rejection of pseudonyms.
    Ex: It is not an all-inclusive listing of materials on this topic.
    Ex: The film's supple structure, surprisingly light touch, and bravura performances make it perhaps the most fully formed, half-hearted goof ever.
    Ex: The technology has matured sufficiently that it's now cheap and relatively easy to set up a fully featured repository in quite a short time.
    Ex: Whole cities laid to waste, heroes falling in battle, death of gods, the works!.
    Ex: Only Bush could take a horrible situation and create an unmitigated disaster.
    Ex: This time it's a hairline fracture rather than a fully blown break of a metatarsal, however the result is the same.
    * alojamiento en régimen de pensión completa = full-board accommodation.
    * a tiempo completo = full-time.
    * base de datos completa = full-provision database.
    * base de datos de texto completo = full text database.
    * catalogación completa = full cataloguing.
    * catálogo de obras completas = back catalogue.
    * curso a tiempo completo = full-time course.
    * de forma completa = in full.
    * de página completa = full-page.
    * de pantalla completa = full-screen.
    * detenerse por completo = come to + a standstill, be at a standstill.
    * dominar por completo = sweep + the board.
    * edición completa = full edition.
    * el + Nombre + más completo = the + Nombre + to end all + Nombre.
    * estar al completo = overbook.
    * fuego + destruir por completo = fire + gut.
    * información de texto completo = full-text information.
    * letra cuya impresión en papel no está completa = broken letter.
    * nombre completo = full name.
    * obras completas = collected works.
    * pagar por completo = pay off.
    * pantalla de información completa = full information display, full information screen.
    * pararse por completo = come to + a standstill, be at a standstill.
    * pensión completa = food and board, bed and board, full board, full-board accommodation.
    * por completo = fully.
    * ser completo = be all inclusive.
    * texto completo = full text.

    * * *
    completo1 -ta
    A
    esta baraja no está completa this deck isn't complete, there's a card/there are some cards missing from this deck
    las obras completas de Neruda the complete works of Neruda
    la serie completa the whole series
    la gama más completa the fullest o most complete range
    2 (total, absoluto) complete, total
    no hay felicidad completa there's no such thing as complete happiness
    por completo completely
    lo olvidé por completo I completely forgot about it, I forgot all about it
    3
    (exhaustivo): una explicación muy completa a very full o detailed explanation
    uno de los diccionarios más completos one of the most comprehensive dictionaries
    un trabajo muy completo a very thorough piece of work
    4 ‹deportista/actor› complete, very versatile
    B (lleno) full
    el tren iba completo the train was full
    el hotel está completo the hotel is full o fully booked
    [ S ] completo (en un hostal) no vacancies; (en una taquilla) sold out
    ( Chi)
    * * *

     

    Del verbo completar: ( conjugate completar)

    completo es:

    1ª persona singular (yo) presente indicativo

    completó es:

    3ª persona singular (él/ella/usted) pretérito indicativo

    Multiple Entries:
    completar    
    completo
    completar ( conjugate completar) verbo transitivo

    b) (AmL) ‹cuestionario/impreso› to complete, fill out o in

    completo
    ◊ -ta adjetivo

    1


    b) (total, absoluto) complete, total;



    ‹obra/diccionario› comprehensive;
    ‹tesis/ensayo› thorough
    d) ‹deportista/actor› complete, very versatile

    2 ( lleno) ‹vagón/hotel› full;
    ( on signs) completo ( en hostal) no vacancies;
    ( en taquilla) sold out
    completar verbo transitivo to complete
    completo,-a adjetivo
    1 (entero, total) complete
    2 (lleno) full
    3 (versátil) versatile, complete
    4 (exhaustivo) comprehensive
    ♦ Locuciones: al completo, full up o to capacity
    por completo, completely
    ' completo' also found in these entries:
    Spanish:
    absoluta
    - absoluto
    - acabada
    - acabado
    - calcinar
    - completa
    - entera
    - entero
    - íntegra
    - íntegro
    - parcial
    - plena
    - pleno
    - radical
    - tiempo
    - toda
    - todo
    - alimento
    - integral
    - trabajar
    - trabajo
    English:
    book up
    - clam up
    - clean
    - collected
    - complete
    - completely
    - dedication
    - entirely
    - envelop
    - forge
    - full
    - full-time
    - groundwork
    - outright
    - slip
    - stranglehold
    - strength
    - utter
    - all
    - book
    - capacity
    - comprehensive
    - reversal
    - strict
    - uncut
    * * *
    completo, -a
    ♦ adj
    1. [entero] complete;
    nombre completo full name;
    las obras completas de un autor the complete works of an author;
    vino toda la familia al completo the entire family came
    2. [lleno] full;
    [en cartel] [hotel] no vacancies; [aparcamiento] full; [en taquilla] sold out
    el vagón está o [m5] va completo the Br carriage o US car is full;
    todos los hoteles de la ciudad están al completo all the hotels in town are full
    3. [perfecto] complete;
    un deportista muy completo an all-round athlete o Br sportsman;
    un espectáculo muy completo a very well-rounded production
    4. [rotundo] complete;
    un completo silencio complete o total silence;
    fue un completo éxito/fracaso it was a complete success/a complete o total failure;
    es un completo caballero he's an absolute o the complete gentleman;
    es un completo mentiroso he's a complete liar
    5. CSur [café, té, chocolate] = served with toast, butter, cakes and pastries
    ♦ nm
    Chile = hot dog with all the trimmings
    ♦ por completo loc adv
    completely;
    han desaparecido por completo they have completely disappeared;
    se dedica por completo a la música she devotes herself full-time to music
    * * *
    adj complete; autobús, teatro full;
    por completo completely;
    al completo whole, entire
    * * *
    completo, -ta adj
    1) : complete
    2) : perfect, absolute
    3) : full, detailed
    * * *
    1. (entero) complete
    2. (lleno) full

    Spanish-English dictionary > completo

  • 12 mayor

    adj.
    1 bigger.
    2 grown-up (adulto).
    cuando sea mayor when I grow up
    ser mayor de edad to be an adult
    3 older (no joven).
    una mujer mayor an older woman
    ser muy mayor to be very old
    4 main (principal) (plaza, calle, palo).
    5 major, main, chief, leading.
    f. & m.
    1 major (military).
    2 head.
    * * *
    1 (comparativo) bigger, greater, larger; (persona) older; (hermanos, hijos) elder, older
    2 (superlativo) biggest, greatest, largest; (persona) oldest; (hermanos, hijos) eldest, oldest
    3 (de edad) mature, elderly
    4 (adulto) grown-up
    ■ ya eres mayor, así que defiéndete tú solo you are old enough to stand up for yourself now
    6 MÚSICA major
    1 MILITAR major
    1 (adultos) grown-ups, adults; (antepasados) ancestors
    ► nombre masculino,nombre femenino el/la mayor
    1 (entre varios) the oldest; (entre hermanos, hijos) the eldest, the oldest
    \
    al por mayor wholesale
    hacerse mayor to grow up
    no ir/pasar a mayores not to come to anything, not to be anything serious
    ser mayor de edad to be of age
    calle mayor high street, US main street
    * * *
    1. noun mf. 2. adj.
    1) main, major
    2) bigger, biggest
    3) larger, largest
    4) greater, greatest
    5) elder, oldest
    •
    * * *
    1. ADJ
    1) [comparativo]
    a) (=más grande)

    un mayor número de visitantes — a larger o greater number of visitors, more visitors

    son temas de mayor importancia — they are more important issues, they are issues of greater importance

    • la mayor parte de los ciudadanos — most citizens

    • ser mayor que algo, mi casa es mayor que la suya — my house is bigger o larger than his

    b) (=de más edad) older

    • mayor que algn — older than sb

    vivió con un hombre muchos años mayor que ella — she lived with a man many years her senior, she lived with a man who was several years older than her

    2) [superlativo]
    a) (=más grande)

    esta es la mayor iglesia del mundo — this is the biggest o largest church in the world

    su mayor problema — his biggest o greatest problem

    su mayor enemigo — his biggest o greatest enemy

    b) (=de más edad) oldest

    mi hijo (el) mayor — my oldest o eldest son

    3) (=principal) [plaza, mástil] main; [altar, misa] high

    calle mayor — high street, main street (EEUU)

    colegio 1), libro 2)
    4) (=adulto) grown-up, adult

    las personas mayores — grown-ups, adults

    • ser mayor de edad — to be of age

    • hacerse mayor — to grow up

    5) (=de edad avanzada) old, elderly
    6) (=jefe) head antes de s
    7) (Mús) major
    2. SMF
    1) (=adulto) grown-up, adult

    mayor de edad — adult, person who is legally of age

    2) (=anciano)

    ¡más respeto con los mayores! — be more respectful to your elders (and betters)!

    3) LAm (Mil) major
    3.
    SM

    • al por mayor — wholesale

    repartir golpes al por mayor — to throw punches left, right and centre

    * * *
    I
    1)

    a la mayor brevedad posible — (Corresp) as soon as possible o (frml) at your earliest convenience

    la mayor parte de los estudiantes — most students, the majority of students

    2) ( en edad)
    a) ( comparativo) older

    ¿tienes hermanos mayores? — do you have any older o elder brothers or sisters?

    mi hijo mayor — my eldest o oldest son

    c) ( anciano) elderly
    d) ( adulto)

    ser mayor de edad — (Der) to be of age

    no pasar or llegar a mayores: tuvo un novio, pero el asunto no pasó a mayores she had a boyfriend, but it didn't come to anything; afortunadamente la cosa no llegó a mayores — fortunately it was nothing serious

    4) ( en nombres) ( principal) main

    Calle Mayor — Main Street ( in US), High Street ( in UK)

    5) (Mús) major
    6) (Com)
    II
    masculino y femenino
    1) ( adulto) adult, grown-up (colloq)

    mis/tus mayores — my/your elders

    2) mayor masculino (AmL) (Mil) major
    * * *
    I
    1)

    a la mayor brevedad posible — (Corresp) as soon as possible o (frml) at your earliest convenience

    la mayor parte de los estudiantes — most students, the majority of students

    2) ( en edad)
    a) ( comparativo) older

    ¿tienes hermanos mayores? — do you have any older o elder brothers or sisters?

    mi hijo mayor — my eldest o oldest son

    c) ( anciano) elderly
    d) ( adulto)

    ser mayor de edad — (Der) to be of age

    no pasar or llegar a mayores: tuvo un novio, pero el asunto no pasó a mayores she had a boyfriend, but it didn't come to anything; afortunadamente la cosa no llegó a mayores — fortunately it was nothing serious

    4) ( en nombres) ( principal) main

    Calle Mayor — Main Street ( in US), High Street ( in UK)

    5) (Mús) major
    6) (Com)
    II
    masculino y femenino
    1) ( adulto) adult, grown-up (colloq)

    mis/tus mayores — my/your elders

    2) mayor masculino (AmL) (Mil) major
    * * *
    mayor1
    1 = senior, elderly, eldest.

    Ex: If we instruct it to ponder this question more leisurely, it will quickly try the user's patience with digressions concerning the less illustrious senior MOZART, LEOPOLD.

    Ex: To the general public 'the female librarian is still angular, elderly, acidulous and terrifying', to use Geoffrey Langley's words, 'and a male librarian is impossible under any hypothesis'.
    Ex: When her eldest son developed a glaucoma she became aware of the lack of suitable books.
    * apto para mayores de 13 años o menores acompañados = PG-13.
    * asistencia social para los mayores = elderly care, elder care [eldercare].
    * centro de día para mayores = day centre for the elderly.
    * cuidado de los mayores = kinkeeping.
    * cuidados de los mayores = elderly care, elder care [eldercare].
    * cuidados para personas mayores = elderly care, elder care [eldercare].
    * familiar que cuida de los mayores = kinkeeper.
    * gente mayor = elderly people.
    * hombre mayor = elderly man.
    * mayor de 25 años = mature adult.
    * mayores, los = elderly, the.
    * muy mayor = over the hill.
    * pesonas mayores = elderly people.
    * ser mayor = be older.

    mayor2
    2 = largest, greater, heightened, increased.

    Ex: Together they constitute the world's largest data base.

    Ex: The likelihood of data transmission errors is greater, however, and it is not recommended for constant use.
    Ex: The heightened level of community awareness has led some local authorities to take the initiative and to become information disseminators in their own right.
    Ex: Information networks are critical tools to ensure the exchange, transfer, and use of information which will facilitate the increased quality and quantity of agricultural production.
    * admitir un número de reservas mayor a las plazas existentes = overbook.
    * alcanzar mayores cotas = rise to + greater heights.
    * al por mayor = in bulk.
    * cada vez en mayor grado = ever-increasing.
    * cada vez mayor = escalating, ever-growing, ever-increasing, expanded, growing, increasing, mounting, rising, spiralling [spiraling, -USA], deepening, rapidly growing, expanding, constantly rising, swelling, ever larger [ever-larger], galloping, steadily rising, steadily growing, mushrooming, ever greater, rapidly expanding, ever-widening, burgeoning, heightening.
    * cada vez mucho mayor = fast-increasing, exploding.
    * calle mayor, la = main street, the.
    * causa de fuerza mayor = act of God.
    * colegio mayor = residence hall, dormitory [dorm, -abbr.], student residence.
    * comprar al por mayor = buy + in bulk.
    * con el mayor cuidado = with utmost care.
    * con el mayor secreto = a veil of secrecy.
    * con mayor detalle = in greater detail.
    * con mayor profundidad = in most detail, in more detail.
    * con un mayor nivel educativo = better educated [better-educated].
    * dar mayor importancia a = give + pride of place to.
    * demasiado mayor en relación con Algo = overage.
    * demasiado mayor para su curso = overage for grade.
    * de mayor edad = senior.
    * de mayor o menor importancia = great and small.
    * desajuste cada vez mayor entre... y = widening of the gap beween.... and, widening gap between... and.
    * descuento por compra al por mayor = bulk deal, bulk rate, bulk rate discount.
    * diferencia cada vez mayor entre... y = widening of the gap beween.... and, widening gap between... and.
    * distanciamiento cada vez mayor entre... y, = widening gap between... and, widening of the gap beween.... and.
    * durante la mayor parte de = for much of.
    * durante la mayor parte del año = for the best part of the year.
    * en caso de fuerza mayor = in the event of circumstances beyond + Posesivo + control.
    * en el mayor secreto = a veil of secrecy.
    * en la mayor parte de = in the majority of.
    * en mayor grado = to a greater degree, a fortiori, to a greater extent, to a larger degree, to a larger extent.
    * en mayor medida = to a greater extent, to a greater degree, a fortiori, to a larger degree, to a larger extent.
    * en mayor o menor grado = to a greater or lesser degree.
    * en mayor o menor medida = to a greater or lesser extent.
    * en su mayor parte = largely, mostly, for the most part.
    * en un número cada vez mayor = in increasing numbers.
    * fuerza mayor = force majeure.
    * hora de mayor demanda = peak time.
    * importancia cada vez mayor = growing importance, growing significance.
    * interés cada vez mayor = growing interest.
    * jefe del estado mayor = Chief of Staff.
    * la mayor parte de = the majority of, the main bulk of, the lion's share of.
    * la mayor parte de las veces = more often than not.
    * la proporción mayor de = the lion's share of.
    * libro de mayor venta = bestseller [best seller/best-seller].
    * material de tamaño mayor de lo normal = outsize material.
    * mayor + Nombre = longer + Nombre.
    * mayor rendimiento = efficiencies of scale.
    * mucho mayor = far greater, far larger, very much greater.
    * obtener el mayor rendimiento posible = maximise + opportunities.
    * para mayor información sobre = for details of.
    * para mayor información véase + Nombre = see + Nombre + for further details.
    * para mayor inri = to cap it all (off), on top of everything else, on top of everything else, but to make things worse, but to make matters worse.
    * período de mayor demanda = peak time.
    * precio al por mayor = block rate, wholesale price, bulk rate.
    * precio especial por compra al por mayor = bulk deal.
    * preocupación cada vez mayor (por) = growing concern (about).
    * problema cada vez mayor = growing problem.
    * problemas cada vez mayores = mounting problems.
    * programación televisiva de mayor audiencia = prime time television.
    * programa de mayor audiencia = prime time programme, prime time show.
    * sacar el mayor partido al dinero de uno = get + the most for + Posesivo + money.
    * sacar mayor partido a = squeeze + more life out of.
    * sacar mayor provecho = stretch + further.
    * separación cada vez mayor entre... y = widening gap between... and.
    * ser el que con mayor frecuencia = be (the) most likely to.
    * símbolo de mayor-que (>) = greater-than sign (>), greater-than symbol (>), right angled bracket (>).
    * suministro al por mayor = bulk supply.
    * tonto de marca mayor = prize idiot.
    * una mayor variedad de = a wider canvas of.
    * una necesidad cada vez mayor = a growing need.
    * un conjunto cada vez mayor de = a growing body of.
    * un grupo cada vez mayor de = a growing body of.
    * un número cada vez mayor = growing numbers.
    * un número cada vez mayor de = a growing number of, a growing body of.
    * vender al por mayor = sell + in bulk, wholesale.
    * venta al por mayor = wholesaling, wholesale.

    * * *
    A
    pueden volar a mayor altura they can fly at a greater height
    estas tablas le dan mayor amplitud a la falda these pleats make the skirt fuller
    un material de mayor flexibilidad a more flexible material
    en otros países el índice de mortalidad infantil es aún mayor in other countries the infant mortality rate is even higher
    esto podría reportar beneficios aún mayores this could bring even greater benefits
    mayor QUE algo:
    una superficie cuatro veces mayor que la de nuestro país a surface area four times greater than that of our country
    cualquier número mayor que 40 any number above 40 o greater than 40 o higher than 40
    X > Z ( Mat) (read as: equis es mayor que zeta) X > Z (léase: x is greater than z)
    el mayor país de América Latina the biggest country in Latin America
    el mayor número de accidentes de Europa the greatest o highest number of accidents in Europe
    ésa ha sido siempre su mayor preocupación that has always been her greatest worry
    le ruego lo envíe a la mayor brevedad posible ( Corresp) please send it as soon as possible o ( frml) at your earliest convenience
    la mayor parte de los argentinos most Argentinians, the majority of Argentinians
    ¿tienes hermanos mayores? do you have any older o elder brothers or sisters?
    mayor QUE algn older THAN sb
    soy dos meses mayor que tú I am two months older than you
    2
    (superlativo): ¿quién de los dos es el mayor? who is the older o elder of the two?
    éste es mi hijo mayor this is my eldest o oldest son
    el mayor de todos los residentes the oldest of all the residents
    3 (viejo) elderly
    ya es muy mayor y no puede valerse sola she's very old o ( colloq) she's getting on and she can't manage on her own
    4
    (adulto): no se les habla así a las personas mayores you shouldn't talk to adults o grown-ups like that
    cuando sea mayor quiero ser bombero when I grow up I want to be a fireman
    vamos, que ya eres mayorcito para estar haciendo esas cosas come on, you're a bit old to be doing things like that
    cuando sea mayor de edad ( Der) when he reaches the age of majority
    soy mayor de edad y haré lo que quiera I'm over 18 ( o 21 etc) and I'll do as I please
    (grande): no creo que esto requiera mayores explicaciones I don't think this needs much in the way of explanation
    no tengo mayor interés en el tema I'm not particularly interested in o I don't have any great interest in the subject
    la noticia no me produjo mayor inquietud the news did not worry me particularly o unduly
    se llevó a cabo sin mayores contratiempos it was carried out without any serious o major hitches
    no pasar or llegar a mayores: tuvo un pretendiente, pero la cosa no pasó a mayores she had a boyfriend, but it didn't come to anything o but nothing came of it
    hubo una pelea pero no llegó a mayores there was a fight but it was nothing serious
    (principal): Calle Mayor Main Street ( in US), High Street ( in UK)
    E ( Mús) major
    F ( Com):
    (al) por mayor wholesale
    [ S ] venta sólo (al) por mayor wholesale only
    los compran (al) por mayor they buy them wholesale
    hubo problemas (al) por mayor there were innumerable problems
    A
    1
    (adulto): no te metas en las conversaciones de los mayores don't interrupt when the adults o grown-ups are talking
    cada niño debe ir acompañado de un mayor each child must be accompanied by an adult
    mis/tus mayores my/your elders
    Compuesto:
    masculine and feminine person who is legally of age o who has reached the age of majority
    B
    mayor masculine ( AmL) ( Mil) major
    * * *

     

    mayor adjetivo
    1

    ◊ grande) ‹número/porcentaje› greater, higher;


    ‹ beneficio› greater;

    a mayor escala on a larger scale;
    un número mayor que 40 a number greater than 40

    ◊ grande): el mayor número de accidentes the greatest o highest number of accidents;

    su mayor preocupación her greatest o biggest worry;
    a la mayor brevedad posible as soon as possible;
    la mayor parte de los estudiantes most students, the majority of students
    2 ( en edad)

    mayor que algn older than sb

    ◊ es la mayor de las dos she is the older o elder of the two;

    mi hijo mayor my eldest o oldest son

    d) ( adulto):


    cuando sea mayor when I grow up;
    ser mayor de edad (Der) to be of age;
    soy mayor de edad y haré lo que quiera I'm over 18 (o 21 etc) and I'll do as I please
    3 ( en nombres) ( principal) main;

    4 (Mús) major
    5 (Com):

    ■ sustantivo masculino y femenino ( adulto) adult, grown-up (colloq);

    mis/tus mayores my/your elders;
    mayor de edad person who is legally of age
    mayor
    I adjetivo
    1 (comparativo de tamaño) larger, bigger: necesitas una talla mayor, you need a larger size
    (superlativo) largest, biggest: ésa es la mayor, that is the biggest one
    2 (comparativo de grado) greater: su capacidad es mayor que la mía, his capacity is greater than mine
    la ciudad no tiene mayor atractivo, the town isn't particularly appealing
    (superlativo) greatest: ésa es la mayor tontería que he oído nunca, that is the most absurd thing I've ever heard
    3 (comparativo de edad) older: es mayor que tu madre, she is older than your mother
    (superlativo) oldest
    el mayor de los tres, the oldest one 4 está muy mayor, (crecido, maduro) he's quite grown-up
    (anciano) he looks old
    ser mayor de edad, to be of age
    (maduro) old: es un hombre mayor, he's an old man
    eres mayor para entenderlo, you are old enough to understand it
    5 (principal) major, main: tu mayor responsabilidad es su educación, the thing that's most important to you is her education; la calle mayor, the main street
    6 Mús major
    7 Com al por mayor, wholesale
    II sustantivo masculino
    1 Mil major 2 mayores, (adultos) grownups, adults
    (ancianos) elders
    ♦ Locuciones: al por mayor, wholesale
    ir/pasar a mayores, to become serious: discutió con su marido, pero el asunto no pasó a mayores, she had an argument with her husband but they soon forgot about it

    ' mayor' also found in these entries:
    Spanish:
    abundar
    - adicta
    - adicto
    - afán
    - alcalde
    - alcaldía
    - almacén
    - amable
    - brevedad
    - burgomaestre
    - calle
    - caza
    - colegio
    - confluencia
    - desarrollar
    - edad
    - engrandecer
    - escaparate
    - estado
    - Excemo.
    - Excmo.
    - fuerza
    - gruesa
    - grueso
    - hacer
    - hacerse
    - inri
    - obra
    - osa
    - palo
    - persona
    - plana
    - polemizar
    - predilección
    - re
    - safari
    - salir
    - sol
    - teniente
    - vender
    - venta
    - abuelo
    - ama
    - anhelo
    - atractivo
    - audiencia
    - cazar
    - ciudad
    - compás
    - de
    English:
    act
    - address
    - adult
    - big
    - bomb
    - bulk
    - capacity
    - cash-and-carry
    - claw back
    - densely
    - dipper
    - dormitory
    - elaborate
    - elder
    - eldest
    - few
    - frisky
    - grow up
    - growing
    - high street
    - hill
    - inquest
    - lion
    - little
    - main
    - major
    - mayor
    - mostly
    - much
    - nominee
    - often
    - old
    - outflow
    - outweigh
    - over
    - part
    - perpendicular
    - residence
    - senior
    - sergeant major
    - spur
    - staff
    - trade price
    - utmost
    - wholesale
    - wholesale trade
    - wholesaler
    - worship
    - abject
    - cash
    * * *
    ♦ adj
    1. [comparativo] [en tamaño] bigger ( que than); [en edad] older ( que than); [en importancia] greater ( que than); [en número] higher ( que than);
    este puente es mayor que el otro this bridge is bigger than the other one;
    mi hermana mayor my older sister;
    es ocho años mayor que yo she's eight years older than me;
    un mayor número de víctimas a higher number of victims;
    una mayor tasa de inflación a higher rate of inflation;
    en mayor o menor grado to a greater or lesser extent;
    no creo que tenga mayor interés I don't think it's particularly interesting;
    no te preocupes, no tiene mayor importancia don't worry, it's not (all) that important;
    apartamentos mayores de 100 metros cuadrados Br flats o US apartments of over 100 square metres;
    subsidios para parados mayores de cuarenta y cinco años benefits for unemployed people (of) over forty-five;
    la mayor parte de most of, the majority of;
    la mayor parte de los británicos piensa que… most British people o the majority of British people think that…;
    Mat
    mayor que greater than
    2. [superlativo]
    el/la mayor… [en tamaño] the biggest…;
    [en edad] the oldest…; [en importancia] the greatest…; [en número] the highest…;
    la mayor de las islas the biggest island, the biggest of the islands;
    la mayor crisis que se recuerda the biggest crisis in living memory;
    el mayor de todos nosotros/de la clase the oldest of all of us/in the class;
    el mayor de los dos hermanos the older of the two brothers;
    vive en la mayor de las pobrezas he lives in the most abject poverty
    3. [más] further, more;
    para mayor información solicite nuestro catálogo for further o more details, send for our catalogue
    4. [adulto] grown-up;
    cuando sea mayor when I grow up;
    hacerse mayor to grow up;
    ser mayor de edad to be an adult
    5. [no joven] older;
    [anciano] elderly;
    una mujer ya mayor an older woman;
    ser muy mayor to be very old;
    hay que escuchar a las personas mayores you should listen to older people;
    la gente mayor, las personas mayores [los ancianos] the elderly
    6. [principal] major, main;
    la plaza mayor the main square;
    la calle mayor the main street;
    el palo mayor the main mast
    7. Mús major;
    en do mayor in C major
    8. Com
    al por mayor wholesale;
    ♦ nmf
    el/la mayor [hijo, hermano] the eldest;
    mayores [adultos] grown-ups;
    [antepasados] ancestors, forefathers;
    es una película/revista para mayores it's an adult movie o Br film/magazine;
    respeta a tus mayores you should respect your elders;
    la cosa no llegó o [m5] pasó a mayores the matter didn't go any further
    ♦ nm
    Mil major
    * * *
    I adj
    1 comp: en tamaño larger, bigger; en edad older; en importancia greater;
    mayor que greater than, larger than;
    ser mayor de edad be an adult;
    ser (muy) mayor be (very) elderly;
    mayor que older than
    2 sup
    :
    el mayor en edad the oldest o eldest; en tamaño the largest o
    biggest; en importancia the greatest;
    los mayores the adults;
    la mayor parte the majority
    3 MÚS tono, modo
    major;
    do mayor MÚS C major
    4 COM
    :
    al por mayor wholesale
    II m MIL major
    :
    ir o
    pasar a mayores get serious
    * * *
    mayor adj
    1) (comparative of grande) : bigger, larger, greater, elder, older
    2) (superlative of grande) : biggest, largest, greatest, eldest, oldest
    3) : grown-up, mature
    4) : main, major
    5)
    mayor de edad : of (legal) age
    6)
    por mayor : wholesale
    mayor nmf
    1) : major (in the military)
    2) : adult
    * * *
    mayor1 adj
    2. (más grande) bigger
    4. (anciano) old / elderly
    5. (adulto) grown up
    6. (principal) main
    mayor2 n
    ¿cuántos años tiene el mayor? how old is the oldest?
    2. (adulto) grown up
    de mayor when I grow up / when you grow up etc.
    hacerse mayor to grow up [pt. grew; pp. grown]

    Spanish-English dictionary > mayor

  • 13 DRAGA

    * * *
    I)
    (dreg; dró, drógum; dreginn), v.
    1) to draw, drag, pull;
    draga heim viðinn, to drag the logs home;
    draga árar, to pull the oars;
    absol., drógu þeir skjótt eptir, they soon pulled up to them;
    draga boga, to draw the bow;
    draga segl, to hoist sails (= draga upp segl);
    draga fisk, to catch, pull up fish with a line;
    draga kvernstein, to turn the millstone, to grind;
    2) to draw, inhale (draga úþefjan með nösum);
    draga nasir af e-u, to smell a thing;
    draga öndina, to breathe, live;
    3) to procure, earn, gain (þegar hann hafði fé dregit sem hann vildi);
    draga e-m e-t, to procure (or get) one a thing (eigi sögðust þeir vita, at hann drœgi Haraldi ríki);
    4) to employ as a measure (draga kvarða við viðmál);
    5) to prolong protract (dvalir þessar drógu tímann);
    6) to delay, put off, defer;
    vil ek þessi svör ekki láta draga fyrir mér lengi, I will not wait long for these answers;
    hann dró um þat engan hlut, he made no subterfuge;
    7) to delineate, draw a picture (var dregit á skjöldinn leo með gulli);
    í þann tíma sem hann dregr klæðaföllin (the folds);
    8) to trim or line garments (treyjan var dregin útan ok innan við rauða silki);
    with dat., hjálmr hans var dreginn leiri (overlaid with clay), er áðr var (dreginn) gulli;
    9) intrans to move, draw;
    drógu þeir þeim svá nær (came so near to them), at;
    10) with preps.:
    draga föt, skóklædi af e-m, to pull off one’s clothes, shoes;
    draga hring af hendi sér, to take off a ring from one’s hand;
    dró hann þá grunninu, he pulled them off the shallow;
    draga e-t af e-u, to draw, derive from a source;
    draga e-t af, to take off (Þ. hafði látit af draga brúna);
    draga e-t af við e-n, to keep back, withhold, from one;
    man héðan af eigi af dregit við oss, henceforth we shall no be neglected, stinted;
    Egill dró at sér skipit, E. pulled the ship close up to himself;
    draga vél at e-m, to draw wiles around one;
    draga spott, skaup, at e-u, to hold a thing up to ridicule;
    draga at lið, föng, to collect troops, stores;
    dró at honum sóttin, the illness drew closer to him, he grew worse;
    impers., dró at mætti hans, dró at um matt hans, his strength declined (fell off);
    til þess er dró at degi, till the day drew near;
    þá er dregr at jólum, when Yule drew near;
    dró at því (the time drew near). at hann væri banvænn;
    tók þá at draga fast at heyjum hans, his stock of hay was rapidly diminishing;
    svá dregr at mér af elli, svengd, þorsta, I am so overcome by old age, hunger, thirst;
    nú þykki mér sem fast dragi at þér, that thou art sinking fast;
    draga hring á hönd sér, to put a ring on one’s hand;
    draga (grun) á e-t, to suspect;
    draga á vetr, to rear through the winter (Hrafnkell dró á vetr kálf ok kið);
    impers., dregr á tunglit, the moon is obscured (= dregr myrkr á tunglit);
    dimmu þykkir draga á ráðit Odds, it looks as if a cloud was drawing over Odds’ affairs;
    dregr á gleði biskups, the bishop’s gladness was obscured;
    draga eptir e-m, to gain on one (Þórarinn sótti ákaft róðrinn ok hans menn, ok drógu skjótt eptir þeim Steinólfi ok Kjallaki);
    draga eptir e-m um e-t, to approach one, to be nearly equal to one, in a thing;
    um margar íþróttir (in many accomplishments) dró hann fast eptir Ólafi konungi;
    draga e-t fram, to produce, bring forward (draga fram athugasamlig dœmi); to further, promote (draga fram hlut e-s);
    draga fram kaupeyri sinn, to make money;
    draga fram skip, to launch a ship;
    impers., dregr frá, (cloud darkness) is drawn off;
    hratt stundum fyrir, en stundum dró frá, (clouds) drew sometimes over, sometimes off;
    dregr fyrir sól, tungl, the sun, moon is obscured by clouds or eclipse (tunglskin var ljóst, en stundum dró fyrir);
    ok er í tók at draga skúrirnar, when showers began to gather;
    draga e-ð saman, to collect, gather (draga lið, her, skip saman);
    impers., saman dró kaupmála með þeim, they struck a bargain;
    saman dró hugi þeirra, their hearts were drawn together;
    dregr þá saman or dregr saman með þeim, the distance between them grows less;
    draga e-t í sundr, to draw asunder, disjoin (vil ek eigi draga í sundr sættir yðrar);
    impers., dregr þá í sundr or dregr í sundr með þeim, the distance between them increases;
    draga e-n til e-s, to move, prompt, induce;
    engi ofkæti dregr mik til þessarar ferðar, it is not from wantonness that I undertake this journey;
    slíkt dregr hann til vinsældar, this furthers his popularity;
    ef hann drógi ekki til, if he was not concerned;
    draga e-t til dœmis um e-t, to adduce as a proof of;
    hann hét at draga allt til sætta (to do everything in his power for reconciliation) með þeim Skota konungi;
    impers., nema til verra dragi, unless matters turn out for the worse;
    with dat., þat samband þeirra, er þeim dregr báðum til bana, which will prove fatal to both of them;
    at hér mundi til mikillar úgiptu draga um kaup þessi, that much mischief would arise from this bargain;
    dró þá enn til sundrþykkju með þeim Svíum, the old feud with the Swedes began all over again;
    svá er þat, segir R., ef ekki dregr til, unless some unforesceen thing happens;
    draga e-t undan e-m, to seek to deprive one of a thing (þeir hafa bundizt í því at draga bœndr undan þér);
    draga e-t undan, to delay (drógu Skotar undan sættina);
    hví dregr þú undan at bjóða mér til þín? why dost thou put off inviting me to come?;
    draga rót undan (tölu), to extract the root;
    draga undan e-m, to escape from one (nú lægir seglin þeirra ok draga þeir undan oss);
    impers., hann (acc.) dró undan sem nauðuligast, he had a narrow escape;
    draga e-t undir sik, to apropriate or take fraudulently to oneself (hafði dregit undir sik finnskattinn);
    impers., dró yðr (acc.) undir hrakningina, en oss (acc.) undan, you came in for hard uasge but we escaped;
    draga upp skip, to drag a ship ashore;
    draga upp segl, to hoist a sail (sails);
    impers., þoku dregr upp, fog is coming on;
    11) refl., dragast.
    f. only in pl. ‘drögur’,
    2) metric term, repetition, anadiplosis (when a stanza begins with the last word of the preceding one).
    * * *
    pret. dró, pl. drógu; part. dreginn; pres. dreg: pret. subj. drægi: [Lat. trahere; Ulf. dragan, but only once or twice, = επισωρεύειν in 2 Tim. iv. 3; Hel. dragan = portare, ferre (freq.); A. S. dragan; Germ. tragen; the Engl. distinguishes between to drag and draw, whence the derived words to draggle, trail, drawl; Swed. draga; the Danes have drage, but nearly obliterated except in the special sense to travel,—otherwise they have trække, formed from the mod. Germ. tragen]:—to draw, drag, carry, pull.
    A. ACT., with acc.
    I. to drag, carry, pull; hann dró þau öll út, Nj. 131; djöfla þá er yðr munu d. til eilífra kvala, 273; d. heim við, to drag the logs home, 53; d. sauði, to pick sheep out of a fold, Bs. i. 646, Eb. 106; d. skip fram, to launch a ship; d. upp, to draw her up, drag her ashore, Grág. ii. 433; dró Þorgils eptir sér fiskinn, Fs. 129; Egill dró at sér skipit, E. pulled the ship close up to himself, Eg. 221, 306; dró hann þá af grunninu, Fms. vii. 264; hann hafði dregit ( pulled) hött síðan yfir hjálm, Eg. 375, cp. Ad. 3; d. föt, skóklæði af e-m, to draw off clothes, shoes; þá var dregin af ( stripped off) hosa líkinu, Fms. viii. 265; dró hann hana á hönd ser, he pulled it on his hand, Eg. 378; d. hring á hönd sér, to put a ring on one’s hand, 306; (hann) tók gullhring, ok dró ( pulled) á blóðrefilinn, id.: phrases, er við ramman reip at d., ’tis to pull a rope against the strong man, i. e. to cope with the mighty, Fms. ii. 107, Nj. 10,—the metaphor from a game; d. árar, to pull the oars, Fms. ii. 180, Grett. 125 A: absol. to pull, ok drógu skjótt eptir, they soon pulled up to them, Gullþ. 24, Krók. 52: metaph., um margar íþróttir dró hann fast eptir Ólafi, in many accomplishments he pressed hard upon Olave, Fms. iii. 17: d. boga, to draw the bow, x. 362, but more freq. benda ( bend) boga: d., or d. upp segl, to hoist the sails, Eg. 93, Fms. ix. 21, x. 349, Orkn. 260: d. fiska, or simply draga (Luke v. 7), to fish with a hook, to pull up fish with a line (hence fisk-dráttr, dráttr, fishing), Fms. iv. 89, Hým. 21, 23, Fs. 129, Landn. 36, Fas. ii. 31: d. drátt, Luke v. 4; d. net, to fish with a drag-net; also absol., draga á (on or in) á ( a river), to drag a river; hence the metaphor, d. langa nót at e-u, = Lat. longae ambages, Nj. 139: d. steina, to grind in a hand-mill, Sl. 58, Gs. 15: d. bust ór nefi e-m, vide bust: d. anda, to draw breath; d. öndina um barkann, id., (andar-dráttr, drawing breath); d. tönn, to draw a tooth.
    2. phrases mostly metaph.; d. seim, prop. to draw wire, metaph. to read or talk with a drawling tone; d. nasir af e-u, to smell a thing, Ísl. ii. 136; d. dám af e-u, to draw flavour from; draga dæmi af e-u, or d. e-t til dæmis, to draw an example from a thing, Stj. 13, cp. Nj. 65; d. þýðu eðr samræði til e-s, to draw towards, feel sympathy for, Sks. 358; d. grun á e-t, to suspect, Sturl.; d. spott, skaup, gys, etc. at e-u, to hold a thing up to ridicule, Bs. i. 647; d. á sik dul ok dramb, to assume the air of…, 655 xi. 3; d. á sik ofbeldi ok dramb, Fms. vii. 20; d. e-n á talar, to deceive one, metaphor from leading into a trap, 2 Cor. xii. 17; d. vél at e-m, to deceive one, draw a person into wiles, Nj. 280, Skv. i. 33; d. á vetr, to get one’s sheep and cattle through the winter; Hrafnkell dró á vetr kálf ok kið hin firstu misseri, Hrafn. 22, cp. Germ. anbinden, and in mod. Icel. usage setja á vetr; d. nafn af e-m, to draw, derive the name from, Eb. 126 (App.) new Ed.; the phrase, (hann skyldi ekki) fleiri ár yfir höfuð d., more years should not pass over his head, he must die, Þórð.
    II. to draw a picture; kross let hann d. í enni á öllum hjálmum með bleiku, Fms. iv. 96; þá dró Tjörvi líkneski þeirra á kamarsvegg, Landn. 247; var dregit á skjöldinn leo með gulli, Ld. 78, Pr. 428; í þann tíma sem hann dregr ( draws) klæða-föllin (the folds), Mar. (Fr.): d. til stafs (mod.), to draw the letters, of children first trying to write; d. fjöðr yfir e-t, a metaph. phrase, to draw a pen over or through, to hide, cloak a thing: gramm. to mark a vowel with a stroke,—a long vowel opp. to a short one is thus called ‘dreginn;’ hljóðstafir hafa tvenna grein, at þeir sé styttir ( short) eða dregnir (drawn, marked with a stroke), ok er því betr dregit yfir þann staf er seint skal at kveða, e. g. ári Ari, ér er-, mínu minni, Skálda 171: to measure, in the phrases, draga kvarða við vaðmál, Grág. i. 497, 498; draga lérept, N. G. L. i. 323.
    III. to line clothes, etc.; treyja var dregin utan ok innan við rauðu silki, Flov. 19.
    IV. metaph. to delay; dró hann svá sitt mál, at…, Sturl. iii. 13; hann dró um þat engan hlut, he made no subterfuge, Hkr. ii. 157; Halldórr dró þá heldr fyrir þeim, H. then delayed the time, Ld. 322; vil ek ekki lengr d. þetta fyrir þér, 284; vil ek þessi svör eigi láta d. fyrir mér lengr, Eb. 130.
    V. with prepp. af, at, á, fram, frá, saman, sundr, etc., answering to the Lat. attrahere, abstrahere, protrahere, detrahere, distrahere, contrahere, etc.; d. at lið, to collect troops; d. saman her, id., Eg. 172, 269, Nj. 127; d. at föng, to collect stores, 208, 259: metaph., þá dró at honum sóttin, the sickness drew nearer to him, he grew worse, Grett. 119; d. af e-m, to take off, to disparage a person, Fms. vi. 287; d. af við e-n, ok mun héðan af ekki af dregit við oss, we shall not be neglected, stinted, Bjarn. 54: mathem. term, to subtract, Rb. 118: d. fram, to bring forward, promote; d. fram þræla, Fms. x. 421, ix. 254, Eg. 354; skil ek þat, at þat man mína kosti hér fram d. (it will be my greatest help here), at þú átt ekki vald á mér; d. fram kaupeyri, to make money, Fms. vi. 8; d. saman, to draw together, collect, join, Bs. ii. 18, Nj. 65, 76; d. sundr, to draw asunder, disjoin; d. e-t á, to intimate, (á-dráttr) drag eigi á þat, Sturl. iii. 110; d. undan, to escape; kómu segli við ok drógu undan, Fms. iv. 201; nú lægir segl þeirra ok d. þeir nú undan oss, v. 11: metaph. to delay, Uspakr dró þó undan allt til nætr, Nj. 272; hirðin sá þetta at svá mjök var undan dregit, Fms. ix. 251 (undan-dráttr, delay); hví dregr þú undan at bjóða mér til þín, Glúm. 326, Fms. ix. 251, Pass. 16. 13: mathem., d. rót undan, to extract a root, Alg. 366; d. upp, to draw a picture (upp-dráttr, a drawing), to pull up, Edda I; to pull out of the snow, Eg. 546; d. út, to extract, draw out, 655 xxxii. 2; d. undir sik, to draw under oneself, to embezzle, Eg. 61, Fms. vii. 128; d. upp akkeri, to weigh anchor, Jb. 403; d. upp segl, to hoist sail, vide above; ljós brann í stofunni ok var dregit upp, Sturl. i. 142; þar brann ljós ok var dregit upp, en myrkt hit neðra, ii. 230; ok er mönnum var í sæti skipat vóru log upp dregin í stofunni, iii. 182; herbergis sveinarnir drógu upp skriðljósin, Fas. iii. 530, cp. Gísl. 29, 113,—in the old halls the lamps (torches) were hoisted up and down, in order to make the light fainter or stronger; d. e-n til e-s, to draw one towards a thing; mikit dregr mik til þess, Fs. 9; engi ofkæti dregr mik til þessarar ferðar, i. e. it is not by my own choice that I undertake this journey, Fms. ix. 352; slíkt dró hann til vinsældar, this furthered him in popularity, vii. 175, Sks. 443 B; mun hann slíkt til d., it will move, influence him, Nj. 210; ef hann drægi ekki til, if he was not concerned, 224.
    2. draga til is used absol. or ellipt., denoting the course of fate, and many of the following phrases are almost impers.; nema til verra dragi, unless matters turn out worse, Nj. 175; búð, dragi til þess sem vera vill, Lat. fata evenient, 185; ef honum vill þetta til dauða d., if this draw to his death, prove fatal to him, 103, Grett. 114; þat samband þeirra er þeim dregr báðum til bana, which will be fatal to both of them, Nj. 135; enda varð þat fram at koma sem til dró, Ísl. ii. 263; sagði Kveldúlfr at þá ( then) mundi þar til draga sem honum hafði fyrir boðat, Eg. 75; dró til vanda með þeim Rúti ok Unni, it was the old story over again, Nj. 12; dró til vanda um tal þeirra, 129; at hér mundi til mikillar úgiptu draga um kaup þessi, that mickle mischief would arise from this bargain, 30; dró þá enn til sundrþykkju með þeim Svíum, the old feud with the Swedes began over again, Fms. x. 161; ok er úvíst til hvers um dregr, Fs. 6; svá er þat, segir Runólfr, ef ekki dregr til, unless some unforeseen things happen, Nj. 75; hón kvað eigi úlíkligt at til mikils drægi um, Ísl. ii. 19; þá dró nú til hvárttveggja. Bret.; hence til-drög. n. pl. cause.
    B. IMPERS.
    1. of clouds, shade, darkness, to be drawn before a thing as a veil; dimmu (acc.) þykir á draga ráðit Odds, it looked as if gloom were drawing over Odd’s affairs, Band. 10; ok er í tók at draga skúrirnar (acc.), it began to draw into showers, i. e. clouds began to gather, Fms. iii. 206: often ellipt., hratt stundum fyrir en stundum dró frá, [ clouds] drew sometimes over, sometimes off, of the moon wading through them, Grett. 114; dregr fyrir sól, [ a veil] draws over the sun, he is hid in clouds; ský vónarleysu döpur drjúgum dró fyrir mína gleði-sól, Bb. 2. 9; dregr á gleði biskups, [ clouds] drew over the bishop’s gladness, it was eclipsed, Bs. ii. 79; eclipsis heitir er fyrir dregr sól eðr tungl, it is called an eclipse when [ a veil] draws over the sun or moon, 1812. 4; tunglskin var ljóst, en stundum dró fyrir, the moonshine was clear, and in turn [ a veil] drew over it, Nj. 118; þá sá lítið af tungli ljóst ok dró ymist til eðr frá, Ísl. ii. 463; þat gerðisk, at á dregr tunglit, ok verðr eclipsis, Al. 54.
    2. in various connections; dró yðr (acc.) undir hrakningina, en oss (acc.) undan, you were drawn into a thrashing (i. e. got one), but we escaped, Nj. 141; hann (acc.) dró undan sem nauðuligast, he had a narrow escape, Fms. ix. 392: absol., a noun or personal pronoun in acc. being understood, lítt dró enn undan við þik, there was little power of drawing out of thy reach, i. e. thy blow did its work right well. Nj. 199, 155; hvárki dró sundr né saman með þeim, of two running a dead heat: metaph. phrases, mun annarsstaðar meira slóða (acc.) draga, there will be elsewhere a greater trial left, i. e. the consequences will be still worse elsewhere, 54; saman dró hugi þeirra, their hearts were drawn together, of a loving pair, Bárð. 271; saman dró kaupmála með þeim, they struck a bargain, literally the bargain was drawn tight, Nj. 49; hann hreinsar þat skjótt þóat nokkut im (acc.) hafi á oss dregit af samneyti ( although we have been a little infected by the contact with) annarlegs siðferðis, Fms. ii. 261; allt slafr (acc.) dró af Hafri, i. e. H. became quite mute, Grett. (in a verse): in a temp. sense, til þess er dró at degi, till the day drew nigh, Fms. x. 138; þá er dró at miðri nótt, Grett. 140; þá er dregr at Jólum, Yule drew nigh, Fbr. 138; dregr at hjaldri, the battle-hour draws nigh, Fms. vi. (in a verse); dró at því (the time drew nigh), at hann var banvænn, Eg. 126: of sickness, hunger, or the like, to sink, be overcome by, svá dregr at mér af elli, svengd ok þorsta, at…, Fms. iii. 96; nú þykki mér sem fast dragi at þér, thou art sinking fast, Fas. ii. 221; ok er lokið var kvæðinu dregr at Oddi fast, O. was sinking fast, 321: of other things, tók þá at d. fast at heyjum hans, his stock was very low, Fms. iii. 208; þoku dregr upp, a fog draws on, rises, 97 (in a verse), but ok taki sú poka (nom.) fyrir at d. norðrljósit, Sks. an (better þá þoku, acc.)
    C. REFLEX, to draw oneself, move; ef menn dragask til föruneytis þeirra ( join them) úbeðit, Grág. ii. 270; Sigvaldi dregsk út frá flotanum, S. draws away from the fleet, Fms. xi. 140; ofmjök dragask lendir menn fram, i. e. the barons drew far too forward, vii. 22; hyski drósk á flótta, they drew away to flight, Fms. vi. (in a verse); skeiðr drógusk at vígi, the ships drew on to battle, iii. 4 (in a verse); dragask undir = draga undir sik, to take a thing to oneself, Grág. ii. 150; dragask á hendr e-m, drógusk opt þeir menn á hendr honum er úskilamenn voru, Sturl. i. 136; dragask e-n á hendr, hann kvað þess enga ván, at hann drægisk þá á hendr, ii. 120; dragask aptr á leið, to remain behind, Rb. 108; dragask út, to recede, of the tide, 438; dragask saman, to draw back, draw together, be collected, Fms. i. 25, Bs. i. 134; e-m dragask penningar, Fms. vi. 9; d. undan, to be delayed, x. 251; the phrase, herr, lið dregsk e-m, the troops draw together, of a levy, i. 94, vii. 176, Eg. 277; dragask á legg, to grow up, Hkr. iii. 108; sem aldr hans ok vitsmunir drógusk fram, increased, Fms. vi. 7; þegar honum drósk aldr, when he grew up, Fs. 9; dragask á legg, to grow into a man; dragask við e-t, to become discouraged, Fms. viii. 65; d. vel, illa, to do well, ill, Fs. 146: to be worn out, exhausted, drósk þá liðit mjök af kulda, Sturl. iii. 20; drósk hestr hans, ii. 75: part. dreginn, drawn, pinched, starved, hestar mjök dregnir, Fms. ix. 276; görðisk fénaðr dreginn mjök, drawn, thin, iii. 208; stóð þar í heykleggi einn ok dregit at öllu megin, a tapering hayrick, Háv. 53: of sickness, Herra Andrés lagðisk sjúkr, ok er hann var dreginn mjök, Fms. ix. 276.
    β. recipr., þau drógusk um einn gullhring, they fought, pulled. Fas. iii. 387. From the reflex. probably originates, by dropping the reflex. suffix, the mod. Swed. and Dan. at draga = to go, esp. of troops or a body of men; in old writers the active form hardly ever occurs in this sense (the reading drógu in the verse Fms. iii. 4 is no doubt false); and in mod. usage it is equally unknown in Icel., except maybe in allit. phrases as, e. g. út á djúpið hann Oddr dró, Snot 229 new Ed.; to Icel. ears draga in this sense sounds strange; even the reflex. form is seldom used in a dignified sense; vide the references above.

    Íslensk-ensk orðabók > DRAGA

  • 14 tiempo

    m.
    1 time.
    al poco tiempo soon afterward
    a tiempo (de hacer algo) in time (to do something)
    a un tiempo, al mismo tiempo at the same time
    cada cierto tiempo every so often
    con el tiempo in time
    con tiempo with plenty of time to spare, in good time
    dar tiempo al tiempo to give things time
    de un tiempo a esta parte recently, for a while now
    en mis tiempos in my day o time
    estar a tiempo de to have time to
    tener tiempo de to have time to
    fuera de tiempo at the wrong moment
    ganar tiempo to save time
    hace mucho tiempo que no lo veo I haven't seen him for ages
    hacer tiempo to pass the time
    matar o engañar el tiempo to kill time
    perder el tiempo to waste time
    en tiempos de Maricastaña donkey's years ago
    a tiempo parcial part-time
    tiempo de cocción cooking time
    tiempo libre spare time
    tiempo de respuesta response time
    2 long time (periodo largo).
    hace tiempo que it is a long time since
    hace tiempo que no vive aquí he hasn't lived here for some time
    tomarse uno su tiempo to take one's time
    3 age.
    ¿qué tiempo tiene? how old is he?
    4 movement (movimiento).
    motor de cuatro tiempos four-stroke engine
    5 weather (clima).
    hizo buen/mal tiempo the weather was good/bad
    si el tiempo lo permite o no lo impide weather permitting
    hace un tiempo de perros it's a foul day
    poner a o al mal tiempo buena cara to put a brave face on things
    6 half (sport).
    7 tense (grammar).
    tiempo simple/compuesto simple/composite tense
    9 tempo, beat, rhythmic unit, time.
    10 turn, time.
    11 Father Time.
    12 tempus.
    * * *
    1 (gen) time
    2 (época) time, period, age, days plural
    3 METEREOLOGÍA weather
    ■ ¿qué tiempo hace? what's the weather like?
    4 (edad) age
    ■ ¿qué tiempo tiene el niño? how old is your baby?
    5 (temporada) season, time
    6 (momento) moment, time
    7 MÚSICA tempo, movement
    9 GRAMÁTICA tense
    10 TÉCNICA stroke
    \
    a su tiempo / a su debido tiempo in due course
    a través de los tiempos through the ages
    a un tiempo at the same time
    al mismo tiempo at the same time
    al poco tiempo soon afterwards
    antes de tiempo too early, too soon
    con el tiempo in the course of time, with time
    con tiempo in advance
    ¿cuánto tiempo...? how long...?
    ■ ¿cuánto tiempo estuviste allí? how long did you stay there?
    ■ ¿cuánto tiempo llevas aquí en España? how long have you lived in Spain?
    ¿cuánto tiempo hace...? how long ago...?
    ■ ¿cuánto tiempo hace que no vas al cine? how long ago is it since you went to the cinema?
    dar tiempo to give time
    dar tiempo al tiempo figurado to let matters take their course
    dar tiempo a uno de/para to have enough time to
    de tiempo en tiempo from time to time
    de tiempo inmemorial from time immemorial
    de un tiempo a esta parte for some time now
    desde hace tiempo / desde hace mucho tiempo for a long time
    el tiempo corre time goes by, time flies
    el tiempo es oro figurado time is money
    en mis tiempos in my time
    en otro tiempo / en otros tiempos formerly
    estar a tiempo de to still have time to
    fuera de tiempo (de temporada) out of season 2 (inoportunamente) at the wrong moment
    ganar tiempo to save time
    hace tiempo a long time
    hacer buen tiempo / hace mal tiempo the weather is good / the weather is bad
    hacer tiempo / hacer el tiempo to kill time
    matar (el) tiempo / pasar (el) tiempo to kill time
    no hay tiempo que perder there's no time to lose
    perder el tiempo / perder tiempo to waste time
    ¡qué tiempos aquellos! those were the days!
    tiempo atrás some time ago, time ago
    tomarse tiempo to take one's time
    ¡y si no, al tiempo! time will tell!
    tiempo de perros familiar lousy weather
    tiempo libre free time
    tiempos difíciles hard times
    * * *
    noun m.
    1) time
    2) period, epoch, age
    * * *
    SM
    1) [indicando duración] time

    el tiempo pasa y no nos damos ni cuenta — time goes by o passes and we don't even realize it

    • me llevó bastante tiempo — it took me quite a long time

    • ¿ cuánto tiempo se va a quedar? — how long is he staying for?

    ¿cuánto tiempo hace de eso? — how long ago was that?

    ¿cuánto tiempo hace que vives aquí? — how long have you been living here?

    ¡cuánto tiempo sin verte! — I haven't seen you for ages!

    • más tiempo, necesito más tiempo para pensármelo — I need more time o longer to think about it

    • mucho tiempo, una costumbre que viene de mucho tiempo atrás — a long-standing custom

    • al poco tiempo de — soon after

    se acostumbró a la idea en muy poco tiempo — she soon got used to the idea, it didn't take her long to get used to the idea

    tiempo de exposición — (Fot) exposure time

    tiempo libre — spare time, free time

    2) [otras locuciones]

    • a tiempo — in time

    • cada cierto tiempo — every so often

    • a tiempo completo — full-time

    • con tiempo, llegamos con tiempo de darnos un paseo — we arrived in time to have a walk

    • con el tiempo — eventually

    • dar tiempo, no da tiempo a terminarlo — there isn't enough time to finish it

    ¿crees que te dará tiempo? — do you think you'll have (enough) time?

    • fuera de tiempo — at the wrong time

    • ganar tiempo — to save time

    • hacer tiempo — to while away the time

    • matar el tiempo — to kill time

    • a tiempo parcial — part-time

    • de un o algún tiempo a esta parte — for some time (past)

    • pasar el tiempo — to pass time

    • perder el tiempo — to waste time

    ¡rápido, no perdamos (el) tiempo! — quick, there's no time to lose!

    • sacar tiempo para hacer algo — to find the time to do sth

    • tener tiempo para algo — to have time for sth

    - con el tiempo y una caña hasta las verdes caen
    3) (=momento) time

    al mismo tiempo, a un tiempo — at the same time

    • llegamos antes de tiempo — we arrived early

    ha nacido antes de tiempo — he was born prematurely, he was premature

    • a su debido tiempo — in due course

    4) (=época) time

    en los últimos tiempos — recently, lately, in recent times

    en tiempos de Maricastaña —

    va vestida como en tiempos de Maricastaña — her clothes went out with the ark, her clothes are really old-fashioned

    5) (=edad) age

    ¿cuánto o qué tiempo tiene el niño? — how old is the baby?

    6) (Dep) half

    tiempo muerto — (lit) time-out; (fig) breather

    7) (Mús) [de compás] tempo, time; [de sinfonía] movement
    8) (Ling) tense
    9) (Meteo) weather

    ¿qué tiempo hace ahí? — what's the weather like there?

    • del tiempo, ¿quiere el agua fría o del tiempo? — would you like the water chilled or at room temperature?

    mapa, hombre
    10) (Inform) time
    11) (Industria) time

    tiempo de paro, tiempo inactivo — downtime

    12) (Náut) stormy weather
    13) (Mec) cycle
    * * *
    1) ( que transcurre) time

    cómo pasa el tiempo!/el tiempo vuela! — how time flies!

    el tiempo apremia — time is short, time is of the essence (frml)

    para ganar tiempo — (in order) to gain time

    2)
    a) (duración, porción de tiempo) time

    ¿cuánto tiempo hace que no lo ves? — how long is it since you last saw him?

    ¿cada cuánto tiempo? — how often?

    un or algún tiempo atrás — some time ago o back

    a tiempo completo/parcial — full time/part time

    b) (período disponible, tiempo suficiente) time

    tengo todo el tiempo del mundo — I've got all the time in the world

    c) (Dep) ( marca) time
    d) ( de bebé)

    ¿cuánto tiempo tiene? — how old is he?

    al mismo tiempo or a un tiempo — at the same time

    con (el) tiempo y una caña... — everything in good time

    hacer tiempo — to while away the time; (Dep) to play for time

    matar el tiempo — (fam) to kill time

    robarle tiempo al sueño — to burn the candle at both ends

    4)
    a) ( época)

    en aquellos tiempos — at that time, in those days

    en los tiempos que corren — these days, nowadays

    b) ( temporada) season
    c) (momento propio, oportuno)
    5) (Dep) ( en partido) half

    primer/segundo tiempo — first/second half

    6) (Mús) ( compás) tempo, time; ( de sinfonía) movement
    7) (Ling) tense
    8) (Meteo) weather

    hace buen/mal tiempo — the weather's good/bad

    ¿qué tal el tiempo por ahí? — what's the weather like over there?

    del or (Méx) al tiempo — at room temperature

    a mal tiempo, buena cara — I/you/we may as well look on the bright side

    * * *
    1) ( que transcurre) time

    cómo pasa el tiempo!/el tiempo vuela! — how time flies!

    el tiempo apremia — time is short, time is of the essence (frml)

    para ganar tiempo — (in order) to gain time

    2)
    a) (duración, porción de tiempo) time

    ¿cuánto tiempo hace que no lo ves? — how long is it since you last saw him?

    ¿cada cuánto tiempo? — how often?

    un or algún tiempo atrás — some time ago o back

    a tiempo completo/parcial — full time/part time

    b) (período disponible, tiempo suficiente) time

    tengo todo el tiempo del mundo — I've got all the time in the world

    c) (Dep) ( marca) time
    d) ( de bebé)

    ¿cuánto tiempo tiene? — how old is he?

    al mismo tiempo or a un tiempo — at the same time

    con (el) tiempo y una caña... — everything in good time

    hacer tiempo — to while away the time; (Dep) to play for time

    matar el tiempo — (fam) to kill time

    robarle tiempo al sueño — to burn the candle at both ends

    4)
    a) ( época)

    en aquellos tiempos — at that time, in those days

    en los tiempos que corren — these days, nowadays

    b) ( temporada) season
    c) (momento propio, oportuno)
    5) (Dep) ( en partido) half

    primer/segundo tiempo — first/second half

    6) (Mús) ( compás) tempo, time; ( de sinfonía) movement
    7) (Ling) tense
    8) (Meteo) weather

    hace buen/mal tiempo — the weather's good/bad

    ¿qué tal el tiempo por ahí? — what's the weather like over there?

    del or (Méx) al tiempo — at room temperature

    a mal tiempo, buena cara — I/you/we may as well look on the bright side

    * * *
    tiempo1
    1 = time, length of time, period.

    Ex: Because not all files need to be reorganized at once, but only those which are very full, the time required for this procedure is reduced to a minimum.

    Ex: There is a correlation between length of time spent obtaining the book required and loss of interest.
    Ex: Library use declines during the June-October period when examinations have finished and the students are on vacation.
    * absorber tiempo = absorb + time.
    * acabarse el tiempo = time + run out, time + be + up.
    * acaparar el tiempo de Alguien = monopolise + time.
    * adaptarse a los tiempos = change with + the times, move with + the times, keep up with + the times, adapt to + the times.
    * adelantado a su tiempo = ahead of + Posesivo + time(s).
    * adelantarse a + Posesivo + tiempo = be years ahead of + Posesivo + time.
    * administración del tiempo = time management.
    * administrar el tiempo = manage + time.
    * adquirido con el transcurso del tiempo = time-based.
    * agotarse el tiempo = time + run out.
    * ahorrar para cuando lleguen tiempos difíciles = save for + a rainy day.
    * ahorrar tiempo = save + time.
    * ahorrar tiempo de escritura = save + typing.
    * ahorro de tiempo = time-saving [timesaving], economy of time, savings in time.
    * Algo a lo que hay que dedicar mucho tiempo = time-consuming [time consuming].
    * Algo que ahorra tiempo = time saver [timesaver].
    * Algo que lleva mucho tiempo de hacer = time-consuming [time consuming].
    * Algo que se hace para matar el tiempo = time filler.
    * Algo que se le va tomando el gusto con el tiempo = acquired taste.
    * algún tiempo = awhile.
    * al mismo tiempo = at once, at the same time, concurrently, in the process, simultaneously, contemporaneously, at the same instant, at one and the same time, in parallel, concomitantly, at the one time, all the while.
    * al mismo tiempo que = in parallel to/with, while, as the same time as, cum, in conjunction with.
    * al mismo tiempo que + Indicativo = whilst + Gerundio.
    * a lo largo del tiempo = longitudinal, longitudinally.
    * alquilar tiempo = buy + time.
    * a medida que pasaba el tiempo = as time passed (by), as time went by.
    * a medida que pasa el tiempo = as time goes by, as time passes (by).
    * andar (muy) apurado de tiempo = be (hard) pressed for + time.
    * andar (muy) corto de tiempo = be (hard) pressed for + time.
    * andar (muy) escaso de tiempo = be (hard) pressed for + time.
    * andar (muy) falto de tiempo = be (hard) pressed for + time.
    * anunciado desde hace tiempo = long-heralded.
    * apurado de tiempo = time-rationed, crunched for time, time-crunched.
    * a su debido tiempo = in due course, timely, in due time.
    * a su tiempo = in a timely fashion, in due course, in a timely manner.
    * a tiempo = in timely fashion, on time, promptly, timely, just in time, in time.
    * a tiempo completo = full-time.
    * a tiempo parcial = part-time.
    * a través del tiempo = over time.
    * avatares del tiempo, los = vicissitudes of time, the, whims of time, the.
    * avecinarse tiempos difíciles = tough times ahead, lean times ahead, darker times + lie ahead, hard times ahead.
    * basado en el tiempo = time-based.
    * bastante tiempo = ample time.
    * breve período de tiempo = while.
    * buenos tiempos = good times.
    * cada cierto tiempo = episodic, every so often, every now and then, every now and again.
    * cada tanto tiempo = every so often, every now and again, every once in a while.
    * cambiar con el paso del tiempo = change over + time.
    * cambiar con el tiempo = change over + time.
    * cambiar con el transcurso del tiempo = change over + time.
    * cantar victoria antes de tiempo = speak too soon.
    * cantidad de tiempo = length of time.
    * cápsula del tiempo = time capsule.
    * carrera contra el tiempo = race against time, race against the clock.
    * comprar tiempo = buy + time.
    * con el correr del tiempo = over the years, in the process of time, with the passage of time.
    * con el decursar del tiempo = with the passage of time, in the process of time.
    * con el paso del tiempo = over the years, over time, with the passage of time, as time goes by, in due course, over a period of time, in the course of time, over the course of time, in the process of time, as time passed (by), as time passes (by), as time went by.
    * con el tiempo = in time, over the years, with time, with the passage of time, eventually, in due course, over a period of time, in due time, over time, in the process of time, as time passed (by), as time passes (by), as time goes by, as time went by, by and by.
    * con el transcurrir del tiempo = with the passage of time, in the process of time, as time passed (by).
    * con el transcurso del tiempo = over time, with time, with age, as time goes by, in the course of time, over the course of time, as time passes (by), as time went by.
    * consagrado por el tiempo = time-proven.
    * conseguir tiempo = buy + time.
    * considerado desde hace mucho tiempo = long considered.
    * consumir + Posesivo + tiempo = swallow up + Posesivo + time.
    * con un plazo de tiempo muy corto = at (a) very short notice.
    * con un plazo de tiempo tan corto = at such short notice.
    * cumplido hace tiempo = long overdue.
    * curso a tiempo completo = full-time course.
    * dar tiempo = give + time, donate + Posesivo + time.
    * dar tiempo a Alguien = give + Nombre + some time.
    * de algún tiempo a esta parte = for some time now.
    * dedicación de tiempo = expenditure of time.
    * dedicar algún tiempo a hacer algo = have + a turn at.
    * dedicar el tiempo y el esfuerzo = take + the time and effort.
    * dedicar tiempo = spend + time, lend + time, expend + time, devote + time, dedicate + time.
    * dedicar tiempo a = take + time on.
    * de hace mucho tiempo = age-old, long-term, long-lost.
    * dejar tiempo = free up + time.
    * dejar tiempo libre = free up + time.
    * demasiado tiempo = too long.
    * demostrado válido por el tiempo = time-tested.
    * de otros tiempos = of yore.
    * de otro tiempo = of yore.
    * desde el comienzo de los tiempos = since the beginning of time, from the beginning of time, since time began.
    * desde el principio de los tiempos = since the beginning of time, from the beginning of time, since time began.
    * desde hace algún tiempo = for some time past, for days.
    * desde hace la tira (de tiempo) = for yonks and yonks, for yonks.
    * desde hace muchísimo tiempo = in ages (and ages and ages).
    * desde hace mucho tiempo = for ages, long-time [longtime], far back in time, for a long time, long since, in ages (and ages and ages).
    * desde hace tanto tiempo = so long.
    * desde hace tiempo = long [longer -comp., longest -sup.], over the years, for a long time, long since, for some time.
    * desde hace un montonazo de tiempo = for yonks and yonks.
    * desde hace un montón de tiempo = for yonks.
    * desde hace ya algún tiempo = for some time now.
    * desde los primeros tiempos = since the earliest of times, from earliest times.
    * desde los viejos tiempos = since olden times.
    * desde tiempo inmemorial = since earliest time, since time immemorial, from time immemorial, since time out of mind, from time out of mind.
    * desde tiempos prehistóricos = since prehistoric times.
    * desperdiciar tiempo = squander + time.
    * desperdicio de tiempo = time waster.
    * deteriorado por el paso del tiempo = timeworn.
    * de todos los tiempos = all-time, of all time(s).
    * de un tiempo a esta parte = for some time now.
    * dispositivo de desconexión automática transcurrido un tiempo determinado = time out mechanism.
    * donar tiempo = donate + Posesivo + time.
    * donde el tiempo es de suma importancia = time-critical.
    * durante algún tiempo = for a while, for some time, for some while, for some time to come, for days.
    * durante cierto tiempo = over a period of time.
    * durante cuánto tiempo = how long.
    * durante demasiado tiempo = for too long.
    * durante este tiempo = in this time.
    * durante largos períodos de tiempo = over long periods of time.
    * durante la tira de tiempo = for donkey's years.
    * durante muchísimo tiempo = for ages and ages (and ages).
    * durante mucho tiempo = long [longer -comp., longest -sup.], for generations, long-time [longtime], for a long time to come, for long periods of time, for a long period of time, lastingly, for a very long time, for many long hours, for a long time, in ages (and ages and ages), in ages (and ages and ages).
    * durante tanto tiempo = for so long, so long.
    * durante tanto tiempo como sea posible = for as long as possible.
    * durante un largo período de tiempo = over a long time scale, over a long period of time, for a long period of time, over a long period.
    * durante un período de tiempo = for a number of years.
    * durante un periodo de tiempo determinado = over a period of time.
    * durante un período de tiempo indefinido = over an indefinite period of time, over an indefinite span of time.
    * durante un porrón de tiempo = for donkey's years.
    * durar mucho tiempo = last + long.
    * durar tiempo = take + time, take + long.
    * el paso del tiempo = the passage of time, the sands of time.
    * el tiempo de Algo = in season.
    * el tiempo dirá = time will tell.
    * el tiempo es oro = time is money.
    * el tiempo lo dirá = only time will tell.
    * el tiempo vuela = time flies (by).
    * el transcurrir del tiempo = the sands of time.
    * embates del tiempo, los = ravages of time, the.
    * emplear tiempo = spend + time, expend + time, devote + time.
    * en aquellos tiempos = at the time, the then + Nombre, by this time, in those days.
    * encontrar el tiempo = make + an opportunity.
    * encontrar tiempo = find + time.
    * encuesta sobre el uso del tiempo = time-use survey.
    * en estos tiempos = in these times, in this day and age.
    * en los últimos tiempos = latterly, in recent times, in modern times, in recent memory.
    * en muy poco tiempo = before long.
    * en nada de tiempo = at a moment's notice, in next to no time, in no time at all, in no time.
    * en otros tiempos = in days of yore, in times of yore.
    * en otro tiempo = in days of yore, in times of yore.
    * en poco tiempo = before very long, in quite a short time, in a short time, in a short span of time.
    * en sus buenos tiempos = in + Posesivo + heyday.
    * en su tiempo = formerly.
    * en tiempo de carnaval = carnivalistically.
    * en tiempo de feria = carnivalistically.
    * en tiempo de guerra = wartime [wart-time].
    * en tiempo real = real time [real-time], in real time.
    * en tiempos de = in times of.
    * en tiempos de adversidad = in times of + adversity.
    * en tiempos de austeridad = in austere times.
    * en tiempos de guerra = in time(s) of war.
    * en tiempos de Maricastaña = in olden days, in olden times.
    * en tiempos de paz = in peacetime, during peacetime, in peace, in time(s) of peace.
    * en tiempos de recesión = in recessionary times.
    * en tiempos de recesión económica = in recessionary times.
    * en tiempos difíciles = in times of need.
    * en tiempos más recientes = in more recent times.
    * en tiempos prehistóricos = in prehistoric times.
    * en un corto espacio de tiempo = in a short space of time.
    * en un corto período de tiempo = in a short period of time.
    * en un tiempo razonable = timely.
    * en un tiempo relativamente corto = in a relatively short time, in a relatively short span of time.
    * equivalente a tiempo completo = full-time equivalent (FTE).
    * esa época ya pasó hace tiempo = that time is long past.
    * escaso de tiempo = time-strapped, short of time.
    * esperado durante tiempo y con ansiedad = long-and-expectantly-awaited.
    * esperado hace tiempo = overdue.
    * establecido desde hace tiempo = long-established.
    * estado del tiempo = weather conditions.
    * estar muy por delante de su tiempo = be years ahead of + Posesivo + time.
    * estragos del tiempo, los = ravages of time, the.
    * faceta de tiempo = Time facet.
    * factor tiempo = time factor.
    * facturación por tiempo de conexión = metered pricing, metered billing.
    * falta de tiempo = tightness of scheduling.
    * falto de tiempo = crunched for time, time-crunched, short of time.
    * finito en el tiempo = timebound [time-bound].
    * florecer antes de tiempo = bolt.
    * frontera del tiempo = time boundary.
    * fue durante mucho tiempo = long remained.
    * fuera de onda con los tiempos modernos = out of keeping with the times, out of tune with the times.
    * ganar tiempo = win + time, buy + time, free up + time.
    * germinar antes de tiempo = bolt.
    * gestión del tiempo = time management.
    * gusto que se adquiere con el tiempo = acquired taste.
    * hablar antes de tiempo = speak too soon.
    * hace algún tiempo = some time ago, a while back, some while ago.
    * hace demasiado tiempo = too long ago.
    * hace la tira (de tiempo) = yonks and yonks, yonks.
    * hace muchísimo tiempo = ages (and ages) ago, aeons ago, yonks.
    * hace mucho tiempo = all those many moons ago, many moons ago.
    * hace muy poco tiempo = a short time ago.
    * hace poco tiempo = a short time ago.
    * hacer algún tiempo = sometime back.
    * hacer frente a tiempos difíciles = cope with + difficult times.
    * hacer mucho tiempo que Algo ha desaparecido = be long gone.
    * hace tiempo = for some time, long ago, once, long since.
    * hace un montonazo de tiempo = yonks and yonks.
    * hace un montón de tiempo = yonks.
    * hace ya mucho tiempo que = gone are the days of.
    * hace ya tiempo = long since.
    * hasta el final de los tiempos = till the end of time.
    * hasta hace relativamente poco tiempo = until relatively recently.
    * instalaciones para dedicar el tiempo libre = leisure facilities.
    * intentar ganar tiempo = play for + time, temporise [temporize, -USA].
    * intervalo de tiempo = date range.
    * inversión de tiempo = commitment of time.
    * invertir el tiempo de Uno en = invest + Posesivo + time in.
    * ir en contra del tiempo = race against + time, race against + the clock.
    * justo a tiempo = (just) in the nick of time, just in time, not a moment too soon.
    * la mayoría del tiempo = most of the time.
    * largos períodos de tiempo = long periods of time.
    * la tira de tiempo = donkey's years.
    * liberar tiempo = free up + time.
    * limitado por el tiempo = time-constrained.
    * límite de tiempo = time limit.
    * llegar a tiempo = arrive + in time, arrive + on time.
    * llevar tiempo = take + time, take + a while, take + long, absorb + time.
    * llevar tiempo y esfuerzo = take + time and effort.
    * los buenos tiempos = the good old days.
    * los viejos tiempos = the good old days.
    * malos tiempos = bad times.
    * margen de tiempo = time frame [timeframe].
    * matar el tiempo = kill + time.
    * mejoría del tiempo = break in the weather.
    * muchísimo tiempo después = ages and ages hence.
    * mucho tiempo = long time, a very long time, long hours, ample time, for a long time.
    * mucho tiempo antes de (que) = long before.
    * mucho tiempo después = ages and ages hence.
    * mucho tiempo después (de que) = long after.
    * muy apreciado desde hace tiempo = long-revered.
    * muy a tiempo = in good time.
    * muy venerado desde hace tiempo = long-revered.
    * no cantes victoria antes de tiempo = don't count your chickens before they are hatched.
    * noción del tiempo = notion of time, sense of time.
    * no hace mucho tiempo = not so long ago.
    * no pasar mucho tiempo antes de que + Subjuntivo = be not long before + Indicativo.
    * no tener tiempo de nada = have + not a moment to spare.
    * nuevos tiempos, los = wind(s) of change, the.
    * observar atentamente y durante cierto tiempo = maintain + vigil.
    * ocupar el tiempo = fill in + Posesivo + time.
    * ocupar tiempo = occupy + time, take up + time.
    * olvidado desde hace tiempo = long forgotten.
    * pasar algún tiempo en = have + a turn at.
    * pasar el tiempo = pass + the time, hang around, spend + Posesivo + days, hang about, hang out.
    * pasar el tiempo libre = spend + Posesivo + leisure, spend + Posesivo + leisure time.
    * pasar mucho tiempo antes de que = be a long time before.
    * pasar tiempo = spend + time.
    * pasar tiempo haciendo Algo = do + stint at.
    * perder el tiempo = dawdle, mess around, pissing into the wind, mess about, faff (about/around), pootle, sit + idle, muck around/about, piddle around.
    * perder la noción del tiempo = lose + track of time, lose + all notion of time, lose + all sense of time.
    * perder tiempo = waste + time, lose + time.
    * pérdida de tiempo = time wasting, wild goose chase, waste of time, time-consuming [time consuming], fool's errand.
    * pérdida de un tiempo precioso = waste of precious time.
    * perdido hace tiempo = long-lost.
    * período de tiempo = amount of time, time, time frame [timeframe], time lapse, time period, time span [time-span], time slot, period of time, date range.
    * permanecer estable con el tiempo = be stable over time.
    * pero al mismo tiempo = but then again.
    * plazo de tiempo = timeline [time line].
    * poco tiempo = short while, short time.
    * poco tiempo después = shortly afterwards.
    * poner a mal tiempo buena cara = keep + Posesivo + chin up.
    * por algún tiempo = for sometime.
    * por mucho tiempo = for long, for long periods of time.
    * por un período de tiempo limitado = on a short-term basis.
    * por un tiempo = for a time.
    * por un tiempo indefinido = for indefinite time.
    * postulado desde hace mucho tiempo = long-espoused.
    * precio calculado según el tiempo de conexión = connect time based pricing.
    * precio calculado según el tiempo empleado = time-based charge.
    * preocupado por el tiempo = time-conscious.
    * programador de tiempo = egg timer.
    * prolongar el tiempo = prolong + time.
    * propugnado desde hace mucho tiempo = long-espoused.
    * que cambia con el tiempo = ever-changing [ever changing], time-variant, ever-shifting.
    * que consume tiempo = time-consuming [time consuming].
    * quedar anulado con el paso del tiempo = be overtaken by events.
    * que depende del tiempo = time-dependent.
    * que hay que dedicarle mucho tiempo = time-intensive.
    * que lleva tiempo en cartelera = long-running.
    * que se percibe desde hace mucho tiempo = long-felt.
    * que utiliza el tiempo como variable = time-dependent.
    * recuperar el tiempo perdido = make up for + lost time.
    * reloj que registra el tiempo de conexión = accounting clock.
    * remontarse bastante en el tiempo = go back + a long way.
    * remontarse en el tiempo = extend + far back, stretch + far back in time.
    * resistir el paso del tiempo = stand + the test of time, withstand + the test of time, survive + the test of time, pass + the test of time.
    * robarle tiempo al sueño = burn + the candle at both ends.
    * se avecinan malos tiempos = hard times lie ahead.
    * sensible al tiempo = time-sensitive [time sensitive].
    * sentido del tiempo = sense of time, notion of time.
    * ser una pérdida de tiempo = be idle, beat + a dead horse, fart + in the wind.
    * ser un pérdida de tiempo = flog + a dead horse.
    * ser un producto de su tiempo = be a product of + Posesivo + time.
    * si el tiempo lo permite = weather permitting.
    * siempre que Uno puede dedicarle el tiempo = in + Posesivo + own time, on + Posesivo + own time.
    * si hay tiempo = time permitting.
    * sin importar el tiempo = all-weather.
    * si no lo impide el tiempo = weather permitting.
    * sin tiempo que perder = without a minute to spare.
    * si queda tiempo = time permitting.
    * sistema de tiempo real = real-time system.
    * sobrado de tiempo = unpressed for time.
    * sólo por tiempo limitado = for a limited time only.
    * subordinado al tiempo = time-dependent.
    * suficiente tiempo = long enough, ample time.
    * superar la barrera del tiempo = cross + time barriers.
    * tanto tiempo = so much time, this long, such a very long time.
    * tardar tanto tiempo en = take + so long to.
    * tardar tiempo = take + time, take + long.
    * tarifa calculada según el tiempo de conexión = connect time based pricing.
    * tarifa calculada según el tiempo empleado = time-based charge.
    * tarifa calculada según el tiempo utilizado = time-based tariff.
    * tener mucho tiempo libre = have + plenty of time to spare.
    * terminarse el tiempo = time + run out.
    * tiempo adicional = extra-time.
    * tiempo agotado = time out.
    * tiempo + apremiar = time + press, time + be of the essence.
    * tiempo + avanzar inexorablemente = time + march on.
    * tiempo de acceso = access time, seek time, access speed.
    * tiempo de búsqueda = search time.
    * tiempo de calidad = quality time.
    * tiempo de carga = loading time.
    * tiempo de conexión = connect time.
    * tiempo de conexión en línea = online time.
    * tiempo de CPU = CPU time.
    * tiempo de demora = lead time.
    * tiempo de descarga = download time.
    * tiempo de descarga de datos = download time, latency.
    * tiempo de duración = lifespan [life span].
    * tiempo de emisión = airtime.
    * tiempo de espera = lead time, wait time, waiting time, waiting period.
    * tiempo de estudio = study time.
    * tiempo de inicio = start time.
    * tiempo de ordenador = computer time, computer time.
    * tiempo de préstamo = document delivery.
    * tiempo de proceso = processing time.
    * tiempo de reacción = reaction time.
    * tiempo de respuesta = response time, turnaround time, turnabout time, fill time, reaction time.
    * tiempo durante el cual el ordenador no está disponible al público = down time.
    * tiempo + estar a favor de Alguien = time + be + on + Posesivo + side.
    * tiempo estar de lado de Alguien = time + be + on + Posesivo + side.
    * tiempo familiar = quality time.
    * tiempo fuera de servicio = downtime.
    * tiempo futuro = future tense.
    * tiempo inmemorial = time immemorial.
    * tiempo libre = leisure, leisure time, free time, idle hours, spare time.
    * tiempo muerto = downtime, time out.
    * tiempo + pasar = time + march on.
    * tiempos alocados = heady days.
    * tiempos de los romanos = Roman times.
    * tiempos de paz = peacetime [peace time].
    * tiempos difíciles = difficult times, tough times, hard times, embattled time(s).
    * tiempo + seguir su marcha inexorable = time + march on.
    * tiempos emocionantes = heady days.
    * tiempo + ser esencial = time + be of the essence.
    * tiempo + ser + precioso = time + be + precious.
    * tiempos mejores = better times.
    * tiempos modernos = modern times.
    * tiempos turbulentos = embattled time(s).
    * tiempo transcurrido = elapsed time.
    * tiempo verbal = tense.
    * todo al mismo tiempo = all at once.
    * todo el tiempo = all of the time, left, right and centre, the whole time, all the while.
    * tomar el tiempo = time.
    * tomarse el tiempo que Uno necesita = take + Posesivo + time.
    * tomar tiempo = take + time, take + long.
    * trabajador a tiempo parcial = part-timer.
    * trabajar durante un período de tiempo = serve + stint.
    * trabajo a tiempo parcial = part-time work, part-time employment, part-time job.
    * transcurrir tiempo = lapse + time.
    * tratar de ganar tiempo = temporise [temporize, -USA], play for + time.
    * un porrón de tiempo = donkey's years.
    * un tiempo = awhile.
    * usando el tiempo de un modo eficaz = time efficient [time-efficient].
    * vencido hace tiempo = long overdue.
    * venir de mucho tiempo atrás = go back + a long way.
    * viajar hacia atrás en el tiempo = travel back in + time.
    * viaje a través del tiempo = time travel.
    * viaje en el tiempo = time travel.
    * vicisitudes del tiempo, las = vicissitudes of time, the, whims of time, the.
    * viejos tiempos, los = good old days, the.
    * ya hace algún tiempo = for quite some time.
    * ya hace bastante tiempo = for quite a while now.
    * y al mismo tiempo = and in the process, yet.

    tiempo2
    2 = weather.

    Ex: Data Resources Inc., again US-based, covers data bases in economics, finance, energy and weather.

    * alerta del tiempo = weather warning.
    * artífice del tiempo = weather-maker, rainmaker.
    * buen tiempo = fair weather.
    * cuando el tiempo lo permita = when the weather permits.
    * del tiempo = room temperature.
    * el cielo rojo al atardecer augura buen tiempo, el cielo rojo al amanecer aug = red sky at night, (shepherd/sailor)'s delight, red sky in the morning, (shepherd/sailor)'s warning.
    * hombre del tiempo = weatherman.
    * justo a tiempo = not a minute too soon.
    * mapa del tiempo = weather map.
    * muy mal tiempo = severe weather.
    * para todo tipo de tiempo = all-weather.
    * si hace buen tiempo = weather permitting.
    * tiempo + aclararse = weather + clear.
    * tiempo de invierno = winter weather.
    * tiempo de verano = summer weather.
    * tiempo estival = summer weather.
    * tiempo inclemente = intemperate weather.
    * tiempo invernal = winter weather.
    * tiempo muy malo = severe weather.

    * * *
    ya ha pasado mucho tiempo desde aquello that all happened a long time ago o a lot of water has flowed under the bridge since then
    el tiempo va pasando y las cosas no mejoran time passes o goes by and things don't get any better
    ¡cómo pasa or corre el tiempo! how time flies!, doesn't time go quickly!
    ya te acostumbrarás con el tiempo you'll get used to it in time
    el tiempo dirá time will tell
    el tiempo apremia time is short, I'm/we're pressed for time, time is of the essence ( frml)
    ¡el tiempo vuela! how time flies!
    a ver si dejas de perder el tiempo why don't you stop wasting time?
    ¡qué manera de perder el tiempo! what a waste of time!
    no pierdas tiempo con eso don't waste time with o on that
    ¡deprisa, no hay tiempo que perder! quick, there's no time to lose!
    sin perder tiempo without wasting a moment, without further ado
    hay que recuperar el tiempo perdido we must make up for lost time
    todas las advertencias fueron tiempo perdido all our warnings were a waste of time
    es una pérdida de tiempo it's a waste of time
    para ganar tiempo, ve metiendo las cartas en los sobres to save time, start putting the letters into the envelopes
    les contó una historia para ganar tiempo to gain time she told them a story, she played for time by telling them a story
    creo que si vamos por aquí ganamos tiempo I think we'll save time if we go this way
    Compuestos:
    time-sharing
    real time
    universal time, Greenwich Mean Time
    B
    1 (duración, porción de tiempo) time
    luego de todo este tiempo after all this time
    ¿cuánto tiempo hace que no lo ves? how long is it since you last saw him?
    ¿cuánto tiempo hace que vives aquí? how long have you lived o been living here?
    de esto que te cuento ya hace mucho tiempo all this happened a long time ago now
    ¡cuánto tiempo sin verte! I haven't seen you for ages o it's been ages since I last saw you o ( colloq) long time, no see
    hace demasiado tiempo, no creo que se acuerde it was too long ago, I don't think she'll remember
    hace mucho tiempo que no sé nada de ellos I haven't heard from them for a long time o ( colloq) for ages
    todavía falta or queda mucho tiempo para su boda it's still a long time till their wedding
    todo este tiempo me ha estado mintiendo he's been lying to me all this time
    se ha pasado todo el tiempo hablando she's done nothing but talk the whole time
    pasaba la mayor parte del tiempo leyendo he spent most of the time reading
    tómate el tiempo que te haga falta take as long as you need
    dentro de muy poco tiempo very soon o very shortly
    ¿cada cuánto tiempo conviene hacerse un chequeo? how often should one have a check-up?
    cada cierto tiempo every so often
    de tiempo en tiempo from time to time
    ¿cuánto tiempo van a pasar en Los Ángeles? how much time o how long are you going to spend in Los Angeles?
    me llevó mucho tiempo preparar la tarta it took me a long time o ( colloq) ages to make the cake
    no pude quedarme (por) más tiempo I couldn't stay any longer
    ¿por qué tardaste tanto tiempo en contestarme? why did you take such a long time o so long to answer me?
    ya hace algún or un tiempo que no se le ve por aquí he hasn't been around here for some time o for quite a time o for quite a while now
    queremos quedarnos (por) un tiempo we want to stay for a while o for a time
    un or algún tiempo atrás some time ago o back
    una costumbre que viene de mucho tiempo atrás a custom that dates back a long way
    poco tiempo después or al poco tiempo se volvieron a encontrar a short time later they met again o they met again not long afterward(s)
    de un tiempo a esta parte se ha vuelto muy agresivo he's been very aggressive recently o ( frml) of late
    trabajar a tiempo completo/parcial to work full time/part time
    2
    (mucho tiempo): hacía tiempo que no lo veíamos we hadn't seen him for a long time o for quite a while o ( colloq) for ages
    ya hace tiempo que se marchó she left quite some time ago o quite a while ago
    ¡mira que yo lo venía diciendo desde hacía tiempo! haven't I been saying so for a long time o ( colloq) for ages?
    3
    (período disponible, tiempo suficiente): no he tenido tiempo de terminarlo I haven't had time to finish it
    hay tiempo de sobra para eso there's plenty of time for that
    no tenemos mucho tiempo we don't have much time
    tengo todo el tiempo del mundo I've got all the time in the world
    no sé de dónde voy a sacar el tiempo I don't know where I'm going to find the time
    no tengo tiempo ni para respirar I hardly have time to breathe
    no he tenido tiempo material para hacerlo I haven't had a moment to do it o I just haven't had the time to do it
    me va a faltar tiempo para terminarlo I'm not going to have enough time to finish it
    no me ha dado tiempo a or de acabarlo I haven't had time to finish it
    no da tiempo de hacerlo todo there isn't (enough) time to do it all
    dame un poco de tiempo give me a bit of o a little time
    no me dieron suficiente tiempo they didn't give me enough time
    4 ( Dep) (marca) time
    ¿qué tiempo hizo Espinosa? what was Espinosa's time?
    lo hizo en un tiempo récord she did it in record time
    5
    (de un bebé): ¿cuánto tiempo tiene? how old is he?
    Compuestos:
    uptime
    spare time, free time
    C ( en locs):
    a tiempo in time
    no vamos a llegar a tiempo we won't get there in time
    llegas justo a tiempo de echarnos una mano you're just in time to give us a hand
    todavía estamos a tiempo de coger el tren si vamos en taxi we can still catch o we still have time to catch the train if we take a taxi
    piénsatelo, todavía estás a tiempo think about it, there's still time
    con tiempo in good time
    le gusta llegar con tiempo she likes to arrive with time to spare o in good time
    avísame con tiempo let me know in advance o in good time
    si llegan con tiempo pueden ver la galería antes if you arrive early, you can have a look at the gallery beforehand
    al mismo tiempo or a un tiempo at the same time
    no hablen todos al mismo tiempo don't all talk at once o at the same time
    llegaron al mismo tiempo they arrived at the same time
    al tiempo que at the same time as o that
    con el tiempo y una caña … everything in good time
    seguro que va a mejorar, tú dale tiempo al tiempo I'm sure she's going to get better, you just have to be patient o to give it time
    no debemos precipitarnos, hay que dar tiempo al tiempo let's not rush into this, we must be patient
    hacer a tiempo ( RPl): no hice a tiempo a ir al banco I didn't have enough time to go to the bank
    hacerse tiempo (CS); to make time
    hacer tiempo (mientras se espera algo) to while away the time, to kill time; (para hacer algo) to make time;
    ( Dep) to play for time
    matar el tiempo ( fam); to kill time
    robarle tiempo al sueño to have less sleep than one needs, to burn the candle at both ends
    y si no ¡al tiempo! just you wait and see!, mark my words!
    el tiempo es oro time is precious, time is money
    el tiempo todo lo cura time is a great healer
    todo tiempo pasado fue mejor the past always looks better
    D
    1
    (época): en mi(s) tiempo(s) esas cosas no pasaban things like that didn't use to happen in my day o my time
    eran otros tiempos things were different then
    ¡qué tiempos aquellos! those were the days!
    esa música es del tiempo de mi abuela that music is from my grandmother's time
    en aquellos tiempos un helado costaba una peseta at that time o back then o in those days an ice cream used to cost one peseta
    los problemas de nuestro tiempo the problems of our time o age
    en los tiempos que corren these days, nowadays
    desde tiempos inmemoriales from o since time immemorial
    aquéllos eran tiempos difíciles those were difficult times
    en tiempos de paz in times of peace, in peacetime
    estamos viviendo tiempos de crisis we are living in extremely difficult times
    se ha adelantado a su tiempo he is ahead of his time
    hubo un tiempo en que yo pensaba igual there was a time when I thought the same
    ese peinado es del tiempo de Maricastaña ( fam); that hairstyle looks as if it came out of the ark ( colloq), that hairstyle looks really old-fashioned o out-of-date
    2 (temporada) season
    fruta del tiempo fresh fruit, seasonal fruit
    3
    (momento propio, oportuno): eso lo trataremos a su (debido) tiempo we'll deal with o discuss that in due course
    cada cosa a su tiempo everything in (its own) good time
    lo sacó del fuego antes de tiempo she took it off the heat before it was ready
    nació antes de tiempo he was premature, he was born prematurely
    Compuesto:
    Eastertide
    E
    1 ( Dep)
    (en un partido): primer/segundo tiempo first/second half
    medio1 (↑ medio (1))
    2 ( Mec):
    un motor de dos/cuatro tiempos a two-stroke/four-stroke engine
    Compuestos:
    ( Dep) overtime ( AmE), extra time ( BrE); ( Com) period of inactivity
    time out
    ( Méx) overtime ( AmE), extra time ( BrE)
    overtime ( AmE), extra time ( BrE)
    F (compás) tempo, time
    G ( Ling) tense
    tiempo simple/compuesto simple/compound tense
    hace buen tiempo the weather's good o fine, it's good o fine weather, it's fine
    el mal tiempo reinante the prevailing o current bad weather
    nos hizo un tiempo estupendo/asqueroso we had wonderful/terrible weather
    el pronóstico del tiempo the weather forecast
    ¿qué tal el tiempo por ahí? what's the weather like over there?
    del or ( Méx) al tiempo at room temperature
    un vaso de leche del tiempo a glass of milk at room temperature
    a mal tiempo, buena cara I/you/we may as well look on the bright side
    * * *

     

    tiempo sustantivo masculino
    1

    ◊ ¡cómo pasa el tiempo! how time flies!;

    te acostumbrarás con el tiempo you'll get used to it in time;
    perder el tiempo to waste time;
    ¡no hay tiempo que perder! there's no time to lose!;
    para ganar tiempo (in order) to gain time;
    tiempo libre spare time, free time;
    ¿cuánto tiempo hace que no lo ves? how long is it since you last saw him?;
    hace tiempo que no sé de él I haven't heard from him for a long time;
    ya hace tiempo que se marchó she left quite some time ago;
    ¡cuánto tiempo sin verte! I haven't seen you for ages;
    la mayor parte del tiempo most of the time;
    me llevó mucho tiempo it took me a long time;
    no pude quedarme más tiempo I couldn't stay any longer;
    poco tiempo después a short time after;
    de un tiempo a esta parte for some time (now);
    a tiempo completo/parcial full time/part time;
    no vamos a llegar a tiempo we won't get there in time;
    al mismo tiempo at the same time;
    avísame con tiempo let me know in good time;
    ¡qué tiempos aquellos! those were the days!;
    en aquellos tiempos at that time, in those days


    c) (momento propio, oportuno):


    cada cosa a su tiempo everything in (its own) good time

    ◊ ¿cuánto tiempo tiene? how old is he?

    2 (Dep) ( en partido) half;

    3 (Mús) ( compás) tempo, time;
    ( de sinfonía) movement
    4 (Ling) tense
    5 (Meteo) weather;
    ◊ hace buen/mal tiempo the weather's good/bad;

    del or (Méx) al tiempo ‹ bebida› at room temperature
    tiempo sustantivo masculino
    1 (indeterminado) time: llegó a tiempo para ver el espectáculo, he got there in time to see the show
    hace mucho tiempo, a long time ago
    me llevó mucho tiempo, it took me a long time
    la vi poco tiempo después, I saw her a short time after o soon afterwards
    ¿cuánto tiempo tienes para acabarlo?, how long have you got to finish it?
    es tiempo perdido, it's a waste of time
    tómate tu tiempo, take your time
    no puedo quedarme más tiempo, I can't stay any longer
    a su (debido) tiempo, in due course
    a un tiempo/al mismo tiempo, at the same time
    de tiempo en tiempo, from time to time
    tiempo libre, free time
    2 (de un bebé) age: ¿cuánto o qué tiempo tiene?, how old is she?
    3 (época) en mis tiempos de estudiante, in my student days
    nació en tiempos de Luis XIV, he was born in the time of Louis XIV
    malos tiempos o fig tiempo de vacas flacas, hard times o rainy days
    4 Meteor weather
    hace buen tiempo, the weather is good
    tiempo tormentoso, stormy weather
    5 Mús tempo
    6 Dep half
    primer tiempo, first half
    tiempo muerto, time out
    7 Ling tense 8 del tiempo, (temperatura ambiente) póngame un refresco del tiempo, no lo quiero con hielo, could I have a non-refrigerated soft drink, please
    9 Auto (motor) de dos/cuatro tiempos, two-cycle/four-cycle
    ♦ Locuciones: dar tiempo al tiempo, to let matters take their course
    hacer tiempo, to while away the time
    matar el tiempo, to kill time
    Lab a tiempo parcial/completo, part/full time
    con el tiempo, in the course of time
    de un tiempo a esta parte, lately
    ' tiempo' also found in these entries:
    Spanish:
    A
    - acá
    - achuchar
    - adelanto
    - alborotada
    - alborotado
    - alborotarse
    - allá
    - andar
    - anquilosarse
    - antes
    - anticiclónica
    - anticiclónico
    - anticiparse
    - apremiar
    - aprovechada
    - aprovechado
    - apurada
    - apurado
    - aquí
    - áspera
    - áspero
    - atonía
    - atrás
    - avenida
    - avenido
    - bizantina
    - bizantino
    - bochorno
    - cargada
    - cargado
    - cerca
    - coincidir
    - conceder
    - congraciarse
    - contrarreloj
    - contrato
    - corta
    - corto
    - costar
    - cuando
    - cuanta
    - cuanto
    - cundir
    - de
    - debida
    - debido
    - dedicar
    - descontar
    - desde
    English:
    absorb
    - accomplice
    - accustom
    - administration
    - advance
    - advantage
    - after
    - age
    - ago
    - ahead
    - allow
    - as
    - at
    - barring
    - be
    - beautiful
    - before
    - begin
    - behind
    - best
    - between
    - beyond
    - bitter
    - bleak
    - boiling
    - breezy
    - brighten up
    - brisk
    - busy
    - by
    - bygone
    - calm
    - catch up
    - change
    - clear up
    - clock
    - concurrently
    - corner
    - course
    - dawdle
    - demand
    - depend
    - dilly-dally
    - distant
    - drag
    - dull
    - early
    - encroach
    - end
    - enough
    * * *
    tiempo nm
    1. [transcurso, rato, momento] time;
    en poco o [m5] dentro de poco tiempo lo sabremos we will soon know;
    tardé o [m5] me llevó bastante tiempo it took me quite a while o quite a long time;
    es una tarea que lleva mucho tiempo it's a very time-consuming task;
    ¡cómo pasa el tiempo! time flies!;
    todo el tiempo all the time;
    estuvo todo el tiempo de pie he was standing up the whole time;
    al mismo tiempo at the same time;
    al poco tiempo, poco tiempo después soon after(wards);
    podríamos discutirlo al tiempo que comemos we could discuss it while we eat;
    antes de tiempo [nacer] prematurely;
    [florecer, celebrar] early;
    muchos llegaron antes de tiempo a lot of people arrived early;
    a tiempo completo full-time;
    a tiempo parcial part-time;
    a su (debido) tiempo in due course;
    cada cosa a su tiempo everything in due course o in good time;
    a un tiempo at the same time;
    empujaron todos a un tiempo they all pushed together o at the same time;
    cada cierto tiempo every so often;
    ¿cada cuánto tiempo tiene que tomarlo? how often o frequently does he have to take it?;
    con el tiempo in time;
    de tiempo en tiempo from time to time, now and then;
    de un tiempo a esta parte recently, for a while now;
    dar tiempo al tiempo to give things time;
    el tiempo lo dirá time will tell;
    ganar tiempo to save time;
    hacer tiempo to pass the time;
    RP
    hacerse tiempo to make time, to find time;
    matar el tiempo to kill time;
    perder el tiempo to waste time;
    no hay tiempo que perder there's no time to lose;
    el tiempo es oro time is money;
    el tiempo todo lo cura time is a great healer
    Informát tiempo de acceso access time; Informát tiempo de búsqueda search time;
    tiempo de cocción cooking time;
    Fot tiempo de exposición exposure time;
    tiempo libre: [m5] no me queda mucho tiempo libre I don't have much free o spare time any more;
    te dan tiempo libre para asuntos personales they give you time off for personal matters;
    tiempo muerto idle time;
    tiempo de ocio leisure time;
    Informát tiempo real real time; Informát tiempo de respuesta response time;
    tiempo universal coordinado Coordinated Universal Time
    2. [periodo disponible, suficiente] time;
    ¡se acabó el tiempo! pueden ir entregando los exámenes time's up, start handing in your papers!;
    a tiempo (para algo/de hacer algo) in time (for sth/to do sth);
    no llegamos a tiempo de ver el principio we didn't arrive in time to see o for the beginning;
    estar a tiempo de hacer algo to be in time to do sth;
    si quieres apuntarte, aún estás a tiempo if you want to join in, you still have time o it's not too late;
    con tiempo (de sobra) with plenty of time to spare, in good time;
    ¿nos dará tiempo? will we have (enough) time?;
    no me dio tiempo a o [m5] no tuve tiempo de decírselo I didn't have (enough) time to tell her;
    dame tiempo y yo mismo lo haré give me (a bit of) time and I'll do it myself;
    me faltó tiempo para terminarlo I didn't have (enough) time to finish it;
    Fam Irónico
    le faltó tiempo para ir y contárselo a todo el mundo she wasted no time in telling everyone about it;
    sacar tiempo para hacer algo to find (the) time to do sth;
    ¿tienes tiempo para tomar algo? do you have time for a drink?;
    tenemos todo el tiempo del mundo we have all the time in the world
    3. [periodo largo] long time;
    ¿cuánto tiempo hace (de eso)? how long ago (was that)?;
    ¿cuánto tiempo hace que no vas al teatro? how long is it since you went to the theatre?;
    ¡cuánto tiempo sin verte! it's been ages since I saw you!, I haven't seen you for ages!;
    hace tiempo que it is a long time since;
    hace tiempo que no vive aquí he hasn't lived here for some time;
    hace mucho tiempo que no lo veo I haven't seen him for ages;
    tiempo atrás some time ago;
    Méx
    tener tiempo de algo: tiene tiempo de estudiar lingüística she's been studying linguistics for a long time;
    tómate tu tiempo (para hacerlo) take your time (over it o to do it)
    4. [época] time;
    aquél fue un tiempo de paz y felicidad those were peaceful and happy times, it was a time of peace and happiness;
    corren o [m5] son malos tiempos para el estudio del latín it isn't a good time to be studying Latin;
    del tiempo [fruta] of the season;
    las ideas de nuestro tiempo the ideas of our time o day;
    el mejor boxeador de todos los tiempos the greatest ever boxer, the greatest boxer of all time;
    mi álbum favorito de todos los tiempos my all-time favourite album, my favourite ever album;
    en aquellos tiempos, por aquel tiempo in those days, back then, at that time;
    en los buenos tiempos in the good old days;
    en mis tiempos in my day o time;
    Johnson, en otro tiempo plusmarquista mundial,… Johnson, once the world record-holder o the former world record-holder,…;
    en tiempo(s) de Napoleón in Napoleon's time o day;
    eran otros tiempos (entonces) things were different (back) then;
    ¡qué tiempos aquellos! those were the days!;
    en tiempos [antiguamente] in former times;
    en tiempos de Maricastaña donkey's years ago;
    ser del tiempo del Perú, RP [m5] ñaupa o Chile [m5] ñauca to be ancient, to be as old as the hills
    5. [edad] age;
    ¿qué tiempo tiene? how old is he?
    6. [clima] weather;
    ¿qué tal está el tiempo?, ¿qué tal tiempo hace? what's the weather like?;
    buen/mal tiempo good/bad weather;
    hizo buen/mal tiempo the weather was good/bad;
    nos hizo un tiempo horrible we had terrible weather;
    del tiempo, Méx [m5] al tiempo [bebida] at room temperature;
    estas cervezas están del tiempo these beers aren't cold o haven't been chilled;
    si el tiempo lo permite o [m5] no lo impide weather permitting;
    hace un tiempo de perros it's a foul day;
    poner al mal tiempo buena cara to put a brave face on things
    7. Dep [mitad] half;
    [cuarto] quarter;
    primer/segundo tiempo first/second half
    tiempo añadido injury o stoppage time;
    tiempo de descuento injury o stoppage time;
    tiempo muerto time-out;
    8. [marca] [en carreras] time;
    consiguió un tiempo excelente his time was excellent;
    lograron clasificarse por tiempos they qualified as fastest losers
    tiempo intermedio split time [at halfway point];
    tiempo parcial split time;
    tiempo récord record time;
    en un tiempo récord in record time
    9. [movimiento] movement;
    levantó las pesas en dos tiempos he lifted the weights in two movements;
    motor de cuatro tiempos four-stroke engine
    10. Gram tense
    tiempo compuesto compound tense;
    tiempo simple simple tense
    11. Mús [ritmo] tempo;
    [movimiento] movement; [compás] time
    * * *
    m
    1 time;
    a tiempo in time;
    a un tiempo, al mismo tiempo at the same time;
    antes de tiempo llegar ahead of time, early; celebrar victoria too soon;
    a su (debido) tiempo in due course;
    cada cosa a su tiempo all in good time;
    con tiempo in good time, early;
    dar tiempo al tiempo give things time;
    hacer tiempo while away the time;
    desde hace mucho tiempo for a long time;
    hace mucho tiempo a long time ago;
    de tiempo en tiempo from time to time;
    de un tiempo a esta parte for some time now;
    durante algún tiempo for some time;
    por poco tiempo for a short time;
    hace tanto tiempo it’s so long ago;
    el tiempo es oro time is money;
    con el tiempo, andando el tiempo with time, in time;
    trabajar a tiempo completo/parcial work full/part time;
    le faltó tiempo para … fig he couldn’t wait to…;
    poner al mal tiempo buena cara fig look on the bright side;
    volver el tiempo atrás fig turn the clock back
    2 ( época)
    :
    en mis tiempos in my day
    3 ( clima) weather;
    hace buen/mal tiempo the weather’s fine/bad
    4 GRAM tense
    5 DEP de juego half;
    medio tiempo half time
    6 ( edad)
    :
    ¿qué tiempo tiene? de un niño how old is he?
    * * *
    tiempo nm
    1) : time
    justo a tiempo: just in time
    perder tiempo: to waste time
    tiempo libre: spare time
    2) : period, age
    en los tiempos que corren: nowadays
    3) : season, moment
    antes de tiempo: prematurely
    4) : weather
    hace buen tiempo: the weather is fine, it's nice outside
    5) : tempo (in music)
    6) : half (in sports)
    7) : tense (in grammar)
    * * *
    1. (período, momento) time
    2. (período largo) long time / ages
    4. (parte) half [pl. halves]
    ¿cuánto tiempo tiene tu bebé? how old is your baby?
    6. (verbal) tense
    ¿cuánto tiempo hace que...? how long...?
    ¿cuánto tiempo hace que conoces a Susana? how long have you known Susana?
    ¡cuánto tiempo sin verte! it's been ages since I saw you!
    tiempo libre free time / spare time

    Spanish-English dictionary > tiempo

  • 15 plus

    c black plus [ply]
    ━━━━━━━━━
    ━━━━━━━━━
    ━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
    ► Lorsque plus fait partie d'une locution comme d'autant plus, non... plus, reportez-vous aussi à l'autre mot.
    ━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
    1. <
    ► ne... plus not any more
    • je ne reviendrai plus/plus jamais I won't/I'll never come back again
    • t'as plus de pain ? (inf) haven't you got any bread left?► plus que ( = seulement)
    2. <
    ━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
    ► Lorsque l'adjectif ou l'adverbe est court (une ou deux syllabes), son comparatif se forme généralement avec la terminaison er.
    ━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
    ━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
    ► Lorsque l'adjectif se termine par y, son comparatif est formé avec ier.
    ━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
    ━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
    ► Lorsque l'adjectif n'a qu'une syllabe brève et se termine par une seule consonne, cette consonne est doublée.
    ━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
    ━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
    ► Les mots de deux syllabes se terminant en ing, ed, s, ly forment leur comparatif avec more plutôt qu'en ajoutant la terminaison er.
    ━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
    ━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
    ► Attention aux comparatifs irréguliers.
    ━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
    ━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
    ► Lorsque l'adjectif ou l'adverbe est long (au moins trois syllabes), son comparatif se forme généralement avec more plutôt qu'en ajoutant la terminaison er.
    ━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
       d. (locutions)
    ► plus de ( = davantage de) more ; ( = plus que) over
    • il roulait à plus de 100 km/h he was driving at more than or over 100km per hour
    ► à plus ! (inf) see you later!
    ► plus que + adjectif ou adverbe
    • j'en ai plus qu'assez ! I've had more than enough of this!► de plus ( = en outre) (en tête de phrase) moreover
    • c'est dangereux, de plus c'est illégal it's dangerous, and what's more, it's illegal
    • vous n'avez pas une chaise en plus ? you wouldn't have a spare chair?
    • en plus de cela on top of that► en plus + adjectif
    • il ressemble à sa mère, mais en plus blond he's like his mother only fairer
    • il est compétent, mais ni plus ni moins que sa sœur he's competent, but neither more nor less so than his sister► plus... moins the more... the less
    • plus on le connaît, moins on l'apprécie the more you get to know him, the less you like him► plus... plus the more... the more
    • plus il en a, plus il en veut the more he has, the more he wants► plus ou moins ( = à peu près, presque) more or less
    3. <
       a. ► le plus + verbe most
       b. ► le plus + adjectif ou adverbe court
    ━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
    ► Lorsque l'adjectif ou l'adverbe est court (une ou deux syllabes), son superlatif se forme avec la terminaison est.
    ━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
    ━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
    ► Lorsque l'adjectif se termine par y, son superlatif se forme avec la terminaison iest.
    ━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
    ━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
    ► Lorsque l'adjectif n'a qu'une syllabe brève et se termine par une seule consonne, cette consonne est doublée.
    ━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
    ━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
    ► Les mots de deux syllabes se terminant en ing, ed, s, ly forment leur superlatif avec most plutôt qu'en ajoutant la terminaison est.
    ━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
    ━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
    ► Lorsque la comparaison se fait entre deux personnes ou deux choses, on utilise le comparatif au lieu du superlatif.
    ━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
       c. ► le plus + adjectif ou adverbe long
    ━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
    ► Lorsque l'adjectif ou l'adverbe est long (au moins trois syllabes), son superlatif se forme avec the most plutôt qu'en ajoutant la terminaison est.
    ━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
    ━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
    ► Lorsque la comparaison se fait entre deux personnes ou deux choses, on utilise le comparatif au lieu du superlatif.
    ━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
       d. ► le plus de + nom the most
       e. (locutions)
    ► le plus... possible
    • ça vaut 100 € au plus it's worth 100 euros at the most
    • il a trente ans, tout au plus he's thirty at most
    4. <
    • tous les voisins, plus leurs enfants all the neighbours, plus their children
    5. <
    c black   b. ( = avantage) plus
    • ici, parler breton est un plus indéniable being able to speak Breton is definitely a plus here
    ━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
    ✦ The s of plus is never pronounced when used in negatives, eg il ne la voit plus. When used in comparatives the s is generally pronounced s, eg il devrait lire plus, although there are exceptions, notably plus preceding an adjective or adverb, eg plus grand, plus vite. Before a vowel sound, the comparative plus is pronounced z, eg plus âgé.
    * * *

    I
    1. ply, plys, plyz

    8 plus 3 égale 11 — 8 and ou plus 3 equals 11

    plus 10° — plus 10°


    2.
    adverbe de comparaison

    je ne peux pas faire plus — I can do no more, I can't do any more

    plus j'y pense, moins je comprends — the more I think about it, the less I understand

    qui plus est — furthermore, what's more

    c'est le même modèle en plus petit — it's the same model, only smaller

    trois heures plus tôt/tard — three hours earlier/later

    plus tu te coucheras tôt, moins tu seras fatigué — the earlier you go to bed, the less tired you'll be


    3.
    adverbe de négation

    elle ne fume plus — she doesn't smoke any more ou any longer, she no longer smokes

    plus besoin de se presser — (colloq) there's no need to hurry any more

    il n'y a plus d'œufs — there are no more eggs, there aren't any eggs left

    j'entre dans le garage, plus de voiture! — I went into the garage, the car was gone!


    4.
    plus de déterminant indéfini

    plus tu mangeras de bonbons, plus tu auras de caries — the more sweets GB ou candy US you eat, the more cavities you'll have

    il y en a plus d'un qui voudrait être à sa place — quite a few people would like to be in his/her position

    je n'ai pas pris plus de crème que toi — I didn't take any more cream than you did, I took no more cream than you did


    5.
    au plus locution adverbiale at the most

    6.
    de plus locution adverbiale
    1) ( en outre) furthermore, moreover, what's more

    une fois de plus — once more, once again

    9% de plus — 9% more


    7.
    en plus locution

    le même modèle avec le toit ouvrant en plus — the same model, only with a sunroof

    les taxes en plus — plus tax, tax not included


    II plys
    nom masculin invariable
    2) (colloq) ( avantage) plus (colloq)

    ••
    plus/le plus used in comparison (meaning more/the most) is pronounced [ply] before a consonant and [plyz] before a vowel. It is pronounced [plys] when at the end of a clause. In the plus de and plus que structures both [ply] and [plys] are generally used
    plus used in ne plus (meaning no longer/not any more) is always pronounced [ply] except before a vowel, in which case it is pronounced [plyz]: il n'habite plus ici [plyzisi]
    1 adjectifs et adverbes courts
    En règle générale on ajoute ‘-er’ à la fin de l'adjectif/adverbe: plus grand/petit/simple = taller/smaller/simpler; plus longtemps/vite = longer/faster
    - pour certains mots dont l'unique voyelle est une voyelle brève, on double la consonne finale: big/bigger, sad/sadder, dim/dimmer, wet/wetter etc
    - attention aux adjectifs en ‘y’: sunny devient sunnier, pretty/prettier, happy/happier etc
    2 adjectifs et adverbes longs
    On ajoute more devant le mot: plus beau/compétent/intéressant = more beautiful/competent/interesting; plus facilement/sérieusement = more easily/seriously
    - certains mots de deux syllabes admettent les deux formes: simple peut produire simpler ou more simple, handsome/handsomer ou more handsome etc
    - certains mots de deux syllabes n'admettent que la forme avec more: callous/more callous, cunning/more cunning
    - les adverbes se terminant par ‘-ly’ n'admettent que la forme avec more: quickly/more quickly, slowly/more slowly etc
    1 adjectifs et adverbes courts
    En règle générale on ajoute ‘(e)st’ à la fin du mot: le plus grand/petit/simple = the tallest/smallest/simplest; le plus longtemps/vite = the longest/fastest
    - pour certains mots dont l'unique voyelle est une voyelle brève, on double la consonne finale: big- the biggest, sad- the saddest, dim- the dimmest etc
    - attention aux adjectifs en ‘y’: sunny devient the sunniest, pretty/the prettiest, happy/the happiest etc
    2 adjectifs et adverbes longs
    On ajoute the most devant le mot: le plus beau/compétent/intéressant = the most beautiful/competent/interesting; le plus facilement/sérieusement = the most easily/seriously
    - certains mots de deux syllabes admettent les deux formes: simple/the simplest ou the most simple, clever/the cleverest ou the most clever etc
    - certains mots de deux syllabes n'admettent que la forme avec the most: callous/the most callous, cunning/the most cunning etc
    - les adverbes en ‘-ly’ n'admettent que la forme avec the most: quickly/the most quickly, slowly/the most slowly etc
    Attention: lorsque la comparaison ne porte que sur deux éléments on utilise la forme du comparatif: le plus doué des deux = the more gifted of the two; la voiture la plus rapide des deux = the faster car
    On trouvera ci-contre exemples et exceptions illustrant les différentes fonctions de plus. On trouvera également des exemples de plus dans les notes d'usage. Voir l'index
    * * *
    ply, plys
    1. adv

    ne... plus — no longer, not... any more

    Il ne travaille plus ici. — He's no longer working here., He doesn't work here any more.

    Je ne veux plus le voir. — I don't want to see him any more., I no longer want to see him.

    ne plus avoir de qch; Je n'ai plus d'argent. — I've got no more money., I've got no money left

    Je n'ai plus de pain. — I've got no bread left., I've got no more bread.

    2) (comparatif: devant un adjectif) more

    Il fait un peu plus froid qu'hier. — It's a bit colder than yesterday.

    Elle est plus grande que moi. — She's bigger than me.

    Il est plus intelligent que son frère. — He's more intelligent than his brother.

    3) (comparaison: non suivi d'un adjectif)

    Il travaille plus. — He works more.

    Il travaille plus que moi. — He works more than me.

    4)

    plus de; Il nous faut plus de pain. — We need more bread.

    plus de 3 heures — more than 3 hours, over 3 hours

    Il y avait plus de dix personnes. — There were more than 10 people.

    plus de minuit — after midnight, past midnight

    5)

    de plus; Il a 3 ans de plus que moi. — He's 3 years older than me.

    Le voyage a pris trois heures de plus que prévu. — The journey took 3 hours longer than planned.

    Il nous faut un joueur de plus. — We need one more player.

    6)

    en plus; 3 kilos en plus — 3 kilos more

    J'ai apporté quelques gâteaux en plus. — I brought a few more cakes.

    en plus de; Deux personnes sont arrivées en plus de celles qui étaient déjà là. — Two more people came, in addition to those already there.

    7)

    plus... plus... — the more... the more...

    Plus il gagne d'argent, plus il en veut. — The more money he earns, the more he wants.

    8)

    Il y a de plus en plus de touristes par ici. — There are more and more tourists round here.

    de plus en plus (suivi d'un adjectif) Il fait de plus en plus chaud. — It's getting hotter and hotter.

    9)

    ni plus ni moins — no more, no less

    le plus; la plus; les plus — the most

    C'est le plus grand de la famille. — He's the tallest in his family., (sans adjectif, modifiant un verbe)

    C'est ce qu'elle aime le plus. — That's what she likes most.

    de plus — what's more, moreover

    en plus de cela... — what is more...

    2. conj

    Quatre plus deux égalent six. — 4 plus 2 is 6.

    3. nm
    (= avantage) plus
    * * *
    I.
    plus ⇒ Note d'usage
    A prép
    1 ( dans une addition) 8 plus 3 égale 11 8 and 3 equals 11, 8 plus 3 equals 11; on nous a servi du fromage, un dessert plus du café we were served cheese, a dessert and coffee (as well);
    2 ( pour exprimer une valeur) un jour il faisait moins 5°, le lendemain plus 10° one day it was minus 5°, the next plus 10°.
    B adv de comparaison
    1 ( modifiant un verbe) ( comparatif) more; ( superlatif) le plus the most; il mange/travaille plus (que moi) he eats/works more (than I do ou than me); tu devrais demander plus you should ask for more; je ne peux pas faire plus I can do no more, I can't do any more, I can't do more than that; elle en sait plus que lui sur le sujet she knows more about the subject than he does; c'est plus que je ne peux supporter it's more than I can bear; elle l'aime plus que tout she loves him/her more than anything; il est plus à plaindre qu'autre chose he's more to be pitied than anything else; c'est plus que bien it's more than just good; elle est plus que jolie she's more than just pretty; il a fait plus que l'embaucher, il l'a aussi formé he did more than just hire him, he also trained him; j'en ai plus qu'assez I've had more than enough; elle mange deux fois/trois fois plus que lui she eats twice/three times as much as he does; plus je gagne, plus je dépense the more I earn, the more I spend; plus j'y pense, moins je comprends the more I think about it, the less I understand; plus ça va as time goes on; qui plus est furthermore, what's more; c'est lui qui m'a le plus appris he's the one who taught me the most; quel pays aimes-tu le plus? which country do you like best?; de plus en plus more and more; il fume de plus en plus he smokes more and more;
    2 ( modifiant un adjectif) ( comparatif) more; ( superlatif) most; deux fois plus vieux/cher twice as old/expensive (que as); trois/quatre fois plus cher three/four times as expensive (que as); il n'est pas plus riche que moi he's no richer than I am ou than me, he isn't any richer than I am ou than me; c'est le même modèle en plus petit it's the same model, only smaller; il est on ne peut plus gentil/désagréable he's as nice/unpleasant as can be; il est plus ou moins fou he's more or less insane; il est plus ou moins artiste he's an artist of sorts; la cuisine était plus ou moins propre the kitchen wasn't particularly clean, the kitchen was clean after a fashion; il a été plus ou moins poli he wasn't particularly polite; ils étaient plus ou moins ivres they were a bit drunk; le plus heureux des hommes the happiest of men; la plus belle de toutes the most beautiful of all; mon vœu le plus cher my dearest wish; l'arbre le plus gros que j'aie jamais vu the biggest tree I've ever seen; son livre le plus court his shortest book; c'est ce qu'il y a de plus beau/important au monde it's the most beautiful/important thing in the world; un livre des plus intéressants a most interesting book; un individu des plus méprisables a most despicable individual; de plus en plus difficile more and more difficult; de plus en plus chaud hotter and hotter;
    3 ( modifiant un adverbe) ( comparatif) more; ( superlatif) most; trois heures plus tôt/tard three hours earlier/later; deux fois plus longtemps twice as long (que as); trois/quatre fois plus longtemps three/four times as long (que as); ils ne sont pas restés plus longtemps que nous they didn't stay any longer than we did ou than us; il l'a fait plus ou moins bien he didn't do it very well; de plus en plus loin further and further; plus tu te coucheras tard, plus tu auras de mal à te lever the later you go to bed, the harder it'll be for you to get up; plus tu te coucheras tôt, moins tu seras fatigué the earlier you go to bed, the less tired you'll be; c'est moi qui y vais le plus souvent I go there the most often; ça s'est passé le plus simplement/naturellement du monde it happened quite simply/naturally.
    C adv de négation elle ne fume plus she doesn't smoke any more ou any longer, she no longer smokes, she's given up smoking; il n'habite plus ici he no longer lives here, he doesn't live here any more ou any longer; le grand homme n'est plus the great man is no more; elle ne veut plus le voir she doesn't want to see him any more ou any longer, she no longer wants to see him; il a décidé de ne plus y aller he decided to stop going there; je ne veux plus en entendre parler I don't want to hear any more about it; il n'y est plus (jamais) retourné he never went back there (again); plus jamais ça! never again!; nous ne faisons plus ce modèle we no longer do this model, we don't do this model any more ou any longer; il n'a plus vingt ans ( il n'est plus très jeune) he's not twenty any more, he's no longer twenty; nous n'avons plus d'espoir we've no more hope, we no longer have any hope, we've given up hoping; plus besoin de se presser○ there's no longer any need to hurry, there's no more need to hurry, there's no need to hurry any more; il n'y a plus de pain/d'œufs there is no more bread/there are no more eggs, there isn't any bread left/there aren't any eggs left; je ne veux plus de vin I don't want any more wine; il n'y a plus rien there's nothing left; plus rien ne m'intéresse nothing interests me any more; je ne voyais plus rien I could no longer see anything, I couldn't see a thing any more; il n'y a plus personne dans la pièce there's nobody left in the room, there's no longer anybody in the room; il n'y a plus aucun crayon there aren't any pencils left, there are no more pencils; il n'y a plus aucun problème there's no longer any problem; ce n'est plus du courage, c'est de la folie it's no longer bravery, it's foolhardiness; j'entre dans le garage, plus de voiture○! I went into the garage, the car was gone○!; ce n'est plus qu'une question de jours it's only a matter of days now; il n'y a plus qu'une solution there's only one solution left; il ne restait plus que quelques bouteilles there were only a few bottles left, there was nothing left but a few bottles; il n'y a plus que lui qui puisse nous aider only he can help us now; plus que trois jours avant les vacances! only three days left ou to go until the vacation!; nous n'avons plus qu'à rentrer à la maison all we can do now is go home; il ne me reste plus qu'à vous remercier it only remains for me to thank you.
    D plus de dét indéf
    1 ( avec un nom dénombrable) trois/deux fois plus de livres/verres que three times/twice as many books/glasses as; c'est là que j'ai vu le plus de serpents that's where I saw the most snakes; c'est lui qui a le plus de livres he's got the most books; le joueur qui a le plus de chances de gagner the player who is most likely to win; les jeunes qui posent le plus de problèmes the young people who pose the most problems; c'est le candidat qui a remporté le plus de voix he's the candidate who won the most votes; plus tu mangeras de bonbons, plus tu auras de caries the more sweets GB ou candy US you eat, the more cavities you'll have; il y en a plus d'un qui voudrait être à sa place quite a few people would like to be in his/her position;
    2 ( avec un nom non dénombrable) je n'ai pas pris plus de crème que toi I didn't take any more cream than you did, I took no more cream than you did; il n'a pas plus d'imagination que sa sœur he has no more imagination than his sister, he hasn't got any more imagination than his sister; trois/deux fois plus de vin/talent three times/twice as much wine/talent (que as); le joueur qui a gagné le plus d'argent the player who won the most money;
    3 ( avec un numéral) elle ne possède pas plus de 50 disques she has no more than 50 records; une foule de plus de 10 000 personnes a crowd of more than ou over 10,000 people; il a plus de 40 ans he's over 40, he's more than 40 years old; les gens de plus de 60 ans people over 60; les plus de 60 ans the over-sixties; il était déjà bien plus de onze heures/midi it was already well past ou after eleven o'clock/midday.
    E au plus loc adv at the most; tout au plus at the very most, at the outside.
    F de plus loc adv
    1 ( en outre) furthermore, moreover, what's more;
    2 ( en supplément) j'ai mangé deux pommes de plus qu'elle I ate two apples more than she did; donnez-moi deux pommes de plus give me two more apples; ça nous a pris deux heures de plus que la dernière fois it took us two hours longer than last time; j'ai besoin de deux heures de plus I need two more hours; il a trois ans de plus que sa sœur he's three years older than his sister; une fois de plus once more, once again; l'augmentation représente 9% de plus que l'année précédente the rise is 9% more than last year.
    G en plus loc en plus (de cela) on top of that; il est arrivé en retard et en plus (de cela) il a commencé à se plaindre he arrived late and what' s more ou on top of that he started complaining; c 'est le même modèle avec le toit ouvrant en plus it's the same model, only with a sunroof; c'est tout le portrait de son père, la moustache en plus he's the image of his father, only with a moustache GB ou mustache US; il a reçu 100 euros en plus de son salaire habituel he got 100 euros on top of his usual salary; en plus de son métier d'ingénieur il élève des tatous besides his job as an engineer, he breeds armadillos; les taxes en plus plus tax, tax not included; il s'est passé quelque chose en plus something else happened as well. A note on pronunciation: plus/le plus used in comparison (meaning more/the most) is pronounced [ply] before a consonant and [plyz] before a vowel. It is pronounced [plys] when at the end of a clause. In the plus de and plus que structures both [ply] and [plys] are generally used. plus used in ne plus (meaning no longer/not any more) is always pronounced [ply] except before a vowel, in which case it is pronounced [plyz]: il n'habite plus ici [plyzisi].
    II.
    plus nm
    1 Math plus; le signe plus the plus sign;
    2 ○( avantage) plus○; son expérience d'enseignant constitue un plus pour lui his teaching experience is a point in his favourGB ou is a plus○.
    [ply(s)] adverbe
    A.[COMPARATIF DE SUPÉRIORITÉ]
    1. [suivi d'un adverbe, d'un adjectif]
    c'est plus rouge qu'orange it's red rather than ou it's more red than orange
    c'est plus que gênant it's embarrassing, to say the least
    elle a eu le prix mais elle n'en est pas plus fière pour ça she got the award, but it didn't make her any prouder for all that
    je veux la même, en plus large I want the same, only bigger
    encore plus beau more handsome still, even more handsome
    cinq fois plus cher five times dearer ou as dear ou more expensive
    2. [avec un verbe] more
    B.[SUPERLATIF DE SUPÉRIORITÉ]
    1. [suivi d'un adverbe, d'un adjectif]
    2. [précédé d'un verbe] most
    C.[ADVERBE DE NÉGATION]
    1. [avec 'ne']
    2. [tour elliptique]
    plus de glace pour moi, merci no more ice cream for me, thanks
    ————————
    [ply(s)] adjectif
    ————————
    [ply(s)] conjonction
    il fait plus 5º it's 5º above freezing, it's plus 5º
    2. [en sus de] plus
    le transport, plus le logement, plus la nourriture, ça revient cher travel, plus ou and accommodation, plus ou then food, (all) work out quite expensive
    plus le fait que... plus ou together with the fact that...
    ————————
    [ply(s)] nom masculin
    2. [avantage, atout] plus, bonus, asset
    au plus locution adverbiale
    [au maximum] at the most ou outside
    de plus locution adverbiale
    1. [en supplément] extra, another, more
    il est content, que te faut-il de plus? he's happy, what more do you want?
    un mot/une minute de plus et je m'en allais another word/minute and I would have left
    10 euros de plus ou de moins, quelle différence? 10 euros either way, what difference does it make?
    2. [en trop] too many
    en recomptant, je trouve trente points de plus on adding it up again, I get thirty points too many
    de plus, il m'a menti what's more, he lied to me
    de plus en plus locution adverbiale
    1. [suivi d'un adjectif] more and more, increasingly
    [suivi d'un adverbe] more and more
    de plus en plus dangereux more and more ou increasingly dangerous
    ça devient de plus en plus facile/compliqué it's getting easier and easier/more and more complicated
    2. [précédé d'un verbe]
    de plus en plus de locution déterminante
    [suivi d'un nom comptable] more and more, a growing number of
    [suivi d'un nom non comptable] more and more
    de plus en plus de gens more and more people, an increasing number of people
    il y a de plus en plus de demande pour ce produit demand for this product is increasing, there is more and more demand for this product
    des plus locution adverbiale
    en plus locution adverbiale
    1. [en supplément] extra (avant nom)
    les boissons sont en plus drinks are extra, you pay extra for the drinks
    10 euros en plus ou en moins, quelle différence? 10 euros either way, what difference does it make?
    [en trop] spare
    a. [à la fin du jeu] I've got one card left over
    b. [en distribuant] I've got one card too many
    [en cadeau] as well, on top of that
    elle a une excellente technique et en plus, elle a de la force her technique's first-class and she's got strength too
    et elle m'avait menti, en plus! not only that but she'd lied to me (as well)!
    3. [d'ailleurs] besides, what's more, moreover
    je ne tiens pas à le faire et, en plus, je n'ai pas le temps I'm not too keen on doing it, and besides ou what's more, I've no time
    en plus de locution prépositionnelle
    [en supplément de] besides, on top of, in addition to
    en plus du squash, elle fait du tennis besides (playing) squash, she plays tennis
    et plus locution adverbiale
    45 kilos et plus over 45 kilos, 45 odd kilos
    ni plus ni moins locution adverbiale
    je te donne une livre, ni plus ni moins I'll give you one pound, no more no less
    tu t'es trompé, ni plus ni moins you were mistaken, that's all
    non plus locution adverbiale
    je ne sais pas — moi non plus! I don't know — neither do I ou nor do I ou me neither!
    on ne peut plus locution adverbiale
    plus de locution déterminante
    1. [comparatif, suivi d'un nom] more
    [suivi d'un nombre] more than, over
    elle roulait à plus de 150 km/h she was driving at more than 150 km/h ou doing over 150 km/h
    2. [superlatif, suivi d'un nom]
    les plus de 20 ans people over 20, the over-20s
    plus... moins locution correlative
    the more... the less
    plus il vieillit, moins il a envie de sortir the older he gets, the less he feels like going out
    plus ça va, moins je la comprends I understand her less and less (as time goes on)
    plus... plus locution correlative
    the more... the more
    plus je réfléchis, plus je me dis que... the more I think (about it), the more I'm convinced that...
    plus ça va, plus je me demande si... the longer it goes on, the more I wonder if...
    plus ou moins locution adverbiale
    c'est plus ou moins cher, selon les endroits prices vary according to where you are
    qui plus est locution adverbiale
    what's ou what is more
    sans plus locution adverbiale
    c'était bien, sans plus it was nice, but nothing more
    tout au plus locution adverbiale
    c'est une mauvaise grippe, tout au plus it's a bad case of flu, at the most

    Dictionnaire Français-Anglais > plus

  • 16 ὁ

    ὁ, [full] ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,
    A demonstr. Pronoun.
    B in [dialect] Att., definite or prepositive Article.
    C in [dialect] Ep., the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nom. masc. and fem. sg. and pl., ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codd. and most printed books, exc. when used as the relative ; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, αἳ ; the nom. forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by A.D.Pron.8.7 not to be enclitic. The forms τῶν, τοῖς, ταῖς were barytone (i. e. τὼν, τοὶς, ταὶς ) in [dialect] Aeol. acc. to Aristarch. ap. A.D.Synt.51.26. For οἱ, αἱ some dialects (not Cypr., cf. Inscr.Cypr.135.30H., nor Cret., cf.Leg.Gort. 5.28, nor Lesbian, cf. Alc.81, Sapph.Supp.5.1 ) and Hom. have τοί, ταί (though οἱ, αἱ are also found in Hom.): other Homeric forms are gen. sg. τοῖο, gen. and dat. dual

    τοῖιν Od.18.34

    , al.: gen. pl. fem. τάων [pron. full] [ᾱ], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι, never ταῖσι or ταῖς in Hom.— In [dialect] Dor. and all other dialects exc. [dialect] Att. and [dialect] Ion. the fem. forms preserve the old [pron. full] ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence [dialect] Dor. etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶς ; the gen. pl. τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶν ; the gen. sg. is in many places τῶ, acc. pl. τώς, but Cret., etc., τόνς (Leg.Gort.7.7, al.) or τός (ib.3.50, al.) ; in Lesbian [dialect] Aeol. the acc. pl. forms are τοὶς, ταὶς, IG12(2).645 A13, B62 ; dat. pl. τοῖς, ταῖς (or τοὶς, ταὶς, v. supr.), ib.645 A8, ib.1.6 ; ταῖσι as demonstr., Sapph. 16. The [dialect] Att. Poets also used the [dialect] Ion. and [dialect] Ep. forms τοῖσι, ταῖσι ; and in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν.., τοὶ δέ.., for οἱ μέν.., οἱ δέ.., not only in lyr., as A.Pers. 584, Th. 295, 298 ;

    οἱ μέν.. τοὶ δ' S.Aj. 1404

     (anap.) ; but even in a trimeter, A.Pers. 424. In [dialect] Att. the dual has usu. only one gender, τὼ θεώ (for τὰ θεά) And.1.113 sq. ; τὼ πόλεε Foed. ap. Th.5.23 ;

    τὼ ἡμέρα X.Cyr.1.2.11

     ;

    τὼ χεῖρε Id.Mem.2.3.18

     ;

    τοῖν χεροῖν Pl.Tht. 155e

     ;

    τοῖν γενεσέοιν Id.Phd. 71e

     ;

    τοῖν πολέοιν Isoc.4.75

     (τά S.Ant. 769, Ar.Eq. 424, 484,

    ταῖν Lys.19.17

    , Is.5.16, etc. have been corrected) ; in Arc. the form τοῖς functions as gen. dual fem.,

    μεσακόθεν τοῖς κράναιυν Schwyzer664.8

     (Orchom., iv B.C.):—in Elean and [dialect] Boeot. ὁ, ἡ (ἁ), τό, with the addition of -ί, = ὅδε, ἥδε, τόδε, nom.pl. masc. τυΐ the following men, Schwyzer485.14 (Thespiae, iii B.C.), al., cf. infr. VIII. 5. (With ὁ, ἁ, cf. Skt. demonstr. pron. sa, sā, Goth. sa, sō, ONorse sá, sú, Old Lat. acc. sum, sam (Enn.): —with τό [from Τόδ] cf. Skt. tat (tad), Lat. is-tud, Goth. pata: —with τοί cf. Skt. te, Lith. tĩe, OE. pá, etc.:—with τάων cf. Skt. tāsām, Lat. is-tarum:— the origin of the relative ὅς, ἥ, ὅ (q. v.) is different.)
    A ὁ, ἡ, τό, DEMONSTR. PRONOUN, that, the oldest and in Hom. the commonest sense: freq. also in Hdt. (1.86,5.35,al.), and sts. in Trag. (mostly in lyr., A.Supp. 1047, etc.; in trimeters, Id.Th. 197, Ag.7, Eu. 174 ; τῶν γάρ.., τῆς γάρ.., Id.Supp. 358, S.OT 1082 ; seldom in [dialect] Att. Prose, exc. in special phrases, v. infr. VI, VII):
    I joined with a Subst., to call attention to it, ὁ Τυδεΐδης he—Tydeus' famous son, Il. 11.660; τὸν Χρύσην that venerable man Chryses, I.II: and so with Appellat., Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων N.— thataged man, 7.324 ; αἰετοῦ.. τοῦ θηρητῆρος the eagle, that which is called hunter, 21.252, al. ; also to define and give emphasis, τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, 20.181 ; οἴχετ' ἀνὴρ ὤριστος a man is gone, and he the best, 11.288, cf. 13.433, al.: sts. with words between the Pron. and Noun,

    αὐτὰρ ὁ αὖτε Πέλοψ 2.105

     ;

    τὸν Ἕκτορι μῦθον ἐνίσπες 11.186

    , cf. 703, al.:—different from this are cases like Il.1.409 αἴ κέν πως ἐθέλῃσιν ἐπὶ Τρώεσσιν ἀρῆξαι, τοὺς δὲ κατὰ πρύμνας τε καὶ ἀμφ' ἅλα ἔλσαι Ἀχαιούς if he would help the Trojans, but drive those back to the ships— I mean the Achaeans, where Ἀχ. is only added to explain τούς, cf. 1.472, 4.20, 329, al.
    II freq. without a Subst., he, she, it,

    ὁ γὰρ ἦλθε Il.1.12

    , al.
    III placed after its Noun, before the Relat. Prons., ἐφάμην σὲ περὶ φρένας ἔμμεναι ἄλλων, τῶν ὅσσοι Λυκίην ναιετάουσι far above the rest, above those to wit who, etc., Il.17.172 ; οἷ' οὔ πώ τιν' ἀκούομεν οὐδὲ παλαιῶν, τάων αἳ πάρος ἦσαν.. Ἀχαιαί such as we have not heard tell of yet even among the women of old, those women to wit who.., Od.2.119, cf. Il.5.332 ;

    θάλαμον τὸν ἀφίκετο, τόν ποτε τέκτων ξέσσεν Od.21.43

    , cf. 1.116, 10.74 :—for the [dialect] Att. usage v. infr.
    IV before a Possessive Pron. its demonstr. force is sts. very manifest, φθίσει σε τὸ σὸν μένος that spirit of thine, Il.6.407, cf. 11.608 ; but in 15.58, 16.40, and elsewh. it is merely the Art.
    V for cases in which the Homeric usage approaches most nearly to the Attic, v. infr. B. init.
    VI ὁ μέν.., ὁ δέ.. without a Subst., in all cases, genders, and numbers, Hom., etc.: sts. in Opposition, where ὁ μέν prop. refers to the former, ὁ δέ to the latter ; more rarely ὁ μέν the latter,

    ὁ δέ

     the former,

    Pl.Prt. 359e

    , Isoc.2.32,34: sts. in Partition, the one.., the other.., etc.—The Noun with it is regularly in gen. pl., being divided by the ὁ μέν.., ὁ δέ.., into parts,

    ἠΐθεοι καὶ παρθένοι.., τῶν δ' αἱ μὲν λεπτὰς ὀθόνας ἔχον, οἱ δὲ χιτῶνας εἵατο Il.18.595

     ;

    τῶν πόλεων αἱ μὲν τυραννοῦνται, αἱ δὲ δημοκρατοῦνται, αἱ δὲ ἀριστοκρατοῦνται Pl.R. 338d

    , etc.: but freq. the Noun is in the same case, by a kind of apposition,

    ἴδον υἷε Δάρητος, τὸν μὲν ἀλευάμενον τὸν δὲ κτάμενον Il.5.28

    , cf. Od.12.73, etc.: so in Trag. and [dialect] Att., S.Ant. 22, etc. ;

    πηγὴ ἡ μὲν εἰς αὐτὸν ἔδυ, ἡ δὲ ἔξω ἀπορρεῖ Pl.Phdr. 255c

     ; if the Noun be collective, it is in the gen. sg.,

    ὁ μὲν πεπραμένος ἦν τοῦ σίτου, ὁ δὲ ἔνδον ἀποκείμενος D.42.6

     : sts. a Noun is added in apposition with ὁ μέν or

    ὁ δέ, ὁ μὲν οὔτασ' Ἀτύμνιον ὀξέϊ δουρὶ Ἀντίλοχος.., Μάρις δὲ.. Il.16.317

    -19, cf. 116 ;

    τοὺς μὲν τὰ δίκαια ποιεῖν ἠνάγκασα, τοὺς πλουσίους, τοὺς δὲ πένητας κτλ. D.18.102

    , cf. Pl.Grg. 501a, etc.
    2 when a neg. accompanies ὁ δέ, it follows δέ, e.g.

    τὰς γοῦν Ἀθήνας οἶδα τὸν δὲ χῶρον οὔ S.OC24

     ;

    τὸν φιλόσοφον σοφίας ἐπιθυμητὴν εἶναι, οὐ τῆς μὲν τῆς δ' οὔ, ἀλλὰ πάσης Pl.R. 475b

     ;

    οὐ πάσας χρὴ τὰς δόξας τιμᾶν, ἀλλὰ τὰς μὲν τὰς δ' οὔ· οὐδὲ πάντων, ἀλλὰ τῶν μὲν τῶν δ' οὔ Id.Cri. 47a

    , etc.
    3 ὁ μέν τις.., ὁ δέ τις.. is used in Prose, when the Noun to which ὁ refers is left indefinite,

    ἔλεγον ὁ μέν τις τὴν σοφίαν, ὁ δὲ τὴν καρτερίαν.., ὁ δέ τις καὶ τὸ κάλλος X.Cyr.3.1.41

     ;

    νόμους.. τοὺς μὲν ὀρθῶς τιθέασιν τοὺς δέ τινας οὐκ ὀρθῶς Pl.R. 339c

    , cf. Phlb. 13c.
    4 on τὸ μέν.., τὸ δέ.., or τὰ μέν.., τὰ δέ.., v. infr. VIII.4.
    5 ὁ μέν is freq. used without a corresponding

    ὁ δέ, οἱ μὲν ἄρ' ἐσκίδναντο.., Μυρμιδόνας δ' οὐκ εἴα ἀποσκίδνασθαι Il.23.3

    , cf. 24.722, Th.8.12, etc.: also folld. by

    ἀλλά, ἡ μὲν γάρ μ' ἐκέλευε.., ἀλλ' ἐγὼ οὐκ ἔθελον Od.7.304

     ; by ἄλλος δέ, Il.6.147, etc. ;

    τὸν μὲν.., ἕτερον δέ Ar.Av. 843

    , etc. ;

    ὁ μέν.., ὃς δέ.. Thgn.205

     (v.l. οὐδέ): less freq. ὁ δέ in the latter clause without ὁ μέν preceding, τῇ ῥα παραδραμέτην φεύγων, ὁ δ' ὄπισθε διώκων (for ὁ μὲν φεύγων) Il.22.157 ;

    σφραγῖδε.. χρυσοῦν ἔχουσα τὸν δακτύλιον, ἡ δ' ἑτέρα ἀργυροῦν IG22.1388.45

    , cf.

    μέν D.

     III ;

    γεωργὸς μὲν εἷς, ὁ δὲ οἰκοδόμος, ἄλλος δέ τις ὑφαντής Pl.R. 369d

    , cf. Tht. 181d.
    6 ὁ δέ following μέν sts. refers to the subject of the preceding clause,

    τοῦ μὲν ἅμαρθ', ὁ δὲ Λεῦκον.. βεβλήκει Il. 4.491

     ;

    τὴν μὲν γενομένην αὐτοῖσι αἰτίην οὐ μάλα ἐξέφαινε, ὁ δὲ ἔλεγέ σφι Hdt.6.3

    , cf. 1.66,6.9, 133,7.6 : rare in [dialect] Att. Prose,

    ἐπεψήφιζεν αὐτὸς ἔφορος ὤν· ὁ δὲ οὐκ ἔφη διαγιγνώσκειν τὴν βοήν Th.1.87

     ;

    ἔμενον ὡς κατέχοντες τὸ ἄκρον· οἱ δ' οὐ κατεῖχον X.An.4.2.6

     : this is different from ὁ δέ in apodosi, v. infr. 7 ; also from passages in which both clauses have a common verb, v. ὅ γε 11.
    7 ὁ δέ is freq. used simply in continuing a narrative, Il.1.43, etc.; also used by Hom. in apodosi after a relat., v. ὅδε 111.3.
    VII the following usages prevailed in [dialect] Att. Prose,
    1 in dialogue, after καί, it was usual to say in nom. sg. masc. καὶ ὅς ; in the other cases the usual forms of the Art. were used (v.

    ὅς A.

     II.I and cf. Skt. sas, alternat. form of sa) ; so, in acc.,

    καὶ τὸν εἰπεῖν Pl.Smp. 174a

    , cf. X.Cyr.1.3.9, etc.; also in Hdt.,

    καὶ τὴν φράσαι 6.61

    , al.
    2 ὁ καὶ ὁ such and such,

    τῇ καὶ τῇ ἀτιμίᾳ Pl.Lg. 721b

     : but mostly in acc.,

    καί μοι κάλει τὸν καὶ τόν Lys.1.23

    , cf. Pl.Lg. 784d ;

    τὰ καὶ τὰ πεπονθώς D.21.141

    , cf. 9.68 ;

    τὸ καὶ τό Id.18.243

     ; ἀνάγκη ἄρα τὸ καὶ τό it must then be so and so, Arist.Rh. 1401a4, cf. 1413a22 ; but τὰ καὶ τά now one thing, now another, of good and bad,

    τὸν δ' ἀγαθὸν τολμᾶν χρὴ τά τε καὶ τὰ φέρειν Thgn.398

    , cf. Pi.P.5.55,7.20, al.;

    τῶν τε καὶ τῶν καιρόν Id.O. 2.53

     ; so πάντα τοῦ μετρίου μεταβαλλόμενα ἐπὶ τὰ καὶ ἐπὶ τά, of excess and defect, Hp.Acut.46 ; cf. A. VI.8.
    VIII abs. usages of single cases,
    1 fem. dat. τῇ, of Place, there, on that spot, here, this way, that way, Il.5.752, 858, al.: folld. by ᾗ, 13.52, etc.: also in Prose,

    τὸ μὲν τῇ, τὸ δὲ τῇ X.Ath.2.12

    .
    b with a notion of motion towards, that way, in that direction, Il.10.531,11.149, 12.124 ;

    τῇ ἴμεν ᾗ.. 15.46

     ;

    δελφῖνες τῇ καὶ τῇ ἐθύνεον ἰχθυάοντες Hes.Sc. 210

     :—only poet.
    c of Manner,

    τῇ περ τελευτήσεσθαι ἔμελλεν

     in this way, thus,

    Od.8.510

    .
    d repeated, τῇ μέν.., τῇ δέ.., in one way.., in another.., or partly.., partly.., E.Or. 356, Pl.Smp. 211a, etc.: without

    μέν, τῇ μᾶλλον, τῇ δ' ἧσσον Parm.8.48

    .
    e relat., where, by which way, only [dialect] Ep., as Il.12.118, Od.4.229.
    2 neut. dat. τῷ, therefore, on this account, freq. in Hom., Il.1.418, 2.254, al. (v. infr.): also in Trag., A.Pr. 239, S.OT 510 (lyr.) ; in Prose,

    τῷ τοι.. Pl.Tht. 179d

    , Sph. 230b.
    b thus, so, Il.2.373, 13.57, etc.: it may also, esp. when εἰ precedes, be translated, then, if this be so, on this condition, Od.1.239,3.224, 258,al., Theoc.29.11.—In Hom. the true form is prob. τῶ, as in cod. A, or τώ, cf. A.D.Adv.199.2.
    3 neut. acc. τό, wherefore, Il.3.176, Od.8.332, al., S.Ph. 142(lyr.) ; also τὸ δέ abs., but the fact is.., Pl.Ap. 23a, Men. 97c, Phd. 109d, Tht. 157b, R. 340d, Lg. 967a ; even when the τό refers to what precedes, the contrast may lie not in the thing referred to, but in another part of the sentence (cf. supr. VI. 6),

    τὸ δ' ἐπὶ κακουργίᾳ.. ἐπετήδευσαν Th.1.37

     ;

    τὸ δὲ.. ἡμῖν μᾶλλον περιέσται Id.2.89

     ; φασὶ δέ τινες αὐτὸν καὶ τῶν ἑπτὰ σοφῶν γεγονέναι· τὸ δὲ οὐκ ἦν but he was not, Nic.Dam.58J.
    4 τὸ μέν.., τὸ δέ.., partly.., partly.., or on the one hand.., on the other.., Th.7.36, etc., cf.Od.2.46 ; more freq. τὰ μέν.., τὰ δέ.., Hdt.1.173, S.Tr. 534, etc.; also

    τὰ μέν τι.., τὰ δέ τι.. X.An.4.1.14

     ;

    τὸ μέν τι.., τὸ δέ τι.. Luc.Macr.14

     ;

    τὰ μέν.., τὸ δὲ πλέον.. Th.1.90

     : sts. without τὸ μέν.. in the first clause,

    τὸ δέ τι Id.1.107

    ,7.48 : rarely of Time, τὰ μὲν πολλὰ.., τέλος δέ several times.. and finally, Hdt.3.85.
    5 of Time, sts. that time, sts. this (present) time, συνμαχία κ' ἔα ἑκατὸν ϝέτεα, ἄρχοι δέ κα τοΐ (where it is possible, but not necessary, to supply ϝέτος) SIG9.3 (Olympia, vi B.C.): so with Preps., ἐκ τοῦ, [dialect] Ep. τοῖο, from that time, Il.1.493,15.601.
    b πρὸ τοῦ, sts. written προτοῦ, before this, aforetime, Hdt.1.103, 122,5.55, A.Ag. 1204, Ar.Nu.5, etc.;

    ἐν τῷ πρὸ τοῦ χρόνῳ Th.1.32

    , cf. A.Eu. 462 ;

    τὸ πρὸ τοῦ D.S.20.59

    .
    6 ἐν τοῖς is freq. used in Prose with Superlatives, ἐν τοῖσι θειότατον a most marvellous thing, Hdt.7.137 ; ἐν τοῖς πρῶτοι the very first, Th.1.6, etc.; ἐν τοῖσι πρῶτος ( πρώτοις codd.) Pherecr.145.4 ; [Ζεὺς] Ἔρωτά τε καὶ Ἀνάγκην ἐν τοῖς πρῶτα ἐγέννησεν first of all, Aristid. Or.43(1).16, cf. 37(2).2: when used with fem. Nouns, ἐν τοῖς remained without change of gender, ἐν τοῖς πλεῖσται δὴ νῆες the greatest number of ships, Th.3.17; ἐν τοῖς πρώτη ἐγένετο (sc. ἡ στάσις) ib.82 : also with Advbs.,

    ἐν τοῖς μάλιστα Id.8.90

    , Pl.Cri. 52a, Plu.2.74e, 421d, 723e, Brut.6, 11,al., Paus.1.16.3, etc.;

    ἐν τοῖς χαλεπώτατα Th.7.71

     ;

    τὴν Αἴγυπτον ἐν τοῖς μάλιστα μελάγγειον οὖσαν Plu.2.364c

     : in late Prose, also with Positives,

    ἐν τοῖς παράδοξον Aristid.Or.48(24).47

     codd.; with

    πάνυ, ἐν τοῖς πάνυ D.H.1.19

    , cf. 66 ( ἐν ταῖς πάνυ f.l. 4.14,15).
    B ὁ, ἡ, τό, THE DEFINITE ARTICLE, the, to specify individuals: rare in this signf. in the earliest Gr., becoming commoner later. In Hom. the demonstr. force can generally be traced, v. supr. A. I, but the definite Art. must be recognized in places like Il.1.167,7.412, 9.309, 12.289, Od.19.372 : also when joined to an Adj. to make it a Subst.,

    αἰὲν ἀποκτείνων τὸν ὀπίστατον

     the hindmost man,

    Il.11.178

     ;

    τὸν ἄριστον 17.80

     ;

    τὸν δύστηνον 22.59

     ;

    τὸν προὔχοντα 23.325

     ; τῷ πρώτῳ.., τῷ δευτέρῳ.., etc., ib. 265sq. ; also in

    τῶν ἄλλων 2.674

    , al.: with Advs.,

    τὸ πρίν 24.543

    , al.;

    τὸ πάρος περ 17.720

     ;

    τὸ πρόσθεν 23.583

     ; also τὸ τρίτον ib. 733 ;

    τὰ πρῶτα 1.6

    ,al.; τὸ μὲν ἄλλο for the rest, 23.454 ;

    ἀνδρῶν τῶν τότε 9.559

    .—The true Art., however, is first fully established in fifth-cent. [dialect] Att., whilst the demonstr. usage disappears, exc. in a few cases, V. A. VI-VIII.—Chief usages, esp. in [dialect] Att.
    I not only with common Appellats., Adjs., and Parts., to specify them as present to sense or mind, but also freq. where we use the Possessive Pron.,

    τὸ κέαρ ηὐφράνθην Ar.Ach.5

     ; τὴν κεφαλὴν κατεάγην my head was broken, And.1.61, etc. ; τοὺς φίλους ποιούμεθα we make our friends, S.Ant. 190 ; τὰς πόλεις ἔκτιζον they began founding their cities, Th.1.12;

    οὐχ ὑπὲρ τὴν οὐσίαν ποιούμενοι τοὺς παῖδας Pl.R. 372b

    .
    b omitted with pr.nn.and freq. with Appellats. which require no specification, as θεός, βασιλεύς, v. θεός 1.1, βασιλεύς III ; ἐμ πόλει in the Acropolis, IG12.4.1, al.: but added to pr. nn., when attention is to be called to the previous mention of the person, as Th. (3.70 ) speaks first of Πειθίας and then refers to him repeatedly as ὁ Π.; cf. Θράσυλος in Id.8.104, with ὁ Θ. ib. 105 ; or when the person spoken of is to be specially distinguished, Ζεύς, ὅστις ὁ Ζεύς whoever this Zeus is, E.Fr. 480 ; and therefore properly omitted when a special designation follows, as Σωκράτης ὁ φιλόσοφος: seldom in Trag. with pr. nn., save to give pecul. emphasis, like Lat. ille, ὁ Λάϊος, ὁ Φοῖβος, S.OT 729, El.35, etc.: later, however, the usage became very common (the Homeric usage of ὁ with a pr. n. is different, v. A.I).
    c Aristotle says Σωκράτης meaning the historical Socrates, as in SE183b7, PA642a28, al., but ὁ Σωκράτης when he means the Platonic Socrates, as Pol.1261a6, al.: so with other pr.nn., EN1145a21, 1146a21, al.
    d for Σαῦλος ὁ καὶ Παῦλος, etc., v. καί B.2.
    2 in a generic sense, where the individual is treated as a type,

    οἷς ὁ γέρων μετέῃσιν.. λεύσσει Il.3.109

    ;

    πονηρὸν ὁ συκοφάντης D.18.242

    , etc.
    b freq. with abstract Nouns,

    ἥ τε ἐλπὶς καὶ ὁ ἔρως Th.3.45

    , etc.
    3 of outstanding members of a class, ὁ γεωγράφος, ὁ κωμικός, ὁ ποιητής, ὁ τεχνικός, v. γεωγράφος, κωμικός, ποιητής, τεχνικός.
    4 with infs., which thereby become Substs., τὸ εἴργειν prevention, Pl.Grg. 505b ; τὸ φρονεῖν good sense, S.Ant. 1348(anap.), etc.: when the subject is expressed it is put between the Art.and the inf., τὸ θεοὺς εἶναι the existence of gods, Pl.Phd. 62b ; τὸ μηδένα εἶναι ὄλβιον the fact or statement that no one is happy, Hdt.1.86.
    5 in neut. before any word or expression which itself is made the object of thought, τὸ ἄνθρωπος the word or notion man ; τὸ λέγω the word λέγω ; τὸ μηδὲν ἄγαν the sentiment 'ne quid nimis', E.Hipp. 265(lyr.); τὸ τῇ αὐτῇ the phrase τῇ αὐτῇ, Pl.Men. 72e : and so before whole clauses, ἡ δόξα.. περὶ τοῦ οὕστινας δεῖ ἄρχειν the opinion about the question 'who ought to rule', Id.R. 431e ; τὸ ἐὰν μένητε παρ' ἐμοί, ἀποδώσω the phrase 'I will give back, if.. ', X.Cyr. 5.1.21, cf. Pl.R. 327c, etc.;

    τοὺς τοῦ τί πρακτέον λογισμούς D.23.148

     ; τὸ ὀλίγοι the term few, Arist.Pol. 1283b11.
    6 before relat. clauses, when the Art. serves to combine the whole relat. clause into one notion, τῇ ᾗ φὴς σὺ σκληρότητι the harshness you speak of, Pl.Cra. 435a ; τὸν ἥμερον καρπόν.., καὶ τὸν ὅσος ξύλινος (i.e. καὶ τὸν καρπὸν ὅσος ἂν ᾖ ξύλινος) Id.Criti. 115b ;

    τῶν ὅσοι ἂν.. ἀγαθοὶ κριθῶσιν Id.R. 469b

     ;

    ἐκ γῆς καὶ πυρὸς μείξαντες καὶ τῶν ὅσα πυρὶ καὶ γῇ κεράννυται Id.Prt. 320d

    , cf. Hyp.Lyc.2 ;

    ταύτην τε τὴν αἰτίαν καὶ τὴν ὅθεν ἡ κίνησις Arist.Metaph. 987a8

     ;

    τὸν ὃς ἔφη Lys.23.8

     : hence the relat., by attraction, freq. follows the case of the Art., τοῖς οἵοις ἡμῖν τε καὶ ὑμῖν, i.e. τοῖς οὖσιν οἷοι ἡμεῖς καὶ ὑμεῖς, X.HG2.3.25, etc.
    7 before Prons.,
    a before the pers. Prons., giving them greater emphasis, but only in acc.,

    τὸν ἐμέ Pl.Tht. 166a

    ,Phlb. 20b ; τὸν.. σὲ καὶ ἐμέ ib. 59b ;

    τὸν αὑτόν Id.Phdr. 258a

     ; on ὁ αὐτός, v. αὐτός 111.
    b before the interrog. Pron. (both τίς and ποῖος), referring to something before, which needs to be more distinctly specified, A.Pr. 251, Ar. Pax 696 ; also τὰ τί; because οἷα went before, ib. 693. Of τίς only the neut. is thus used (v.supr.): ποῖος is thus used not only in neut. pl., τὰ ποῖα; E.Ph. 707 ; but also in the other genders, ὁ ποῖος; ib. 1704 ; τῆς ποίας μερίδος; D.18.64 ; τοῖς ποίοις.. ; Arist.Ph. 227b1.
    c with τοιοῦτος, τοιόσδε, τηλικοῦτος, etc., the Art. either makes the Pron. into a Subst.,

    ὁ τοιοῦτος

     that sort of person,

    X.Mem.4.2.21

    , etc.; or subjoins it to a Subst. which already has an Art.,

    τὴν ἀπολογίαν τὴν τοιαύτην D.41.13

    .
    8 before ἅπας, Pi.N.1.69, Hdt.3.64, 7.153 (s.v.l.), S.OC 1224 (lyr.), D.18.231, etc.; also τὸν ἕνα, τὸν ἕνα τοῦτον, Arist.Pol. 1287b8, 1288a19 : on its usage with ἕκαστος, v. sub voc.; and on οἱ ἄλλοι, οἱ πολλοί, etc., v. ἄλλος 11.6,

    πολύς 11.3

    , etc.
    9 the Art. with the [comp] Comp. is rare, if ἤ follows, S.Ant. 313, OC 796.
    II elliptic expressions:
    1 before the gen. of a pr.<*>., to express descent, son or daughter, Θουκυδίδης ὁ Ὀλόρου (sc. υἱός) Th.4.104 ; Ἑλένη ἡ τοῦ Διός (sc. θυγάτηρ) E.Hel. 470 : also to denote other relationships, e.g. brother, Lys.32.24, Alciphr.2.2.10 ; ἡ Σμικυθίωνος Μελιστίχη M. the wife of S., Ar.Ec.46 ; Κλέαρχος καὶ οἱ ἐκείνου Cl. and his men, X.An.1.2.15 ; ὁ τοῦ Ἀντιγένεος the slave of A., Hp.Hum.20.
    2 generally, before a gen. it indicates a wider relation, as τὸ τῶν νεῶν, τὸ τῶν Ἑρμῶν, the matter of the ships, the affair of the Hermae, Th.4.23,6.60 ; τὰ τοῦ Ἀρριβαίου πράσσειν to promote the interests of Arrhibaeus, Id.4.83, cf. 6.89, etc.; τὸ τῆς τύχης,=ἡ τύχη, Id.4.18 ; τὰ τῆς τύχης accidents, chance events, ib.55 ; τὰ γὰρ φθιτῶν τοῖς ὁρῶσι κόσμος performance of the rites due to the dead befits the living, E.Supp.78(lyr.); τὰ τῶν θεῶν that which is destined by the gods, S.Tr. 498(lyr.): hence with neut. of Possessive Pron., τὸ ἐμόν, τὸ σόν, what regards me or thee, my or thy business or interests, S.Aj. 124, El. 251, etc.: and with gen. of 3 pers.,

    τὸ τῆσδε E.Hipp.48

    . But τό τινος is freq. also, a man's word or saying, as

    τὸ τοῦ Σόλωνος Hdt.1.86

     ; τὸ τοῦ Ὁμήρου as Homer says, Pl.Tht. 183e ; also τά τινος so-and-so's house, Ar.V. 1432, D.54.7, Theoc.2.76, Herod.5.52, Ev.Luc.2.49.
    3 very freq. with cases governed by Preps.. αἱ ἐκ τῆς Ζακύνθου νῆες the ships from Zacynthus, Th.4.13 ; οἱ ἀμφί τινα, οἱ περί τινα, such an one and his followers, v. ἀμφί c.1.3, περί c.1.2 ; also τὰ ἐπὶ Θρᾴκης the Thrace-ward district, Th.1.59, al.; τὰ ἀπὸ τοῦ καταστρώματος matters on deck, Id.7.70 ; τὰ ἀπ' Ἀλκιβιάδου the proposals of Alcibiades, Id.8.48 ; τὰ ἀπὸ τῆς τύχης the incidents of fortune, Id.2.87, etc.
    4 on μὰ τόν, μὰ τήν, etc., v. μά IV.
    5 in elliptical phrases, ἐπορευόμην τὴν ἔξω τείχους (sc. ὁδόν) Pl.Ly. 203a ; ἡ ἐπὶ θανάτῳ (sc. στολή, δέσις), v. θάνατος; κατὰ τὴν ἐμήν (sc. γνώμην), v. ἐμός 11.4 ; ἡ αὔριον (sc. ἡμέρα), v. αὔριον; ἡ Λυδιστί (sc. ἁρμονία) Arist.Pol. 1342b32, etc.: freq. with Advs., which thus take an adj. sense, as ὁ, ἡ, τὸ νῦν;

    ὁ οἴκαδε πλοῦς Th.1.52

     ; οἱ τότε, οἱ ἔπειτα (sc. ἄνθρωποι), ib.9,10, etc. ; but τό stands abs. with Advs. of time and place, when one cannot (as in the preceding instances) supply a Subst., as

    κἀκεῖσε καὶ τὸ δεῦρο E.Ph. 266

    , cf.[315] (lyr.);

    ὁ μὲν τὸ κεῖθεν, ὁ δὲ τὸ κεῖθεν Id.Or. 1412

    (lyr.): rarely abs. in gen., ἰέναι τοῦ πρόσω to go forward, X.An.1.3.1 ;

    τοῦ προσωτάτω δραμεῖν S.Aj. 731

    .
    C as RELATIVE PRONOUN in many dialects ; both in nom. sg. masc. ὅ, as

    κλῦθί μοι, ὃ χθιζὸς θεὸς ἤλυθες Od.2.262

    , cf. 1.300, al. ;

    Ἔρως, ὃ κατ' ὀμμάτων στάζεις πόθον E.Hipp. 526

    (lyr.);

    Ἄδωνις, ὃ κἠν Ἀχέροντι φιλεῖται Theoc.15.86

     ; ὃ ἐξορύξη he who banishes him, Schwyzer679.12,25 ([place name] Cyprus) ; and in the forms beginning with τ, esp. in Hom. (Od.4.160, al.), Hdt.1.7, al.: also in [dialect] Ion. Poets,

    ἐν τῷ κάθημαι Archil.87.3

    , cf. Semon.7.3, Anacr.86 (prob.), Herod.2.64, al.: freq. in Trag.,

    τῆς S.OC 1258

    , Tr. 381, 728, E.Alc. 883 (anap.);

    τῷ S.Ph.14

     ;

    τήν Id.OC 747

    , Tr.47, El. 1144 ; τό Id.OT 1427 ; τῶν ib. 1379, Ant. 1086.—Never in Com. or [dialect] Att. Prose:—[dialect] Ep. gen. sg.

    τεῦ Il.18.192

    (s.v.l.).
    D CRASIS OF ARTICLE:
    a [dialect] Att. ὁ, ἡ, τό, with [pron. full] ᾰ make ᾱ, as ἁνήρ, ἁλήθεια, τἀγαθόν, τᾄτιον; so οἱ, αἱ, τά, as ἅνδρες, τἀγαθά; also τοῦ, τῷ, as τἀγαθοῦ, τἀγαθῷ: ὁ, τό, οἱ, before e gives ου, οὑξ, οὑπί, οὑμός, τοὔργον, οὑπιχώριοι, etc.; also τοῦ, as τοὐμοῦ, τοὐπιόντος; but ἅτερος, θάτερον ([pron. full] ¯ ?ὁX?ὁX), [dialect] Ion. οὕτερος, τοὔτερον (v. ἕτερος), [dialect] Att. fem. ἡτέρα, dat. θητέρᾳ (v. ἕτερος); τῷ loses the iota, τὠμῷ, τὠπιόντι: ὁ, τό, before ο gives ου, as Οὁδυσσεύς, Οὑλύμπιος, τοὔνομα: ὁ, τό, etc., before αυ gives ᾱυ, αὑτός, ταὐτό, ταὐτῷ (freq. written ἁτός, etc. in Inscrr. and Pap.); so τὰ αὐτά=ταὐτά, αἱ αὐταί= αὑταί: ἡ before εὐ gives ηὑ, as ηὑλάβεια: τῇ before ἡ gives θη, as θἠμέρᾳ: τὸ before ὑ gives θου, as θοὔδωρ for τὸ ὕδωρ.
    b other dialects: in their treatment of crasis these follow the local laws of contraction, hence, e.g., [dialect] Dor. ὡξ from

    ὁ ἐξ Theoc.1.65

    , ὥλαφος from ὁ ἔλαφος ib. 135 ; [dialect] Ion. ᾡσυμνήτης from ὁ αἰς- SIG57.45 (Milet., v B.C.) ; ὡυτή from

    ἡ αὐτή Heraclit.60

    , etc.

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > ὁ

  • 17 πολύς

    πολύς, πολλή, πολύ, gen. πολλοῦ, ῆς, οῦ (Hom.+; ins, pap, LXX, pseudepigr., Philo, Joseph., apolog.) ‘much’.—Comparative πλείων, πλεῖον (18 times in the NT, 4 times in the Apost. Fathers [including Hv 3, 6, 4; Hs 8, 1, 16] and Ath. 12, 3) or πλέον (Lk 3:13 and Ac 15:28 μηδὲν πλέον; otherwise, πλέον in the NT only J 21:15; 14 times in the Apost. Fathers [incl. μηδὲν πλέον Hs 1, 1, 6]; Ar. twice; Just. 6 times; Tat. once; Ath. 7 times), ονος; pl. πλείονες, and acc. πλείονας contracted πλείους, neut. πλείονα and πλείω (the latter Mt 26:53 [πλεῖον, πλείου vv.ll.]; B-D-F §30, 2; Mlt-H. 82; Thackeray p. 81f; Mayser p. 68f) ‘more’ (Hom.+; ins, pap, LXX; TestAbr B 7 p. 111, 27=Stone p. 70 [πλείον]; TestJob 35:2; TestGad 7:2 [πλεῖον]; AscIs 3:8; [πλέον]; EpArist; apolog. exc. Mel.).—Superlative πλεῖστος, η, ον ‘most’ (Hom.+).
    ① pert. to being a large number, many, a great number of
    ⓐ positive πολύς, πολλή, πολύ
    α. adj., preceding or following a noun (or ptc. or adj. used as a noun) in the pl. many, numerous δυνάμεις πολλαί many mighty deeds Mt 7:22b. δαιμονιζόμενοι πολλοί 8:16. Cp. vs. 30; 9:10; 13:17; 24:11; 27:52, 55; Mk 2:15a; 6:13; 12:41; Lk 4:25, 27; 7:21b; 10:24; J 10:32; 14:2; Ac 1:3; 2:43; 8:7b; 14:22; Ro 4:17f (Gen 17:5); 8:29; 12:4; 1 Cor 8:5ab; 11:30; 12:12a, 20; 1 Ti 6:12; 2 Ti 2:2; Hb 2:10; 1J 4:1; 2J 7; Rv 5:11; 9:9; 10:11; 1 Cl 55:3ab. ἔτη πολλά many years: Lk 12:19b (εἰς ἔτη π.); Ac 24:10 (ἐκ π. ἐτῶν); Ro 15:23 (ἀπὸ π. [v.l. ἱκανῶν] ἐτῶν).—αἱ ἁμαρτίαι αἱ πολλαί Lk 7:47a. αἱ εὐεργεσίαι αἱ π. 1 Cl 21:1.—πολλὰ καὶ βαρέα αἰτιώματα many serious charges Ac 25:7 (cp. Ps.-Pla., Sisyph. 1, 387a πολλά τε καὶ καλὰ πράγματα; B-D-F §442, 11; Rob. 655). πολλὰ καὶ ἄλλα σημεῖα J 20:30 (on the form X., Hell. 5, 4, 1 πολλὰ μὲν οὖν … καὶ ἄλλα λέγειν καὶ Ἑλληνικὰ καὶ βαρβαρικά; Dionys. Hal. 2, 67, 5; Ps.-Demetr. 142 πολλὰς κ. ἄλλας χάριτας; Jos., Ant. 3, 318; Tat. 38, 1. On the subject-matter Bultmann 540, 3; also Porphyr., Vi. Pyth. 28 after a miracle-story: μυρία δʼ ἕτερα θαυμαστότερα κ. θειότερα περὶ τἀνδρὸς … εἴρηται κτλ.).—ἄλλοι πολλοί many others IRo 10:1. ἄλλαι πολλαί Mk 15:41. ἄλλα πολλά (Jos., Bell. 6, 169, Ant. 9, 242; Just., D. 8, 1) J 21:25. ἕτεροι πολλοί Ac 15:35. ἕτερα πολλά (Jos., Vi. 39) Lk 22:65.—Predicative: πολλοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐισερχόμενοι Mt 7:13.—Mk 5:9; 6:31; Gal 4:27 (Is 54:1). AcPl Ha 5, 16.—οὐ πολλοί not many=( only) a few οὐ πολλαὶ ἡμέραι (Jos., Ant. 5, 328, Vi. 309) Lk 15:13; J 2:12; Ac 1:5; AcPl Ha 11, 1. οὐ πολλοὶ σοφοί not many wise (people) 1 Cor 1:26a; cp. bc. οὐ πολλοί πατέρες not many fathers 4:15.
    β. subst.
    א. πολλοί many i.e. persons—without the art. Mt 7:22; 8:11; 12:15; 20:28; 24:5ab; 26:28; Mk 2:2; 3:10 (Mt 12:15 has ascensive πάντας; other passages to be compared in this connection are Mk 10:45=Mt 20:28 πολλῶν and 1 Ti 2:6 πάντων. Cp. the double tradition of the saying of Bias in Clem. of Alex., Strom. 1, 61, 3 πάντες ἄνθρωποι κακοὶ ἢ οἱ πλεῖστοι τ. ἀνθρώπων κακοί.—On Mk 10:45 s. OCullmann, TZ 4, ’48, 471–73); 6:2; 11:8; Lk 1:1 (cp. Herm. Wr. 11, 1, 1b and see JBauer, NovT 4, ’60, 263–66), 14; J 2:23; 8:30; Ac 9:42; Ro 16:2; 2 Cor 11:18; Gal 3:16 (πολλοί= a plurality); Tit 1:10; Hb 12:15; 2 Pt 2:2. AcPl Ha 5, 8; 7, 5; 11, 3. Opp. ὀλίγοι Mt 22:14; 20:16 v.l. (cp. Pla., Phd. 69c ναρθηκοφόροι μὲν πολλοί, βάκχοι δέ τε παῦροι=the thyrsus-bearers [officials] are many, but the truly inspired are few)—W. a partitive gen. πολλοὶ τῶν Φαρισαίων Mt 3:7. π. πῶν υἱῶν Ἰσραήλ Lk 1:16.—J 4:39; 12:11; Ac 4:4; 8:7a; 13:43; 18:8; 19:18; 2 Cor 12:21; Rv 8:11.—W. ἐκ and gen. (AscIs 3:1; Jos., Ant. 11, 151) πολλοὶ ἐκ τῶν μαθητῶν J 6:60, 66.—10:20; 11:19, 45; 12:42; Ac 17:12. ἐκ τοῦ ὄχλου πολλοί J 7:31 (Appian, Iber. 78 §337 πολλοὶ ἐκ τοῦ πλήθους).
    ב. πολλά—many things, much without the art.: γράφειν write at length B 4:9. διδάσκειν Mk 4:2; 6:34b. λαλεῖν Mt 13:3. μηχανᾶσθαι MPol 3. πάσχειν (Pind., O. 13, 63 al.; Jos., Ant. 13, 268; 403) Mt 16:21; Mk 5:26a; 9:12; Lk 9:22; 17:25; B 7:11; AcPl Ha 8, 19. ποιεῖν Mk 6:20 v.l. United w. another neut. by καί (Lucian, Icar. 20 πολλὰ κ. δεινά; Ael. Aristid. 46 p. 345 D.: πολλὰ κ. καλά; Ps.-Demetr., El. 70 πολλὰ κ. ἄλλα; likew. Appian, Bell. Civ. 5, 13 §53; Arrian, Anab. 6, 11, 2) πολλὰ κ. ἕτερα many other things Lk 3:18. πολλὰ ἂν κ. ἄλλα εἰπεῖν ἔχοιμι Dg 2:10 (Eur., Ep. 3, 2, πολλὰ κ. ἕτερα εἰπεῖν ἔχω; Diod S 17, 38, 3 πολλὰ δὲ καὶ ἄλλα … διαλεχθείς). ἐν πολλοῖς in many ways (Diod S 26, 1, 2; OGI 737, 7 [II B.C.]; Just., D. 124, 4 [of line of proof]) 2 Cor 8:22a. ἐπὶ πολλῶν (opp. ἐπὶ ὀλίγα) over many things Mt 25:21, 23.—W. art. (Pla., Apol. 1, 17a) τὰ πολλὰ πράσσειν transact a great deal of business Hs 4:5b.
    γ. elliptical δαρήσεται πολλά (sc. πληγάς) will receive many (lashes) Lk 12:47 (B-D-F §154; 241, 6).
    ⓑ comparative πλείων, πλεῖον
    α. adj. w. a plural (Diod S 14, 6, 1 μισθοφόρους πλείους=many mercenaries) πλείονας πόνους (opp. οὐχ ἕνα οὐδὲ δύο) 1 Cl 5:4. ἐπὶ ἡμέρας πλείους for a (large) number of days, for many days (Jos., Ant. 4, 277; cp. Theophr. in Apollon. Paradox. 29 πλείονας ἡμ.) Ac 13:31.—21:10 (Jos., Ant. 16, 15); 24:17; 25:14; 27:20. οἱ μὲν πλείονές εἰσιν γεγονότες ἱερεῖς the priests of former times existed in greater numbers Hb 7:23. ἑτέροις λόγοις πλείοσιν in many more words (than have been reported) Ac 2:40. ταῦτα καὶ ἕτερα πλείονα MPol 12:1.—W. a gen. of comparison (Just., A I 53, 3; Tat. 3, 2) ἄλλους δούλους πλείονας τῶν πρώτων other slaves, more than (he had sent) at first Mt 21:36. πλείονα σημεῖα ὧν more signs than those which J 7:31. Also w. ἤ: πλείονας μαθητὰς ἤ more disciples than 4:1. After πλείονες (-α) before numerals the word for ‘than’ is omitted (B-D-F §185, 4; Kühner-G. II 311; Rob. 666; Jos., Ant. 14, 96) ἐτῶν ἦν πλειόνων τεσσεράκοντα ὁ ἄνθρωπος the man was more than 40 years old Ac 4:22. πλείους τεσσεράκοντα 23:13, 21. Cp. 24:11; 25:6 (Jos., Ant. 6, 306 δέκα οὐ πλείους ἡμέρας).—The ref. is to relative extent (cp. 2bα) in τὰ ἔργα σου τὰ ἕσχατα πλείονα τῶν πρώτων your deeds, the latter of which are greater than the former Rv 2:19.
    β. subst.
    א. (οἱ) πλείονες, (οἱ) πλείους the majority, most (Diog. L. 1, 20; 22; Jos., Ant. 10, 114) Ac 19:32; 27:12. W. ἐξ: ἐξ ὧν οἱ πλείονες most of whom 1 Cor 15:6. W. gen. and a neg. (litotes) οὐκ ἐν τ. πλείοσιν αὐτῶν ηὐδόκησεν ὁ θεός God was pleased with only a few of them 10:5. This is perh. (s. ג below) the place for 1 Cor 9:19; 2 Cor 2:6; 9:2. Phil 1:14; MPol 5:1.
    ב. (οἱ) πλείονες, (οἱ) πλείους (even) more πλείονες in even greater numbers Ac 28:23. πολλῷ πλείους ἐπίστευσαν many more came to believe J 4:41.—διὰ τῶν πλειόνων to more and more people=those who are still to be won for Christ 2 Cor 4:15.
    ג. (οἱ) πλείονες, (οἱ) πλείους. In contrast to a minority οἱ πλείονες can gain the sense the others, the rest (so τὰ πλείονα Soph., Oed. Col. 36; τὸ πλέον Thu. 4, 30, 4; Jos., Ant. 12, 240; B-D-F §244, 3). So perh. (s. א above) ἵνα τ. πλείονας κερδήσω (opp. the apostle himself) 1 Cor 9:19; 2 Cor 2:6 (opp. the one who has been punished too severely.—In this case [s. א above] his punishment would have been determined by a unanimous vote of the Christian assembly rather than by a majority). Cp. 9:2; Phil 1:14; MPol 5:1.
    ד. πλείονα (for πλεῖον) more Mt 20:10 v.l.; various things Lk 11:53. ἐκ τοῦ ἑνὸς πλείονα 1 Cl 24:5 (s. as adv. ParJer 7:26).
    ⓒ superl. adj. πλείστη w. a plural most of αἱ πλεῖσται δυνάμεις Mt 11:20 (difft. B-D-F §245, 1).
    ② pert. to being relatively large in quantity or measure, much, extensive
    ⓐ positive πολύς, πολλή, πολύ
    α. adj. preceding or following a noun (or ptc. or adj. used as a noun)
    א. in the sg. much, large, great πολὺς ἀριθμός Ac 11:21. W. words that in themselves denote a plurality (Appian, Bell. Civ. 5, 80 §338 στρατὸς πολύς) πολὺς ὄχλος (s. ὄχ. 1a) Mt 14:14; 20:29; 26:47; Mk 5:21, 24; 6:34a; 8:1; 9:14; 12:37 (ὁ π. ὄχ.); Lk 5:29; 6:17a; 8:4; J 6:2, 5 (for the expression ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, in which π. follows the noun, J 12:9, 12, cp. Arrian, Anab. 1, 9, 6 ὁ φόνος πολύς); Ac 6:7; Rv 7:9; 19:1, 6. πολὺ πλῆθος (s. pl. 2bα) Mk 3:7f; Lk 5:6; 6:17b; 23:27; Ac 14:1; 17:4; 1 Cl 6:1. λαὸς πολύς many people Ac 18:10. Of money and its value, also used in imagery μισθὸς πολύς Mt 5:12; Lk 6:23, 35 (all three predicative, as Gen 15:1). ἐργασία π. Ac 16:16. π. κεφάλαιον 22:28. χρυσοῦ πολλοῦ … τρυφῆς πολλῆς AcPl Ha 2, 19.—Of things that occur in the mass or in large quantities (Diod S 3, 50, 1 πολλὴ ἄμπελος) γῆ πολλή Mt 13:5; Mk 4:5; θερισμὸς π. Mt 9:37; Lk 10:2 (both pred.). χόρτος π. J 6:10; καρπὸς π. (Cyranides p. 121, 11) 12:24; 15:5, 8.—λόγος π. a long speech (Diod S 13, 1, 2; Just., D. 123, 7) Ac 15:32; 20:2. περὶ οὗ πολὺς ἡμῖν ὁ λόγος about this we have much to say Hb 5:11 (cp. Pla., Phd. 115d).—Of time: πολὺς χρόνος a long time (Hom. et al.; Demetr.(?): 722 Fgm. 7; Jos., Ant. 8, 342; 19, 28; Just., A II, 2, 11) J 5:6 (s. ἔχω 7b); Hs 6, 4, 4 (pred.). μετὰ πολὺν χρόνον (Jos., Ant. 12, 324) Mt 25:19. Differently Mk 6:35ab (s. 3aα).
    ב. adj. w. a noun in the pl. many, large, great, extensive, plentiful ὄχλοι πολλοί great crowds or probably better many people (as Diod S 20, 59, 2; Ps.-Clem., Hom. 10, 3. For the corresponding mng. of ὄχλοι s. ὄχλος 1a) Mt 4:25; 8:1; 13:2; 15:30a; 19:2; Lk 5:15; 14:25. κτήματα πολλά a great deal of property Mt 19:22; Mk 10:22 (cp. Da 11:28 χρήματα π.). ὕδατα πολλά much water, many waters (Maximus Tyr. 21, 3g of the Nile ὁ πολὺς ποταμός, likew. Procop. Soph., Ep. 111) J 3:23; Rv 1:15; 14:2; 17:1; 19:6b. θυμιάματα πολλά a great deal of incense 8:3. τὰ πολλὰ γράμματα Ac 26:24. πολλοὶ χρόνοι long periods of time (Plut., Thes. 6, 9). πολλοῖς χρόνοις for long periods of time (SIG 836, 6; pap) Lk 8:29; 1 Cl 44:3. χρόνοις πολλοῖς AcPlCor 2:10. ἐκ πολλῶν χρόνων (Diod S 3, 47, 8; Jos., Ant. 14, 110; 17, 204) 1 Cl 42:5.
    β. subst.
    א. πολλοί many i.e. pers.—w. the art. οἱ πολλοί the many, of whatever appears in the context Mk 6:2 v.l. (the many people who were present in the synagogue); 9:26b (the whole crowd). Opp. ὁ εἷς Ro 5:15ac, 19ab; the many who form the ἓν σῶμα the one body 12:5; 1 Cor 10:17. Paul pays attention to the interests of the many rather than to his own vs. 33 (cp. Jos., Ant. 3, 212).—The majority, most (X., An. 5, 6, 19; Appian, Maced. 7, Bell. Civ. 4, 73 §309; 2 Macc 1:36; En 104:10; AscIs 3:26; Jos., Ant. 17, 72; Just., D. 4, 3) Mt 24:12; Hb 12:15 v.l. W. a connotation of disapproval most people, the crowd (Socrat., Ep. 6, 2; Dio Chrys. 15 [32], 8; Epict. 1, 3, 4; 2, 1, 22 al.; Plut., Mor. 33a; 470b; Plotinus, Enn. 2, 9, 9; Philo, Rer. Div. Her. 42) 2 Cor 2:17; Pol 2:1; 7:2.—Jeremias, The Eucharistic Words of Jesus3, tr. NPerrin, ’66, 179–82; 226–31, and TW VI 536–45: πολλοί.
    ב. πολύ much ᾧ ἐδόθη πολύ, πολὺ ζητηθήσεται παρʼ αὐτοῦ, καὶ ᾧ παρέθεντο πολὺ κτλ. Lk 12:48 (Just., A I, 17, 4 twice πλέον). Cp. 16:10ab; 2 Cl 8:5; καρποφορεῖν π. bear much fruit Hs 2:3. πολὺ κατὰ πάντα τρόπον much in every way Ro 3:2 (Ael. Aristid. 34, 43 K.=50 p. 562 D. gives answer to a sim. quest. asked by himself: πολλὰ καὶ παντοῖα).—Js 5:16.—As gen. of price πολλοῦ for a large sum of money (Menand., Fgm. 197 Kö.; PRyl 244, 10. S. στρουθίον.) Mt 26:9.—Of time: ἐπὶ πολύ ( for) a long time (JosAs 19:3; Ar. 65, 3; s. also ἐπί 18cβ) Ac 28:6; AcPl Ha 10, 21. μετʼ οὐ πολύ soon afterward Ac 27:14 (μετά B 2c).—ἐπὶ πολύ more than once, often (Is 55:7) Hm 4, 1, 8.—Before a comp. (as Hom. et al.; B-D-F §246; Rob. 664) in the acc. πολὺ βέλτιον much better Hs 1:9. π. ἐλάττων v 3, 7, 6 (Ar. 6, 2). π. μᾶλλον much more, to a much greater degree (Dio Chrys. 2, 10; 17; 64 al.; Ael. Aristid. 34, 9 K.=50 p. 549 D.; Just., A II, 8, 3; D. 95, 1 al.) Hb 12:9, 25 (by means of a negative it acquires the mng. much less; cp. Diod S 7, 14, 6 πολὺ μᾶλλον μὴ … =even much less); Dg 2:7b. π. πλέον 2:7a (Ar. 11, 7). π. σπουδαιότερος 2 Cor 8:22b. Cp. π. τιμώτερον 1 Pt 1:7 v.l.; in the dat. of degree of difference πολλῷ μᾶλλον (Thu. 2, 51, 4; UPZ 42, 48 [162 B.C.]; EpArist 7; 24 al.; Sir prol. ln. 14; Jos., Ant. 18, 184; Just., A I, 68, 9; Tat. 17, 4) Mt 6:30; Mk 10:48b; Lk 18:39; Ro 5:9f, 15b, 17; 1 Cor 12:22; 2 Cor 3:9, 11; Phil 2:12. πολλῷ μᾶλλον κρείσσον 1:23 (v.l. without μᾶλλον). πολλῷ πλείους J 4:41. πολλῷ στρουθίων as v.l. Mt 20:31 and Lk 12:7 (both N.25 app.; on the strong ms. support for this rdg. s. RBorger, TRu 52, ’87, 21–24).—W. the art. τὸ πολύ (opp. τὸ ὀλίγον as X., An. 7, 7, 36) 2 Cor 8:15 (cp. Ex 16:18).
    ג. πολύς (Diod S 14, 107, 4 πολὺς ἦν ἐπὶ τῇ τιμωρίᾳ=he was strongly inclined toward punishing) μὴ πολὺς ἐν ῥήμασιν γίνου do not be profuse in speech, do not gossip 1 Cl 30:5 (Job 11:3).—Παπίας ὁ πολύς Papias (7), prob. to be understood as ὁ πάνυ; s. πάνυ d.
    ⓑ comp. πλείων, πλεῖον; adv. πλειόνως
    α. adj., w. a singular (TestJob 35:2 διὰ πλείονος εὐωδίας) καρπὸν πλείονα more fruit J 15:2, 8 P66; Hs 5, 2, 4. τὸ πλεῖον μέρος τοῦ ὄχλου the greater part of the throng 8, 1, 16. ἐπὶ πλείονα χρόνον for a longer time (PTebt 6:31 [II B.C.]) Ac 18:20. Foll. by gen. of comparison: πλείονα τιμήν more honor Hb 3:3b.—IPol 1:3a. Foll. by παρά τινα for comparison Hb 3:3a; 11:4; Hs 9, 18, 2. ὅσῳ πλείονος κατηξιώθημεν γνώσεως, τοσούτῳ μᾶλλον 1 Cl 41:4.—τὸ πλεῖον μέρος as adv. acc. for the greater part Hv 3, 6, 4a.
    β. as subst. πλεῖον, πλέον more τὸ πλεῖον the greater sum (cp. Diod S 1, 82, 2=the greater part; Ps 89:10) Lk 7:43. πλεῖον λαμβάνειν receive a larger sum Mt 20:10. W. partitive gen. ἐπὶ πλεῖον προκόψουσιν ἀσεβείας they will arrive at an ever greater measure of impiety=become more and more deeply involved in impiety 2 Ti 2:16. W. a gen. of comparison πλεῖον τῆς τροφῆς someth. greater (more important) than food Mt 6:25; Lk 12:23. πλεῖον Ἰωνᾶ Mt 12:41; cp. vs. 42; Lk 11:31, 32. ἡ χήρα πλεῖον πάντων ἔβαλεν the widow put in more than all the rest Mk 12:43; Lk 21:3. μηδὲν πλέον nothing more (Jos., Bell. 1, 43; cp. Just., D. 2, 3 οὐδὲν πλέον); the words than, except following are expressed by παρά and the acc. Lk 3:13 or by πλήν w. gen. Ac 15:28, w. εἰ μή Hs 1:6.—The acc. is used as an adv. more, in greater measure, to a greater degree (Herm. Wr. 13, 21 Nock after the mss.) Lk 7:42; IRo 1:1; IEph 6:2; w. a gen. of comparison Mt 5:20 (περισσεύω 1aβ); J 21:15; IPol 5:2 (s. Ad’Alès, RSR 25, ’35, 489–92). τριετίαν ἢ καὶ πλεῖον for three years or even more Ac 20:18 D (cp. TestAbr B 7 p. 111, 27 [Stone p. 70, 27]).—ἐπὶ πλεῖον any farther (of place) Ac 4:17 (TestGad 7:2; Ath. 12 [ἐπί 4bβ]); (of time) at length Ac 20:9 (ἐπί 18cβ) or any longer, too long 24:4; 1 Cl 55:1 (ἐπί 18cβ); any more, even more (ἐπί 13) 2 Ti 3:9; 1 Cl 18:3 (Ps 50:4). Strengthened πολὺ πλέον much more, much rather (4 Macc 1:8; cp. X., An. 7, 5, 15; BGU 180, 12f [172 A.D.] πολλῷ πλεῖον; Ar. 11, 7 πολλῷ πλεῖον) Dg 2:7; 4:5.—Also w. indications of number (s. 1bα) πλεῖον ἢ ἄρτοι πέντε Lk 9:13 (the words πλ. ἤ outside the constr. as X., An. 1, 2, 11). In πλείω δώδεκα λεγιῶνας ἀγγέλων more than twelve legions of angels Mt 26:53 the text is uncertain (B-D-F §185, 4; s. Rob. 666).—The adv. can also be expressed by πλειόνως (Aeneas Tact. 237; Jos., Ant. 17, 2; Leontios 24, p. 52, 10) more ὅσον … πλειόνως the more … the more IEph 6:1.
    ⓒ superl. πλεῖστος, ον
    α. adj.
    א. superlative proper τὸ πλεῖστον μέρος the greatest part w. partitive gen. Hs 8, 2, 9; 9, 7, 4. As adv. acc. for the greatest part 8, 5, 6; 8, 10, 1 (s. μέρος 1d).
    ב. elative (s. Mayser II/1, 1926, 53) very great, very large (ὁ) πλεῖστος ὄχλος Mt 21:8 (ὁ πλεῖστος ὄχλος could also be the greatest part of the crowd, as Thu. 7, 78, 2; Pla., Rep. 3, 397d); Mk 4:1.
    β. subst. οἱ πλεῖστοι the majority, most Ac 19:32 D (Just., D. 1, 4; cp. D. 48, 4 πλεῖστοι).
    ③ pert. to being high on a scale of extent
    ⓐ positive πολύς, πολλή, πολύ
    α. as simple adj., to denote degree much, great, strong, severe, hard, deep, profound (Diod S 13, 7, 4 πολὺς φόβος; schol. on Apollon. Rhod. 4, 57; 58 p. 265, 3 πολλὴ δικαιοσύνη; Eccl 5:16 θυμὸς π.; Sir 15:18 σοφία; TestAbr A 20 p. 103, 4 [Stone p. 54] ἀθυμία; Just., D. 3, 1 ἠρεμία) ἀγάπη Eph 2:4. ἀγών 1 Th 2:2. ἄθλησις Hb 10:32. ἁπλότης Hv 3, 9, 1. ἀσιτία Ac 27:21. βία 24:6 [7] v.l. γογγυσμός J 7:12. διακονία Lk 10:40. δοκιμή 2 Cor 8:2. δόξα Mt 24:30; Hv 1, 3, 4; 2, 2, 6. δύναμις Mk 13:26. ἐγκράτεια strict self-control Hv 2, 3, 2. εἰρήνη complete or undisturbed peace (Diod S 3, 64, 7; 11, 38, 1) Ac 24:2. ἔλεος 1 Pt 1:3. ἐπιθυμία 1 Th 2:17. ζημία Ac 27:10. ζήτησις 15:7. θλῖψις 2 Cor 2:4a; 1 Th 1:6. καύχησις 2 Cor 7:4b (pred.). μακροθυμία Ro 9:22. ὀδυρμός Mt 2:18. παράκλησις 2 Cor 8:4. παρρησία (Wsd 5:1) 3:12; 7:4a (pred.); 1 Ti 3:13; Phlm 8. πεποίθησις 2 Cor 8:22c. πλάνη 2 Cl 1:7. πληροφορία 1 Th 1:5. πόνος Col 4:13. σιγή a great or general hush (X., Cyr. 7, 1, 25; Arrian, Anab. 5, 28, 4) Ac 21:40. στάσις 23:10. τρόμος 1 Cor 2:3. φαντασία Ac 25:23. χαρά 8:8; Phlm 7. ὥρα πολλή late hour (Polyb. 5, 8, 3; Dionys. Hal. 2, 54; Jos., Ant. 8, 118) Mk 6:35ab.
    β. subst. πολλά in the acc. used as adv. greatly, earnestly, strictly, loudly, often etc. (X., Cyr. 1, 5, 14; Diod S 13, 41, 5; Lucian, Dial. Deor. 19, 2; Aelian, VH 1, 23; 4 Km 10:18; Is 23:16; TestSol 1:1; GrBar; ApcMos; Jos., Ant. 14, 348) ἀλαλάζειν πολλά Mk 5:38 (s. ἀλαλάζω). πολλὰ ἁμαρτάνειν Hs 4:5c (ApcMos 32). π. ἀνακρίνειν Ac 28:18 v.l. π. ἀπορεῖν Mk 6:20 (Field, Notes 29). π. ἀσπάζεσθαι 1 Cor 16:19 (s. ἀσπάζομαι 1a). δεηθῆναι π. (GrBar 4:14; Jos., Vi. 173; 343) Hs 5, 4, 1. διαστέλλεσθαι Mk 5:43 (s. διαστέλλω). π. ἐπιτιμᾶν 3:12. π. ἐρωτᾶν earnestly pray Hv 2, 2, 1. κατηγορεῖν π. Mk 15:3 (s. κατηγορέω 1a). κηρύσσειν π. talk freely 1:45. κλαίειν bitterly Ac 8:24 D (ApcMos 39). κοπιᾶν (ApcMos 24; CIG IV 9552, 5 … μοι πολλὰ ἐκοπίασεν, cp. Dssm., LO 266, 5 [LAE 317]) work hard Ro 16:6, 12; 2 Cl 7:1b. νηστεύειν π. fast often Mt 9:14a. ὀμνύναι π. Mk 6:23. παρακαλεῖν Mk 5:10, 23; Ac 20:1 D; 1 Cor 16:12. π. πταίειν make many mistakes Js 3:2. π. σπαράσσειν convulse violently Mk 9:26a.—W. the art. ἐνεκοπτόμην τὰ πολλά I have been hindered these many times (cp. Ro 1:13 πολλάκις) Ro 15:22 (v.l. πολλάκις here too).
    γ. subst. πολύ in the acc. used as adv. greatly, very much, strongly (Da 6:15, 24 Theod.) ἀγαπᾶν πολύ show much affection, love greatly Lk 7:47b. κλαίειν π. weep loudly Rv 5:4.—Mk 12:27; Ac 18:27.
    ⓑ superlative, the neut. acc. πλεῖστον, α as adv. (sing. Hom. et al.; pl. Pind. et al.)
    α. pl. πλεῖστα in the formula of greeting at the beginning of a letter πλεῖστα χαίρειν (POxy 742; 744; 1061 [all three I B.C.]; PTebt 314, 2 [II A.D.] and very oft. in pap.—Griech. pap ed. Ltzm.: Kl. Texte 142, 1910, p. 4, 5, 6, 7 al.; Preis. II s.v. πλεῖστος) heartiest greeting(s) IEph ins; IMg ins; ITr ins; IRo ins; ISm ins; IPol ins.
    β. sing. τὸ πλεῖστον at the most (Aristoph., Vesp. 260; Diod S 14, 71, 3 πεμπταῖοι ἢ τὸ πλ. ἑκταῖοι; POxy 58, 17; PGiss 65:9) κατὰ δύο ἢ τὸ πλ. τρεῖς (word for word like Περὶ ὕψους 32, 1) 1 Cor 14:27.—B. 922f. DELG. M-M. EDNT. TW.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > πολύς

  • 18 ὄνομα

    ὄνομα, ατος, τό (Hom.+).
    ① proper name of an entity, name
    ⓐ gener. τῶν ἀποστόλων τὰ ὀνόματα ἐστιν ταῦτα Mt 10:2; cp. Rv 21:14. τῶν παρθένων τὰ ὀν. Hs 9, 15, 1. τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ πατρός Lk 1:59. ὄν. μοι, sc. ἐστίν, my name is (Od. 9, 366) Mk 5:9b. τί ὄν. σοι; what is your name? vs. 9a; w. copula Lk 8:30.—The expressions ᾧ (ᾗ) ὄν., οὗ τὸ ὄν., καὶ τὸ ὄν. αὐτοῦ (αὐτῆς), ὄν. αὐτῷ (parenthetic) are almost always without the copula (B-D-F §128, 3; Rob. 395): ᾧ (ᾗ) ὄν. (Sb 7573, 13 [116 A.D.]; Demetr.: 722 Fgm. 1, 5 Jac.; Just., A I, 53, 8 ᾧ ὄν. Λώτ) Lk 1:26, 27a; 2:25; 8:41; 24:13, 18 v.l.; Ac 13:6.—οὗ τὸ ὄν. (without a verb as BGU 344, 1) Mk 14:32. Cp. ὧν τὰ ὀνόματα ἐν βίβλῳ ζωῆς Phil 4:3 (ὧν τὰ ὀν. is a formula [Dssm., LO 95=LAE 121]. S. esp. BGU 432 II, 3 ὧν τὰ ὀν. τῷ βιβλιδίῳ δεδήλωται).—καὶ τὸ ὄν. αὐτῆς Lk 1:5b. καὶ τὸ ὄν. τῆς παρθένου Μαριάμ vs. 27b.—ὄν. αὐτῷ (Demosth. 32, 11 Ἀριστοφῶν ὄνομʼ αὐτῷ; Dionys. Hal. 8, 89, 4; Aelian, NA 8, 2 γυνὴ … Ἡρακληὶς ὄν. αὐτῇ; LXX) J 1:6; 3:1. ὁ καθήμενος ἐπάνω αὐτοῦ (i.e. τοῦ ἵππου), ὄν. αὐτῷ (ὁ) θάνατος Rv 6:8; cp. 9:11a.—W. the copula ἦν δὲ ὄν. τῷ δούλῳ Μάλχος J 18:10 (POxy 465, 12 ὁ δὲ κραταιὸς αὐτοῦ, ὄν. αὐτῷ ἐστιν Νεβύ, μηνύει; Jos., Ant. 19, 332). ἄγγελος …, οὗ τὸ ὄν. ἐστιν Θεγρί Hv 4, 2, 4.—The dat. is quite freq. ὀνόματι named, by name (X., Hell. 1, 6, 29 Σάμιος ὀνόματι Ἱππεύς; Tob 6:11 BA; 4 Macc 5:4; Just., D. 85, 6; 115, 3; B-D-F §160; 197; Rob. 487) ἄνθρωπον ὀν. Σίμωνα Mt 27:32; cp. Mk 5:22; Lk 1:5a; 5:27; 10:38; 16:20; 23:50; 24:18; Ac 5:1, 34; 8:9; 9:10–12, 33, 36; 10:1; 11:28; 12:13; 16:1, 14; 17:34; 18:2, 7, 24; 19:24; 20:9; 21:10; 27:1; 28:7; MPol 4. Also the acc. τοὔνομα (on the crasis s. B-D-F §18; Mlt-H. 63; FPreisigke, Griech. Urkunden des ägypt. Mus. zu Kairo [1911] 2, 6 γυνὴ Ταμοῦνις τοὔνομα; Diod S 2, 45, 4 πόλιν τοὔνομα Θ.; Lucian, Dial. Deor. 3; Philo, Leg. All. 1, 68; Jos., Ant. 7, 344, Vi. 382) named, by name (the acc. as X. et al., also 2 Macc 12:13; Demetr.: 722 Fgm. 1, 5 Jac. υἱὸν ὄ. Δάν.—B-D-F §160; Rob. 487) Mt 27:57. (Cp. ὄν. gener. as ‘mode of expression’ εἰ καὶ διάφορα ὀνόματα ἐστιν, ἀλλʼ … οἰκείαν … δέχεται τὴν νόησιν although there are various ways of expressing it, it nevertheless has a definite sense Did., Gen. 86, 22 [of various metaphors and images for the soul].)
    ⓑ used w. verbs
    α. as their obj.: ὄν. ἔχειν Did., Gen. 29, 6 bear the name or as name, be named ὄν. ἔχει Ἀπολλύων Rv 9:11b (in this case the name Ἀ. stands independently in the nom.; B-D-F §143; Rob. 458). καλεῖν τὸ ὄν. τινος w. the name foll. in the acc. (after the Hb.; B-D-F §157, 2; Rob. 459) καλέσεις τὸ ὄν. αὐτοῦ Ἰησοῦν you are to name him Jesus Mt 1:21; Lk 1:31.—Mt 1:25. καλέσεις τὸ ὄν. αὐτοῦ Ἰωάννην Lk 1:13. καλέσουσιν τὸ ὄν. αὐτοῦ Ἐμμανουήλ Mt 1:23 (Is 7:14). διδόναι GJs 6:2. Pass. w. the name in the nom. (cp. GrBar 6:10 Φοῖνιξ καλεῖται τὸ ὄν. μου) ἐκλήθη τὸ ὄν. αὐτοῦ Ἰησοῦς Lk 2:21; cp. Rv 19:13. Also τὸ ὄν. τοῦ ἀστέρος λέγεται ὁ ῎ Αψινθος Rv 8:11.—ἐπιθεῖναι ὄν. τινι w. acc. of the name Mk 3:16f; cp. 12:8f; κληρονομεῖν ὄν. receive a name Hb 1:4=1 Cl 36:2. κληροῦσθαι τὸ αὐτὸ ὄν. obtain the same name (s. κληρόω 2) MPol 6:2.—τὰ ὀν. ὑμῶν ἐγγέγραπται ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς Lk 10:20.—Rv 13:8; 17:8. ἐξαλείψω τὸ ὄν. αὐτῶν 1 Cl 53:3 (Dt 9:14); Rv 3:5a (perh. to be placed in 4 below); s. ἐξαλείφω.
    β. in another way (εἰ δέ τις ὀνόματι καλέσει but if anyone is so named Hippol., Ref. 6, 20, 2): ὸ̔ς καλεῖται τῷ ὀνόματι τούτῳ who is so named Lk 1:61. ἀνὴρ ὀνόματι καλούμενος Ζακχαῖος a man whose name was Zacchaeus 19:2. καλεῖν τι (i.e. παιδίον) ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματί τινος name someone after someone 1:59. Cp. IMg 10:1. This leads to
    ⓒ used w. prepositions: ἐξ ὀνόματος (Ctesias, Ind. p. 105 M.: Diod S 13, 15, 1; 37, 15, 2; Appian, Mithrid. 59, §243, Bell. Civ. 3, 21 §77; 4, 73 §310; PGM 4, 2973; Jos., Ant. 2, 275) by name, individually, one by one (so that no one is lost in the crowd) ἐξ ὀν. πάντας ζήτει IPol 4:2. ἀσπάζομαι πάντας ἐξ ὀνόματος 8:2. πάντες ἐξ ὀν. συνέρχεσθε (parallel to κατʼ ἄνδρα) IEph 20:2.—κατʼ ὄν. by name, individually (Diod S 16, 44, 2; Gen 25:13; EpArist 247; Jos., Bell. 7, 14) J 10:3 (New Docs 3, 77f; animals called individually by name: Ps.-Aristot., Mirabil. 118.—HAlmqvist, Plut. u. das NT ’46, 74). Esp. in greetings (BGU 27, 18 [II A.D.] ἀσπάζομαι πάντας τοὺς φιλοῦντάς σε κατʼ ὄν.; POxy 1070, 46; pap in Dssm., LO 160/1, ln. 14f [LAE 193, ln. 15, note 21]; New Docs 3, 77f) 3J 15; ISm 13:2b. ῥάβδους ἐπιγεγραμμένας ἑκάστης φυλῆς κατʼ ὄν. staffs, each one inscribed with the name of a tribe 1 Cl 43:2b.
    ⓓ used in combination with God and Jesus. On the significance of the Divine Name in history of religions s. FGiesebrecht, Die atl. Schätzung des Gottesnamens 1901; Bousset, Rel.3 309ff; ADieterich, Eine Mithrasliturgie 1903, 110ff; FConybeare, JQR 8, 1896; 9, 1897, esp. 9, 581ff; JBoehmer, Das bibl. ‘im Namen’ 1898, BFCT V 6, 1901, 49ff, Studierstube 2, 1904, 324ff; 388ff; 452ff; 516ff; 580ff; BJacob, Im Namen Gottes 1903;WHeitmüller, ‘Im Namen Jesu’ 1903; WBrandt, TT 25, 1891, 565ff; 26, 1892, 193ff; 38, 1904, 355ff; RHirzel, Der Name: ASG 36, 2, 1918; Schürer III4 409–11; HObbink, De magische betekenis van den naam inzonderheid in het oude Egypte 1925; OGrether, Name u. Wort Gottes im AT ’34; HHuffman, Name: 1148–52.—The belief in the efficacy of the name is extremely old; its origin goes back to the most ancient times and the most primitive forms of intellectual and religious life. It has exhibited an extraordinary vitality. The period of our lit. also sees—within as well as without the new community of believers—in the name someth. real, a piece of the very nature of the personality whom it designates, expressing the person’s qualities and powers. Accordingly, names, esp. holy names, are revered and used in customary practices and ritual (σέβεσθαι θεῶν ὀνόματα Theoph. Ant., 1, 9 [p. 76, 7]), including magic. In Israelite tradition the greatest reverence was paid to the holy name of God and to its numerous paraphrases or substitutes; the names of angels and patriarchs occupied a secondary place. The syncretistic practices of the period revered the names of gods, daemons, and heroes, or even magic words that made no sense at all, but had a mysterious sound. The Judeo-Christians revere and use the name of God and, of course, the name of Jesus. On magic in Jewish circles, s. Schürer III 342–79; for the NT period in general s. MSmith, Clement of Alexandria and a Secret Gospel of Mark ’73, 195–230.—The names of God and Jesus
    α. in combination w. attributes: διαφορώτερον ὄν. a more excellent name Hb 1:4=1 Cl 36:2 (διάφορος 2). ἅγιον τὸ ὄν. αὐτοῦ Lk 1:49 (cp. Ps 110:9; Lev 18:21; 22:2; PGM 3, 570; 627; 4, 1005; 3071; 5, 77; 13, 561 μέγα κ. ἅγιον). τὸ μεγαλοπρεπὲς καὶ ἅγιον ὄν. αὐτοῦ 1 Cl 64; τὸ μέγα καὶ ἔνδοξον ὄν. Hv 4, 1, 3; 4, 2, 4 (on ἔνδοξον ὄν., cp. EPeterson, Εἷ θεός 1926, 282.—ὄν. μέγα κ. ἅγ. κ. ἔνδ.: PGM 13, 183f; 504f). τὸ μέγα καὶ θαυμαστὸν καὶ ἔνδοξον ὄν. Hs 9, 18, 5; τὸ πανάγιον καὶ ἔνδοξον ὄν. 1 Cl 58:1a; τοῦ παντοκράτορος καὶ ἐνδόξου ὄν. Hv 3, 3, 5; τὸ πανάρετον ὄν. 1 Cl 45:7; τῷ παντοκράτορι καὶ ἐνδόξῳ ὀνόματι 60:4; τὸ ὁσιώτατον τῆς μεγαλωσύνης αὐτοῦ ὄν. 58:1b. τὸ ὄν. μου θαυμαστὸν ἐν τοῖς ἔθνεσι D 14:3 (cp. Mal 1:14). The words ὄν. θεοπρεπέστατον IMg 1:2 are difficult to interpret (s. Hdb. ad loc.; θεοπρεπής b).
    β. in combination w. verbs: ἁγιάζειν τὸ ὄν. Mt 6:9 (AFridrichsen, Helligt vorde dit naun: DTT 8, 1917, 1–16). Lk 11:2; D 8:2 (ἁγιάζω 3). βλασφημεῖν (q.v. bγ) τὸ ὄν. Rv 13:6; 16:9; pass. βλασφημεῖται τὸ ὄν. (Is 52:5) Ro 2:24; 2 Cl 13:1f, 4; ITr 8:2. βλασφημίας ἐπιφέρεσθαι τῷ ὀν. κυρίου bring blasphemy upon the name of the Lord 1 Cl 47:7. πφοσέθηκαν κατὰ ὄν. τοῦ κυρίου βλασφημίαν Hs 6, 2, 3; βεβηλοῦν τὸ ὄν. 8, 6, 2 (s. βεβηλόω). ἀπαγγελῶ τὸ ὄν. τ. ἀδελφοῖς μου Hb 2:12 (cp. Ps 21:23). ὅπως διαγγελῇ τὸ ὄν. μου ἐν πάσῃ τῇ γῇ Ro 9:17 (Ex 9:16). δοξάζειν τὸ ὄν. (σου, τοῦ κυρίου, τοῦ θεοῦ etc.) Rv 15:4; 1 Cl 43:6; IPhld 10:1; Hv 2, 1, 2; 3, 4, 3; 4, 1, 3; Hs 9, 18, 5 (s. δοξάζω 1; cp. GJs 7:2; 12:1[w. ref. to name of Mary]). ὅπως ἐνδοξασθῇ τὸ ὄν. τοῦ κυρίου ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦ 2 Th 1:12. ἐλπίζειν τῷ ὀν. Mt 12:21 (vv.ll. ἐν or ἐπὶ τῷ ὀν.; the pass. on which it is based, Is 42:4, has ἐπὶ τῷ ὀν.). ἐπικαλεῖσθαι τὸ ὄν. κυρίου (as PsSol 6:1) or αὐτοῦ, σου etc. (w. ref. to God or Christ) call on the name of the Lord Ac 2:21 (Jo 3:5); 9:14, 21; 22:16; Ro 10:13 (Jo 3:5); 1 Cor 1:2. ψυχὴ ἐπικεκλημένη τὸ μεγαλοπρεπὲς καὶ ἅγιον ὄν. αὐτοῦ a person who calls upon his exalted and holy name 1 Cl 64.—Pass. πάντα τὰ ἔθνη ἐφʼ οὓς ἐπικέκληται τὸ ὄν. μου ἐπʼ αὐτούς Ac 15:17 (Am 9:12). τὸ καλὸν ὄν. τὸ ἐπικληθὲν ἐφʼ ὑμᾶς Js 2:7 (on καλὸν ὄν. cp. Sb 343, 9 and the Pompeian graffito in Dssm., LO 237 [LAE 276]). πάντες οἱ ἐπικαλούμενοι τῷ ὀν. αὐτοῦ all those who are called by (the Lord’s) name Hs 9, 14, 3; cp. οἱ κεκλημένοι τῷ ὀν. κυρίου those who are called by the name of the Lord 8, 1, 1. ἐπαισχύνεσθαι τὸ ὄν. κυρίου τὸ ἐπικληθὲν ἐπʼ αὐτούς be ashamed of the name that is named over them 8, 6, 4. ὁμολογεῖν τῷ ὀν. αὐτοῦ praise his name Hb 13:15 (cp. PsSol 15:2 ἐξομολογήσασθαι τῷ ὀνόματι σου). ὀνομάζειν τὸ ὄν. κυρίου 2 Ti 2:19 (Is 26:13). ψάλλειν τῷ ὀν. σου Ro 15:9 (Ps 17:50). οὐ μὴ λάβῃς ἐπὶ ματαίῳ τὸ ὄν. κυρίου 19:5 (Ex 20:7; Dt 5:11).—Although in the preceding examples the name is oft. practically inseparable fr. the being that bears it, this is perh. even more true of the foll. cases, in which the name appears almost as the representation of the Godhead, as a tangible manifestation of the divine nature (Quint. Smyrn. 9, 465 Polidarius, when healing, calls on οὔνομα πατρὸς ἑοῖο ‘the name of his father’ [Asclepius]; τοσοῦτον … δύναται τὸ ὄ. τοῦ Ἰησοῦ κατὰ τῶν δαιμόνων Orig., C. Cels. 1, 56, 11; Dt 18:7; 3 Km 8:16; Ps 68:37; Zech 13:2 ἐξολεθρεύσω τὰ ὀν. τῶν εἰδώλων; Zeph 1:4; PsSol 7:6; Just., D. 121, 3 ὑποτάσσεσθαι αὐτοῦ ὀν.): the ‘name’ of God is ἀρχέγονον πάσης κτίσεως 1 Cl 59:3. Sim. τὸ ὄν. τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ θεοῦ μέγα ἐστὶ καὶ τὸν κόσμον ὅλον βαστάζει Hs 9, 14, 5. λατρεύειν τῷ παναρέτῳ ὀν. αὐτοῦ worship the most excellent name (of the Most High) 1 Cl 45:7. ὑπακούειν τῷ παναγίῳ καὶ ἐνδόξῳ ὀν. αὐτοῦ be obedient to his most holy and glorious name 58:1a. ὑπήκοον γενέσθαι τῷ παντοκρατορικῷ καὶ παναρέτῳ ὀν. 60:4. κηρύσσειν τὸ ὄν. τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ θεοῦ Hs 9, 16, 5. ἐπιγινώσκειν τὸ ὄν. τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ θεοῦ 9, 16, 7. φοβεῖσθαι τὸ ὄν. σου Rv 11:18. φανεροῦν τινι τὸ ὄν. σου J 17:6. γνωρίζειν τινὶ τὸ ὄν. σου vs. 26. πιστεύειν τῷ ὀν. τοῦ υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ believe in the name of (God’s) son 1J 3:23. Also πιστεύειν εἰς τὸ ὄν. (s. γב below and s. πιστεύω 2aβ).—Of the name borne by followers of Jesus Christ (cp. Theoph. Ant. 1, 1 [p. 58, 13]): κρατεῖς τὸ ὄν. μου you cling to my name Rv 2:13. The same mng. also holds for the expressions: λαμβάνειν τὸ ὄν. τοῦ υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ Hs 9, 12, 4; 8; 9, 13, 2a; 7. τοῦ βαστάσαι τὸ ὄν. μου ἐνώπιον ἐθνῶν to bear my name before (the) Gentiles Ac 9:15. τὸ ὄν. ἡδέως βαστάζειν bear the name gladly Hs 8, 10, 3; cp. 9, 28, 5b. τὸ ὄν. τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ θεοῦ φορεῖν 9, 13, 3; 9, 14, 5f; 9, 15, 2; cp. 9, 13, 2b. Christians receive this name at their baptism: πρὶν φορέσαι τὸν ἄνθρωπον τὸ ὄν. τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ θεοῦ νεκρός ἐστιν before a person bears the name of God’s Son (which is given the candidate at baptism), he is dead 9, 16, 3. Of dissemblers and false teachers ὄν. μὲν ἔχουσιν, ἀπὸ δὲ τῆς πίστεως κενοί εἰσιν they have the (Christian) name, but are devoid of faith 9, 19, 2. Of Christians in appearance only ἐν ὑποκρίσει φέροντες τὸ ὄν. τοῦ κυρίου who bear the Lord’s name in pretense Pol 6:3. δόλῳ πονηρῷ τὸ ὄν. περιφέρειν carry the name about in wicked deceit (evidently of wandering preachers) IEph 7:1. τὸ ὄν. ἐπαισχύνονται τοῦ κυρίου αὐτῶν they are ashamed of their Lord’s name Hs 9, 21, 3. More fully: ἐπαισχύνονται τὸ ὄν. αὐτοῦ φορεῖν 9, 14, 6.
    γ. used w. prepositions
    א. w. διά and the gen. διὰ τοῦ ὀνόματός μου πιστεύειν PtK 3 p. 15 ln. 12; σωθῆναι διὰ τοῦ μεγάλου καὶ ἐνδόξου ὀν. be saved through the great and glorious name Hv 4, 2, 4. εἰς τὴν βασιλείαν τοῦ θεοῦ εἰσελθεῖν διὰ τοῦ ὀν. τοῦ υἱοῦ (τοῦ θεοῦ) Hs 9, 12, 5. ἄφεσιν ἁμαρτιῶν λαβεῖν διὰ τοῦ ὀν. αὐτοῦ Ac 10:43 (cp. Just., D. 11, 4 al.). σημεῖα … γίνεσθαι διὰ τοῦ ὀν. … Ἰησοῦ by the power of the name 4:30. Differently παρακαλεῖν τινα διὰ τοῦ ὀν. τοῦ κυρίου appeal to someone by the name (= while calling on the name) of the Lord 1 Cor 1:10.—W. διά and the acc. μισούμενοι … διὰ τὸ ὄν. μου hated on account of my name (i.e., because you bear it) Mt 10:22; 24:9; Mk 13:13; Lk 21:17 (Just., A I, 4, 2 al.). ποιεῖν τι εἴς τινα διὰ τὸ ὄν. μου J 15:21. ἀφέωνται ὑμῖν αἱ ἁμαρτίαι διὰ τὸ ὄν. αὐτοῦ your sins are forgiven on account of (Jesus’) name 1J 2:12. βαστάζειν διὰ τὸ ὄν. μου bear (hardship) for my name’s sake Rv 2:3 (s. βαστάζω 2bβ). πάσχειν διὰ τὸ ὄν. (also w. a gen. like αὐτοῦ) Pol 8:2; Hv 3, 2, 1b; Hs 9, 28, 3.
    ב. w. εἰς: somet. evidently as rendering of rabb. לְשֵׁם with regard to, in thinking of δέχεσθαί τινα εἰς ὄν. Ἰ. Χρ. receive someone in deference to Jesus Christ IRo 9:3. δύο ἢ τρεῖς συνηγμένοι εἰς τὸ ἐμὸν ὄν. two or three gathered and thinking of me, i.e., so that I am the reason for their assembling Mt 18:20; but here the other mng. (s. ג below) has had some influence: ‘while naming’ or ‘calling on my name’. τῆς ἀγάπης ἧς ἐνεδείξασθε εἰς τὸ ὄν. αὐτοῦ (i.e. θεοῦ) Hb 6:10 is either the love that you have shown with regard to him, i.e. for his sake, or we have here the frequently attested formula of Hellenistic legal and commercial language (s. Mayser II/2 p. 415; Dssm. B 143ff, NB 25, LO 97f [BS 146f; 197; LAE 121]; Heitmüller, op. cit. 100ff; FPreisigke, Girowesen im griech. Ägypt. 1910, 149ff. On the LXX s. Heitmüller 110f; JPsichari, Essai sur le Grec de la Septante 1908, 202f): εἰς (τὸ) ὄν. τινος to the name=to the account (over which the name stands). Then the deeds of love, although shown to humans, are dedicated to God.—The concept of dedication is also highly significant, in all probability, for the understanding of the expr. βαπτίζειν εἰς (τὸ) ὄν. τινος. Through baptism εἰς (τὸ) ὄν. τ. those who are baptized become the possession of and come under the dedicated protection of the one whose name they bear. An additional factor, to a degree, may be the sense of εἰς τὸ ὄν.=‘with mention of the name’ (cp. Herodian 2, 2, 10; 2, 13, 2 ὀμνύναι εἰς τὸ ὄν. τινος; Cyranides p. 57, 1 εἰς ὄν. τινος; 60, 18=εἰς τὸ ὄν. τ.; 62, 13. Another ex. in Heitmüller 107): Mt 28:19; Ac 8:16; 19:5; D 7:1, (3); 9:5; Hv 3, 7, 3; cp. 1 Cor 1:13, 15. S. βαπτίζω 2c and Silva New, Beginn. I/5, ’33, 121–40.—πιστεύειν εἰς τὸ ὄν. τινος believe in the name of someone i.e. have confidence that the person’s name (rather in the sense of a title, cp. Phil 2:9) is rightfully borne and encodes what the person really is J 1:12; 2:23; 3:18; 1J 5:13.
    ג. with ἐν: ἐν ὀνόματι of God or Jesus means in the great majority of cases with mention of the name, while naming or calling on the name (PsSol 11:8; JosAs 9:1; Just., D. 35, 2 al.; no corresponding use has been found in gener. Gk. lit.; but cp. ἐν ὀν. τοῦ μεγάλου καὶ ὑψίστου θεοῦ Hippol., Ref. 9, 15, 6.—Heitmüller p. 13ff, esp. 44; 49). In many pass. it seems to be a formula. ἐν τῷ ὀν. Ἰησοῦ ἐκβάλλειν δαιμόνια Mk 9:38; 16:17; Lk 9:49. τὰ δαιμόνια ὑποτάσσεται ἡμῖν ἐν τῷ ὀν. σου the demons are subject to us at the mention of your name 10:17. ποιεῖν τι ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι Ac 4:7; cp. Col 3:17. Perh. J 10:25 (but s. below). ἐν τῷ ὀν. Ἰησοῦ … οὗτος παρέστηκεν ὑγιής Ac 4:10. ὄν. … ἐν ᾧ δεῖ σωθῆναι ἡμᾶς vs. 12. παραγγέλλω σοι ἐν ὀν. Ἰ. Χρ. 16:18; cp. 2 Th 3:6; IPol 5:1. σοὶ λέγω ἐν τῷ ὀν. τοῦ κυρίου Ac 14:10 D. Peter, in performing a healing, says ἐν τῷ ὀν. Ἰησοῦ Χρ. περιπάτει 3:6 (s. Heitmüller 60). The elders are to anoint the sick w. oil ἐν τῷ ὀν. τοῦ κυρίου while calling on the name of the Lord Js 5:14.—Of prophets λαλεῖν ἐν τῷ ὀν. κυρίου 5:10. παρρησιάζεσθαι ἐν τῷ ὀν. Ἰησοῦ speak out boldly in proclaiming the name of Jesus Ac 9:27f. βαπτίζεσθαι ἐν τῷ ὀν. Ἰ. Χ. be baptized or have oneself baptized while naming the name of Jesus Christ Ac 2:38 v.l.; 10:48. At a baptism ἐν ὀν. χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ AcPl Ha 3, 32. αἰτεῖν τὸν πατέρα ἐν τῷ ὀν. μου (=Ἰησοῦ) ask the Father, using my name J 15:16; cp. 14:13, 14; 16:24, 26. W. the latter pass. belongs vs. 23 (ὁ πατὴρ) δώσει ὑμῖν ἐν τῷ ὀν. μου (the Father) will give you, when you mention my name. τὸ πνεῦμα ὸ̔ πέμψει ὁ πατὴρ ἐν τῷ ὀν. μου the Spirit, whom the Father will send when my name is used 14:26. To thank God ἐν ὀν. Ἰησοῦ Χρ. while naming the name of Jesus Christ Eph 5:20. ἵνα ἐν τῷ ὀν. Ἰησοῦ πᾶν γόνυ κάμψῃ that when the name of Jesus is mentioned every knee should bow Phil 2:10. χαίρετε, υἱοί, ἐν ὀν. κυρίου greetings, my sons, as we call on the Lord’s name 1:1. ὁ ἐρχόμενος ἐν ὀν. κυρίου whoever comes, naming the Lord’s name (in order thereby to give evidence of being a Christian) D 12:1. ἀσπάζεσθαι ἐν ὀν. Ἰ. Χρ. greet, while naming the name of J. Chr. w. acc. of pers. or thing greeted IRo ins; ISm 12:2. Receive a congregation ἐν ὀν. θεοῦ IEph 1:3. συναχθῆναι ἐν τῷ ὀν. τοῦ κυρίου Ἰ. meet and call on the name of the Lord Jesus=as a Christian congregation 1 Cor 5:4. μόνον ἐν τῷ ὀν. Ἰ. Χρ. only (it is to be) while calling on the name of J. Chr. ISm 4:2.—Not far removed fr. these are the places where we render ἐν τῷ ὀν. with through or by the name (s. ἐν 4c); the effect brought about by the name is caused by its utterance ἀπελούσασθε, ἡγιάσθητε, ἐδικαιώθητε ἐν τῷ ὀν. τοῦ κυρίου Ἰ. Χρ. 1 Cor 6:11. ζωὴν ἔχειν ἐν τῷ ὀν. αὐτοῦ (=Ἰησοῦ) J 20:31. τηρεῖν τινα ἐν τῷ ὀν. (θεοῦ) 17:11f.—ἐν τῷ ὀν. at the command (of), commissioned by ἔργα ποιεῖν ἐν τῷ ὀν. τοῦ πατρός J 10:25 (but s. above). ἔρχεσθαι ἐν τῷ ὀν. τοῦ πατρός 5:43a; in contrast ἔρχ. ἐν τῷ ὀν. τῷ ἰδίῳ vs. 43b. εὐλογημένος ὁ ἐρχόμενος ἐν ὀν. κυρίου 12:13 (Ps 117:26). The Ps-passage prob. has the same sense (despite Heitmüller 53f) in Mt 21:9; 23:39; Mk 11:9; Lk 13:35; 19:38.—OMerlier, Ὄνομα et ἐν ὀνόματι dans le quatr. Év.: RevÉtGr 47, ’34, 180–204; RBratcher, BT 14, ’63, 72–80.
    ד. w. ἕνεκα (and the other forms of this word; s. ἕνεκα 1): of persecutions for one’s Christian faith ἀπάγεσθαι ἐπὶ βασιλεῖς ἕνεκεν τοῦ ὀν. μου Lk 21:12. πάσχειν or ὑποφέρειν εἵνεκα τοῦ ὀνόματος Hv 3, 1, 9; 3, 2, 1; Hs 9, 28, 5. ἕνεκεν τοῦ ὀν. (τοῦ) κυρίου v 3, 5, 2; Hs 9, 28, 6. ἀφιέναι οἰκίας … ἕνεκεν τοῦ ἐμοῦ ὀν. for my name’s sake Mt 19:29. ἔκτισας τὰ πάντα ἕνεκεν τοῦ ὀν. σου you created all things for your name’s sake, i.e. that God’s name might be praised for the benefits which the works of creation bring to humankind D 10:3.
    ה. w. ἐπί and the dat.: ἐπὶ τῷ ὀν. τινος when someone’s name is mentioned or called upon, or mentioning someone’s name (LXX; En 10:2; Just., D. 39, 6; Ath. 23, 1; s. Heitmüller 19ff; 43ff; s. also 47ff; 52ff; 87ff) in the NT only of the name of Jesus, and only in the synoptics and Ac. ἐλεύσονται ἐπὶ τῷ ὀν. μου they will come using my name Mt 24:5; Mk 13:6; Lk 21:8. κηρύσσειν ἐπὶ τῷ ὀν. αὐτοῦ μετάνοιαν 24:47. λαλεῖν ἐπὶ τῷ ὀν. τούτῳ to speak using this name Ac 4:17; 5:40. διδάσκειν 4:18; 5:28. ποιεῖν δύναμιν ἐπὶ τῷ ὀν. μου Mk 9:39. ἐπὶ τῷ ὀν. σου ἐκβάλλειν δαιμόνια Lk 9:49 v.l. ἐπὶ τῷ σῷ ὀν. τὰς θεραπείας ἐπετέλουν GJs 20:2 (codd.). Of the (spiritual) temple of God: οἰκοδομηθήσεται ναὸς θεοῦ ἐνδόξως ἐπὶ τῷ ὀν. κυρίου the temple of God will be gloriously built with the use of the Lord’s name 16:6f, 8 (quot. of uncertain orig.). βαπτίζεσθαι ἐπὶ τῷ ὀν. Ἰ. Χρ. Ac 2:38. Baptism is also referred to in καλεῖσθαι ἐπὶ τῷ ὀν. τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ θεοῦ receive a name when the name of God’s son is named Hs 9, 17, 4. The words δέχεσθαι (παιδίον) ἐπὶ τῷ ὀν. μου can also be classed here receive (a child) when my name is confessed, when I am called upon Mt 18:5; Mk 9:37; Lk 9:48 (s. Heitmüller 64); but s. also 3 below.—ἐπί w. acc.: πεποιθέναι ἐπὶ τὸ ὁσιώτατον τῆς μεγαλωσύνης αὐτοῦ ὄν. have confidence in (the Lord’s) most sacred and majestic name 1 Cl 58:1b; ἐλπίζειν ἐπὶ τὸ ὄν. hope in the name (of the Lord) 16:8b.
    ו. w. περί and the gen.: εὐαγγελίζεσθαι περὶ τοῦ ὀν. Ἰ. Χ. bring the good news about the name of J. Chr. Ac 8:12.—(W. acc.: ἔχομεν δέος τὸ ὄ. τοῦ θεοῦ Orig., C. Cels. 4, 48, 34).
    ז. w. πρός and acc.: πρὸς τὸ ὄν. Ἰησοῦ … πολλὰ ἐναντία πρᾶξαι do many things in opposing the name of Jesus Ac 26:9.
    ח. w. ὑπέρ and gen.: ὑπὲρ τοῦ ὀν. (Ἰησοῦ) ἀτιμασθῆναι Ac 5:41. πάσχειν 9:16; Hs 9, 28, 2. Cp. Ac 15:26; 21:13. The activity of the apostles takes place ὑπὲρ τοῦ ὀν. αὐτοῦ to the honor of (Jesus’) name Ro 1:5. Cp. 3J 7. Of thankful praying at the Lord’s Supper εὐχαριστοῦμεν σοι … ὑπὲρ τοῦ ἁγίου ὀν. σου, οὗ κατεσκήνωσας ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν we thank you … for your holy name, which you caused to dwell in our hearts D 10:2.
    δ. ὄν. w. ref. to God or Christ not infreq. stands quite alone, simply the Name: Ac 5:41; Phil 2:9 (cp. Diod S 3, 61, 6); 3J 7; 2 Cl 13:1, 4; IEph 3:1; 7:1; IPhld 10:1; Hv 3, 2, 1; Hs 8, 10, 3; 9, 13, 2; 9, 28, 3; 5.
    ② a person (Phalaris, Ep. 128; POxy 1188, 8 [13 A.D.]; BGU 113, 11; Jos., Ant. 14, 22; other exx. in Dssm., NB 24f [BS 196f]; LXX) τὸ ποθητόν μοι ὄν. my dear friend: Alce ISm 13:2; IPol 8:3; Crocus IRo 10:1. Pl. (PThéad 41, 10; PSI 27, 22; Num 1:18 al.) people Ac 1:15; Rv 3:4. ὀνόματα ἀνθρώπων 11:13 (cp. Ael. Aristid. 50, 72 K.=26 p. 523 D.: ὀνόματα δέκα ἀνδρῶν). This is prob. the place for περὶ λόγου καὶ ὀνομάτων καὶ νόμου about teaching and persons and (the) law Ac 18:15.
    ③ the classification under which one belongs, noted by a name or category, title, category (cp. Cass. Dio 38, 44; 42, 24 καὶ ὅτι πολλῷ πλείω ἔν τε τῷ σχήματι καὶ ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι τῷ τῆς στρατηγίας ὢν καταπράξειν ἤλπιζε=he hoped to effect much more by taking advantage of his praetorial apparel and title; ins: Sb 7541, 5 [II A.D.] Νύμφη ὄνομʼ ἐστί σοι; POxy 37 I, 17 [49 A.D.] βούλεται ὀνόματι ἐλευθέρου τὸ σωμάτιον ἀπενέγκασθαι=she claims to have carried off the infant on the basis of its being free-born; Jos., Ant. 12, 154 φερνῆς ὀνόματι; 11, 40; Just., A II, 6, 4 καὶ ἀνθρώπου καὶ σωτῆρος ὄνομα. Other exx. in Heitmüller 50); the possibility of understanding ὄν. as category made it easier for Greeks to take over rabb. לְשֵׁם (s. 1dγב above) in the sense with regard to a particular characteristic, then simply with regard to, for the sake of ὁ δεχόμενος προφήτην εἰς ὄν. προφήτου whoever receives a prophet within the category ‘prophet’, i.e. because he is a prophet, as a prophet Mt 10:41a; cp. vss. 41b, 42.—ὸ̔ς ἂν ποτίσῃ ὑμᾶς ἐν ὀνόματι, ὄτι Χριστοῦ ἐστε whoever gives you a drink under the category that you belong to Christ, i.e. in your capacity as a follower of Christ Mk 9:41. εἰ ὀνειδίζεσθε ἐν ὀν. Χριστοῦ if you are reviled for the sake of Christ 1 Pt 4:14. δοξαζέτω τὸν θεὸν ἐν τῷ ὀν. τούτῳ let the person praise God in this capacity (=ὡς Χριστιανός) vs. 16. δέδεμαι ἐν τῷ ὀν. I am imprisoned for the sake of the Name IEph 3:1.—δέχεσθαι (παιδίον) ἐπὶ τῷ ὀν. μου for my (name’s) sake Mt 18:5; Mk 9:37; Lk 9:48 (cp. Heitmüller 113. But s. 1dγה above).
    ④ recognition accorded a person on the basis of performance, (well-known) name, reputation, fame (Hom. et al.; 1 Ch 14:17; 1 Macc 8:12) φανερὸν ἐγένετο τὸ ὄν. αὐτοῦ his fame was widespread Mk 6:14. ὄν. ἔχειν (Pla., Apol. 38c, Ep. 2, 312c) w. ὅτι foll. have the reputation of Rv 3:1 perh. also 3:5 (s. 1bα; JFuller, JETS 26, ’83, 297–306).
    ⑤ name in terms of office held, office (POxy 58, 6) στασιαζουσῶν τ. φυλῶν, ὁποία αὐτῶν εἴη τῷ ἐνδόξῳ ὀνόματι κεκοσμημένη when the tribes were quarreling as to which one of them was to be adorned with that glorious office 1 Cl 43:2. τὸ ὄν. τῆς ἐπισκοπῆς the office of supervision 44:1.—B. 1263f. OEANE IV 91–96 on Mesopotamian practices. Schmidt, Syn. I 113–24. DELG. M-M. EDNT. TW. Sv.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ὄνομα

  • 19 Wunder

    n; -s, -
    1. übernatürlich: miracle; erstaunlich: auch wonder; bewundernswert: marvel; ein Wunder der Natur / Technik a miracle of nature / engineering; Wunder wirken oder tun perform miracles; fig. work wonders; es grenzt an ein Wunder it’s a near-miracle; auf ein Wunder hoffen be hoping for a miracle; wenn nicht ein Wunder geschieht barring a miracle; wie durch ein Wunder miraculously; ( es ist) kein Wunder(, dass...) (it’s) no wonder (that...); ist es ein Wunder, dass... oder was Wunder, wenn...? is it any wonder that...?; er ist ein Wunder an Ausdauer he’s got amazing stamina; er wird sein blaues Wunder erleben umg. he’s got a surprise coming, he’s in for a (big) surprise; oh Wunder oder Wunder über Wunder! iro. wonders will never cease!
    2. umg.: Wunder was / wer etc. something / someone absolutely fantastic, the greatest thing since sliced bread; sie glaubt Wunder was sie getan hat she thinks what she’s done is absolutely fantastic; er glaubt, er sei Wunder wer auch he thinks he’s the bee’s knees; Wunder wie klug / schön etc. ever so clever (Am. smart)/ beautiful etc., as clever (Am. smart)/ beautiful etc. as anything; das stellte sie sich Wunder wie einfach vor she thought it was going to be ever so easy ( oder as easy as anything oder as easy as pie)
    * * *
    das Wunder
    portent; wonder; miracle
    * * *
    Wụn|der ['vʊndɐ]
    nt -s, -
    1) (=übernatürliches Ereignis AUCH REL) miracle; (= wunderbare Erscheinung) wonder; (= Leistung) marvel, miracle; (= erstaunlicher Mensch) marvel

    das grenzt an ein Wunder — it verges on the miraculous, it's almost a miracle

    die Wunder der Natur/dieser Welt — the wonders of nature/this world

    2)

    meine Eltern denken Wunder was passiert ist/Wunder was über mein Privatleben — my parents think goodness knows what has happened/goodness knows what about my private life

    er glaubt, Wunder wer zu sein/Wunder was geleistet zu haben — he thinks he's marvellous (Brit) or marvelous (US)/done something marvel(l)ous

    er meint, Wunder wie schön das sei — he thinks it's fantastic

    3)

    (= überraschendes Ereignis) Wunder tun or wirken — to do wonders

    es ist ein/kein Wunder, dass... — it's a wonder/no wonder or small wonder that...

    ist es ein Wunder, dass er dick ist? — is it any wonder that he's fat?

    was Wunder, wenn... — it's no wonder or surprise if...

    See:
    → blau
    * * *
    das
    1) (something or someone astonishing or wonderful: the marvels of the circus; She's a marvel at producing delicious meals.) marvel
    2) (something which man is not normally capable of making happen and which is therefore thought to be done by a god or God: Christ's turning of water into wine was a miracle.) miracle
    3) (a fortunate happening that has no obvious natural cause or explanation: It's a miracle he wasn't killed in the plane crash.) miracle
    4) (something strange and wonderful: A very clever child is sometimes called a child prodigy; prodigies of nature.) prodigy
    5) (the quality of being strange or unexpected: The wonder of the discovery is that it was only made ten years ago.) wonder
    * * *
    Wun·der
    <-s, ->
    [ˈvʊndɐ]
    \Wunder was/wer/wie (fam) who knows what/who/how
    er möchte \Wunder was erreichen goodness knows what he wants to achieve
    das hat er sich \Wunder wie einfach vorgestellt he imagined it would be ever so easy
    \Wunder tun [o wirken] to work [or perform] a miracle sing
    an ein \Wunder grenzen to be almost a miracle
    ein/kein \Wunder sein, dass... (fam) to be a/no wonder, that...
    ist es ein \Wunder, dass ich mich so aufrege? (fig fam) is it any wonder that I'm so upset?
    es ist kein \Wunder, dass... (fam) it's no [or little] [or small] wonder that...
    wie durch ein \Wunder miraculously
    \Wunder über \Wunder (fam) wonders will never cease
    er kann nur durch ein \Wunder gerettet werden only a miracle can save him
    was \Wunder[, dass] no wonder
    was \Wunder, dass sie jetzt eingeschnappt ist no wonder she's in a huff; (Phänomen) wonder
    das \Wunder des Lebens the miracle of life
    die \Wunder der Natur the wonders of nature
    ▪ ein \Wunder an etw dat sein to be a miracle of sth
    diese Uhr ist ein \Wunder an Präzision this watch is a miracle of precision
    ▶ sein blaues \Wunder erleben (fam) to be in for a nasty surprise
    * * *
    das; Wunders, Wunder

    Wunder wirken — (fig. ugs.) work wonders

    ein/kein Wunder sein — (ugs.) be a/no wonder

    was Wunder, wenn...? — small or no wonder that...

    er wird sein blaues Wunder erleben — (ugs.) he's in for a nasty shock

    2) (etwas Erstaunliches) wonder

    ein Wunder an... — (Dat.) a miracle of...

    * * *
    Wunder n; -s, -
    1. übernatürlich: miracle; erstaunlich: auch wonder; bewundernswert: marvel;
    ein Wunder der Natur/Technik a miracle of nature/engineering;
    tun perform miracles; fig work wonders;
    es grenzt an ein Wunder it’s a near-miracle;
    auf ein Wunder hoffen be hoping for a miracle;
    wie durch ein Wunder miraculously;
    (es ist) kein Wunder(, dass …) (it’s) no wonder (that …);
    ist es ein Wunder, dass … oder
    was Wunder, wenn …? is it any wonder that …?;
    er ist ein Wunder an Ausdauer he’s got amazing stamina;
    er wird sein blaues Wunder erleben umg he’s got a surprise coming, he’s in for a (big) surprise;
    Wunder über Wunder! iron wonders will never cease!
    2. umg:
    Wunder was/wer etc something/someone absolutely fantastic, the greatest thing since sliced bread;
    sie glaubt, Wunder was sie getan hat she thinks what she’s done is absolutely fantastic;
    er glaubt, er sei Wunder wer auch he thinks he’s the bee’s knees;
    Wunder wie klug/schön etc ever so clever (US smart)/beautiful etc, as clever (US smart)/beautiful etc as anything;
    das stellte sie sich Wunder wie einfach vor she thought it was going to be ever so easy ( oder as easy as anything oder as easy as pie)
    * * *
    das; Wunders, Wunder

    Wunder wirken — (fig. ugs.) work wonders

    ein/kein Wunder sein — (ugs.) be a/no wonder

    was Wunder, wenn...? — small or no wonder that...

    er wird sein blaues Wunder erleben — (ugs.) he's in for a nasty shock

    2) (etwas Erstaunliches) wonder

    ein Wunder an... — (Dat.) a miracle of...

    * * *
    - n.
    marvel n.
    miracle n.
    wonder n.

    Deutsch-Englisch Wörterbuch > Wunder

  • 20 अगस्ति _agasti

    अगस्ति [विन्ध्याख्यं अगं अस्यति; अस्-क्तिच् शकन्ध्वादि˚, Uṇ.4. 179, or अगं विन्ध्याचलं स्त्यायति +स्तभ्नाति, स्त्यै-क; or अगः कुम्भः तत्र स्त्यानः संहतः इत्यगस्त्यः]
    1 'Pitcher-born,' N. of a celebrated Ṛiṣi or sage.
    -2 N. of the star Canopus, of which Agastya is the regent.
    -3 N. of a plant (बकवृक्ष) Sesbana (or Ӕschynomene) Grandiflora [Mar. रुईमंदार]. [The sage Agastya is a very reputed personage in Hindu mythology. In the Ṛigveda he and Vasiṣṭha are said to be the off-springs of Mitra and Varuṇa, whose seed fell from them at the sight of the lovely nymph Urvaśī at a sacrificial session. Part of the seed fell into a jar and part into water; from the former arose Agastya, who is, therefore, called Kumbhayoni, Kumbhajanman, Ghaṭodbhava, Kalaśayoni &c; from the latter Vasiṣṭha. From his parentage Agastya is also called Maitrāvaruṇi, Aurvaśeya, and, as he was very small when he was born, he is also called Mānya. He is represented to have humbled the Vindhya mountains by making them prostrate themselves before him when they tried to rise higher and higher till they wellnigh occupied the sun's disc and obstructed his path. See Vindhya. (This fable is supposed by some, to typify the progress of the Āryas towards the south in their conquest and civilization of India, the humbling of the mountain standing meta- phorically for the removal of physical obstacles in their way). He is also known by the names of Pītābdhi, Samudra-chuluka &c.; from another fable according to which he drank up the ocean because it had offended him and because he wished to help Indra and the gods in their wars with a class of demons called Kāleyas who had hid themselves in the waters and oppressed the three worlds in various ways. His wife was Lopāmudrā. She was also called Kauṣītakī and Varapradā. She bore him two sons, Dṛḍhāsya and Dṛḍhāsyu. In the Rāmāyaṇa Agastya plays a distinguished part. He dwelt in a hermitage on mount Kunjara to the south of the Vindhya and was chief of the hermits of the south. He kept under control the evil spirits who infested the south and a legend relates how he once ate up a Rākṣasa named Vātāpi, who had assumed the form of a ram, and destroyed by a flash of his eye the Rākṣasa's brother who attempted to avenge him. In the course of his wandering Rāma with his wife and brother came to the hermitge of Agastya who received him with the greatest kindness and became his friend, adviser and protector. He gave Rāma the bow of Viṣṇu and accompanied him to Ayodhyā when he was restored to his kingdom after his exile of 14 years. The superhuman power which the sage possessed, is also represented by another legend, according to which he turned king Nahuṣa into a serpent and afterwards restored him to his proper form. In the south he is usually regarded as the first teacher of science and literature to the primitive Dravidian tribes, and his era is placed by Dr. Caldwell in the 7th or 6th century B.C. The Purāṇas represent Agastya as the son of Pulastya (the sage from whom the Rākṣsas sprang) and Havirbhuvā the daughter of Kardama. Several 'hymn-seers' are mentioned in his family, such as his two sons, Indra- bāhu, Mayobhuva and Mahendra, also others who served to perpetuate the family. The sage is represented as a great philosopher, benevolent and kind-hearted, unsurpassed in the science of archery and to have taken a principal part in the colonization of the south; निर्जितासि मया भद्रे शत्रुहस्तादमर्षिणा । अगस्त्येन दुराधर्षा मुनिना दक्षिणेव .दिक् ॥ Rām; अगस्त्याचरितामाशाम् R.4.44; cf. also; अगस्त्यो दक्षिणामाशामाश्रित्य नभसिः स्थितः । वरुणस्यात्मजो योगी विन्ध्यवातापिमर्दनः ॥ and R.6.61; Mv.7.14.] अगस्तितुल्या हि घृताब्धिशोषणे । Udbhaṭa.

    Sanskrit-English dictionary > अगस्ति _agasti

Страницы

См. также в других словарях:

  • The Greatest Show on Turf — was the nickname for the offense fielded by the St. Louis Rams offense during 1999, 2000, and 2001 National Football League seasons. The offense employed was an explosive passing attack mdash; designed by offensive coordinator Mike Martz and… …   Wikipedia

  • The Greatest Siliwangi — The name Siliwangi is alive both in the folklore of the Sundanese and in the classical literary texts of Javanese (East Javanese). The people in West Java and East Java make no difference between fact and fiction, it is due to the text, the… …   Wikipedia

  • The Greatest Love of All (TV series) — The Greatest Love of All (zh s|s=爱·特别的你) is a Singaporean Chinese drama which was telecast on Singapore s free to air channel, MediaCorp TV Channel 8. It made its debut on 29 May 2007, and ended on 25 June 2007. This drama serial consists of 20… …   Wikipedia

  • The Greatest Ukrainians — ( uk. Великі українці) is an Ukrainian TV project which is in its production stage as a nationwide TV talk show. Audience of the talk show is about to participate in interactive voting for famous Ukrainian persons.The show is running under a… …   Wikipedia

  • The Greatest Show in the Galaxy — 151[1] – The Greatest Show in the Galaxy Doctor Who serial Ace and the Doctor at the Psychic …   Wikipedia

  • The Greatest American Hero — infobox television show name = The Greatest American Hero caption = Cover for the second season DVD of The Greatest American Hero format = superhero drama comedy television series runtime = 60 minutes (per episode) country = USA network = ABC… …   Wikipedia

  • The Greatest Story Ever Told (David Banner album) — Infobox Album Name = The Greatest Story Ever Told Type = studio album Artist = David Banner Recorded = 2007 2008 Caption = Released = July 15, 2008 (U.S.) [http://www.david banner.com/ David Banner s Official Website] ] Recorded = Genre = Rap/Hip …   Wikipedia

  • The Emergency (Ireland) — The Emergency ( ga. Ré na Práinne) was an official euphemism used by the Irish Government during the 1940s to refer to its position during World War II. The state was officially neutral during World War II, but declared an official state of… …   Wikipedia

  • The Life and Times of Juniper Lee — Title card. Left to right: Monroe, Juniper and Ray Ray. Genre Animated series, Adventure, Action, Fantasy, comedy, Created by Judd Winic …   Wikipedia

  • The Apprentice (U.S. season 1) — The Apprentice 1 is the first season of The Apprentice , which aired on NBC in the winter and spring of 2004. It is currently available on DVD. It featured 16 candidates.The first season was a ratings smash, ranking at #7 in the average weekly… …   Wikipedia

  • The Rumble in the Jungle — was a boxing match pitting then world Heavyweight champion George Foreman against former world champion and challenger Muhammad Ali that took place on October 30, 1974, in the Mai 20 Stadium in Kinshasa, Zaire (now Democratic Republic of the… …   Wikipedia

Поделиться ссылкой на выделенное

Прямая ссылка:
… Нажмите правой клавишей мыши и выберите «Копировать ссылку»